HEIDENHAIN

-Ii
L
User’s Manual
HEIDENHAIN Conversational
Programming
 3
TNC Guideline
From workpiece drawing to J
program-controlled machining 3
Step Task TNC Refer to
operating mode Section
J
Preparation

4
1 Select tools
2 Set workpiece datum
for coordinate system d

3 Determine spindle speeds

and feed rates
4 Switch on machine 1.3
5 Traverse reference marks
.-l
6 Clamp workpiece
7 Set the datum /
Reset position display d
--- --- --- ------
7a with the 3D touch probe
.J
7b without the 3D touch probe

Entering and testing pat-t programs

8 Enter part program, or load

over external data interface m Or /EXT)5to8,10
9 Test part program for errors

10 Test run: Run the program

z
block by block without tool BJ 3.2
11 If necessary: Optimize
part program 5 to 8

Machining the workpiece

12 Insert tool and run program 3.2

Keys and Controls on the TNC

Override Knobs Programmable Contours

Feed rate
100
Spindle speed
100
0FK FK Free contour programming

0.A
CHF
Chamfer

Straight line

5oQ: 50@: Circle center / Pole for polar coordinates

0 0
Circle around center point/pole
Machine Keys (only available on TE 370 keyboard unit)
Circle with radius

EJl@j NC start/NC stop

Circle with tangential connection

0RWD
Coolant on/off
Elm
mm Spindle on/off
od Corner rounding

Tool Data
Machrne functions
W-B (see machine operating manual)
EE& Enter tool length and radius
@g-m Axis direction keys I-w TOOL Call tool length and radius
- ~~
Visual Display Unit k RL- Activate tool radius compensation

0 Soft keys: for selectrng function on screen

Cylces, Subprograms and Program Section Repeats
Shaft the soft keys
mm
E:F’ Eb:: Define and call cycles
Select screen layout
m
Typewriter Keyboard for Entering Letters and Symbols %-m Enter and call subprograms
program section repeats
and

0 iw] (El (R1 (Tl m p:;;;:: Abort interrupted machrnrng, or

enter a stop in a program
IS0 programs Set datum with the 3D touch probe, or
(GjIFj/S)ITj(Mj
enter touch probe functions in a program
Machine Operating Modes

MANUAL OPERATION Numerical Entry, Editing

m

0
f;s1 ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL Numerical values

r.1 POSITIONING WITH MANUAL DATA INPUT Decrmal point / Algebrarc sign
El
z PROGRAM RUN, SINGLE BLOCK Incremental values / Polar coordinates
a
PROGRAM RUN, FULL SEQUENCE 0 parameters for part familres or
Q in mathematrcal functions
PROGRAMMING AND EDITING
Q Clear numerical entry, or TNC message
TEST RUN
Q Actual positron capture

Cursor Keys and GOT0 Confirm entry and resume dialog

Move cursor (highlight) Ignore dialog prompts and delete words

0000
. . Go drrectly to blocks, cycles and Abort dialog; delete program sections
m parameter functions
Conclude block
Program Management
Select, protect, copy, rename, erase,
Input and output programs MOD functions

HELP function
TNC 370 with TE 370 Keyboard Unit
- TNC 370 with TE 371 Keyboard Unit
 How to use this manual

This manual describes functions and fezitures aYailr;tble on the

TNC370 from MCso%re number 280 K?OOf.

This manual describes all available TNC 370 functions.

For information on your machine tool refer to the machine tool manual.

The NC beginner can use the manual as a workbook. The first part of the
manual deals with the basics of NC technology and describes the TNC
370 functions. It then introduces the techniques of conversational pro-
gramming. Each new function is thoroughly described when it is first
introduced, and the numerous examples can be tried out directly on the
control. The NC beginner should work through this manual from beginning
to end to ensure that he is capable of fully exploiting the features of this
powerful tool.

For the NC expert, this manual serves as a comprehensive reference

work. The table of contents and cross references enable him to quickly
find the topics and information he needs. Easy-to-read dialog flowcharts
show him how to enter the data required for each function.

The dialog flow charts consist of sequentially arranged instruction boxes.

Each key is illustrated next to an explanation of its function to aid the
beginner when he is performing the operation for the first time. The
experienced user can use the key sequences illustrated in the left part of
the flowchart as a quick overview. The TNC dialogs are always presented
on a gray background.

Layout of the dialog flowcharts

Dialog initiation key (soft key)
I

The functions of the keys are explained here.

I Answer the dialog

these keys
with
I

NEXTDIALOGQUESfJQN
c
Function of the key.

Press this key

A dashed line means that either
----------------

0 Function of an alternative key.

Or press this key

L /

. The trail of dots indicates that:

.
. l the dialog is not fully shown, or
l the dialog continues on the next page

-
TNC 370
Contents User's Manual TNC 370

Introduction 1
Manual Operation and Setup 2
Test Run and Program Run 3
Programming 4
Programming Tool Movements
5
Subprograms and Program Section Repeats
6
Programming with Q Parameters
7
Cycles
8
3D Touch Probes
9
External Data Transfer
10
MOD-Functions, HELP Functions
11
Tabels, Overviews and Dialogs 12

TNC 425/TNC 415 B/TNC 407

i 1 Introduction

1.1 TNC370 ............................................................................................... 1-2

L The operating panel with the TE 370 keyboard unit.. ............................................... 1-3
Soft key structure ...................................................................................................... 1-7
TNC Accessories .................................................................................................... 1-l 7

1.2 Fundamentals . . . . .. .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Introduction ............................................................................................................. l-l 8
What is NC7 ............................................................................................................ 1-18
The part program .................................................................................................... l-l 8
Conversational programming .................................................................................. l-l 8
Reference system ................................................................................................... l-l 9
Cartesian coordinate system .................................................................................. 1-l 9
Additional axes ........................................................................................................ I-20
Polar coordinates .................................................................................................... I-20
Setting a pole at a circle center (CC) ..................................................................... l-21
Setting the datum .................................................................................................... I-21
Absolute workpiece positions.. ................................................................................ 1-23
Incremental workpiece positions.. ........................................................................... 1-23
Programming tool movements.. .............................................................................. 1-25
Position encoders.. .................................................................................................. 1-25
Reference marks .................................................................................................... 1-25

1.3 Switch-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*.............................. 1-26

1.4 Graphics and Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . 1-27

Plan view ................................................................................................................. 1-27
Projection in three planes ....................................................................................... 1-28
3D View .................................................................................................................. 1-29
Repeating graphic simulation.. ................................................................................ I-30
Status display .......................................................................................................... 1-31
Additional status displays.. ...................................................................................... 1-31

1.5 Interactive Programming Graphics ................................................ 1-34

Generating graphics during programming .............................................................. 1-34
Generating graphics for an existing program ......................................................... l-34
Magnifying/reducing a detail ................................................................................... 1-35

L
1.6 Programs ........................................................................................... 1-36
Program management ........................................................................................... 1-36
Selecting, protecting, copying, renaming and erasing programs ........................... 1-37

TNC 370
2 Manual Operation and Setup

2.1 Moving the Machine Axes ................................................................. 2-2

Traversing with the axis direction keys ..................................................................... 2-2
Traversing with the electronic handwheel ................................................................ 2-3
Working with the HR 330 electronic handwheel ....................................................... 2-3
Positioning with manual data input ........................................................................... 2-4
Incremental jog positioning ....................................................................................... 2-4

2.2 Spindle Speed S, Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M ... 2-5
To enter the spindle speed S .................................................................................... 2-5
To change the spindle speed S ................................................................................ 2-5
To change the feed rate F ........................................................................................ 2-6
To enter the miscellaneous function M ..................................................................... 2-6

2.3 Setting the Datum without a 3D Touch Probe ................................. 2-7

Setting the datum in the tool axis ............................................................................ .2-7
Setting the datum in the working plane .................................................................... 2-8

TNC 370
 3 Test Run and Program Run

3.1 Test Run .............................................................................................. 3-2

To do a test run ......................................................................................................... 3-2

3.2 Program Run ........................................................................................ 3-3

To run a part program ................................................................................................ 3-3
Interrupting machining .............................................................................................. 3-4
Resuming program run after an interruption ............................................................. 3-5

3.3 Blockwise Transfer: Executing Long Programs ................................ 3-6

3.4 Skipping Blocks During Program Run/Test Run ............................ 3-7

3.5 Optional Interruption of a Program Run .......................................... 3-7

- TNC370
4 Programming

4.1 Editing Part Programs ....................................................................... 4-2

Layout of a program.. ............................................................................................... .4-2
Plain language dialog ............................................................................................... .4-2
Editing functions ....................................................................................................... ,4-3

4.2 Tools .................................................................................................... 4-5

Determining tool data ............................................................................................... ,4-5
Oversizes for lengths and radii - delta values.. ........................................................ 4-6
Entering tool data into the program ......................................................................... .4-7
Entering tool data in program TO0L.T .................................................................... .4-8
Entering tool data in tables ...................................................................................... .4-9
Pocket table for tool changer ................................................................................. .4-l 2
Calling tool data ...................................................................................................... 4-l 3
Tool change ........................................................................................................... .4-l 4

4.3 Tool Compensation Values ............................................................. 4-15

Effect of tool compensation values.. ...................................................................... .4-l 5
Tool radius compensation ...................................................................................... .4-l 6
Machining corners .................................................................................................. .4-l 8

4.4 Program Creation ............................................................................. 4-19

Creating a new part program ................................................................................. ,4-l 9
Defining the blank form .......................................................................................... .4-l 9
-

4.5 Entering Tool-Related Data ............................................................. 4-21

Feed rate F ............................................................................................................. .4-21
Spindle speed S ...................................................................................................... 4-22

4.6 Entering Miscellaneous Functions and STOP . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

4.7 Actual Position Capture . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

4.8 Marking Blocks to be Skipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

4.9 Entering Comments in the Part Program ..*.......................*............ 4-26

TNC 370
 Programming Tool Movements

5.1 General Information on Programming Tool Movements.. .............. 5-2

5.2 Contour Approach and Departure .................................................... 5-4

Starting and end positions ....................................................................................... .5-4
Smooth approach and departure .............................................................................. 5-6

5.3 Path Functions .................................................................................... 5-7

General information ................................................................................................. .5-7
Machine axis movement under program control ..................................................... .5-7
Overview of path functions ....................................................................................... 5-8

5.4 Path Contours - Cartesian Coordinates ........................................ 5-9

Straight line .............................................................................................................. .5-9
Chamfer .................................................................................................................. 5-l 2
Circles and circular arcs - General information ..................................................... 5-14
Circle center CC ...................................................................................................... 5-1 5
Circular path C around the circle center CC.. ......................................................... 5-l 7
Circular path CR with defined radius ...................................................................... 5-20
Circular path CT with tangential connection .......................................................... .5-23
Corner rounding RND ............................................................................................. 5-25

5.5 Path Contours - Polar Coordinates .............................................. 5-27

Polar coordinate origin: Pole CC.. .......................................................................... .5-27
Straight line LP ........................................................................................................ 5-27
Circular path CP around pole CC ........................................................................... 5-30
Circular path CTP with tangential connection.. ....................................................... 5-32
Helical interpolation ................................................................................................. 5-33

5.6 Contours - FK Free Contour Programming ................................... 5-36

Programming contour elements with FK ................................................................ 5-36
Interactive graphics during FK programming ......................................................... 5-38
FK Functions .......................................................................................................... .5-39
Free programming of straight lines ......................................................................... 5-40
Free programming of circular arcs.. ........................................................................ 5-44
Identifying closed contours ..................................................................................... 5-47

5.7 M Functions for Contouring Behavior and Coordinate Data ....... 5-51
Smoothing corners: M90.. ....................................................................................... 5-51
Machining small contour steps: M97 ...................................................................... 5-52
Complete machining of open contours: M98 ......................................................... .5-53
Setting the coordinates for the datum: M91/M92 .................................................. .5-54
Reducing rotary axis display values to under 360”: M94 ...................................... .5-55
Optimized traverse of rotary axes: Ml 26 ............................................................... 5-55
Feed rate at circular arcs: Ml 09/Ml IO/Ml 11 ........................................................ 5-56

5.8 Positioning with Manual Data Input (MDI) ...................................... 5-57

- TNC370
6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats

6.1 Subprograms ................................................................. . .................... 6-2

Principle .................................................................................................................... 6-2
Operating limits ......................................................................................................... 6-2
Programming and calling subprograms .................................................................... 6-3

6.2 Program Section Repeats ................................................................. 6-5

Principle .................................................................................................................... 6-5
Programming notes.. ................................................................................................. 6-5
Programming and calling a program section repeat ................................................ 6-5

6.3 Program as Subprogram ................................................................... 6-8

Principle .................................................................................................................... 6-8
Operating limits ......................................................................................................... 6-8
Calling a program as a subprogram ......................................................................... 6-8

6.4 Nesting ................................................................................................ 6-9

Nesting depth ........................................................................................................... .6-9
Subprogram in a subprogram ................................................................................... 6-9
Repeating program section repeats ....................................................................... 6-l 1
Repeating subprograms .......................................................................................... 6-l 2

TNC 370 -
 7 Programming with Q Parameters

7.1 Part Families - Q Parameters Instead of Numerical Values.. ...... 7-4

7.2 Describing Contours Through Mathematical Functions ................ 7-6

Overview ................................................................................................................... 7-6

7.3 Trigonometric Functions ................................................................... 7-8

Overview .................................................................................................................. .7-8

7.4 If-Then Operations with Q Parameters ............................................ 7-9

Jumps ................................................................................................................... ,7-9
Overview .................................................................................................................. .7-9

7.5 Checking and Changing Q Parameters ......................................... 7-11

7.6 Output of Q Parameters and Messages ......................................... 7-12

Displaying error messages .................................................................................... .7-l 2
Output through an external data interface.. ............................................................ 7-l 3
Assigning values for the PLC.................................................................................. 7-l 3

7.7 Reading from System Data .................. ..* ......................................... 7-14

7.8 Examples for Exercise.. ................................................................... 7-15

Rectangular pocket with corner rounding and tangential approach ....................... 7-l 5
Bolt hole circle ........................................................................................................ .7-l 6
Ellipse .................................................................................................................. 7-l 8
Machining a hemisphere with an end mill .............................................................. .7-20

--

- TNC 370
8 Cycles

8.1 General Overview of Cycles .............................................................. 8-2

Programming a cycle ............................................................................................... .8-3

8.2 Drilling Cycles .................................................................................... 8-5

PECKING (Cycle 1) ................................................................................................. .8-6
DRILLING (Cycle 200) ............................................................................................. .8-7
REAMING (Cycle 201) ............................................................................................. .8-8
BORING (Cycle 202) ............................................................................................... .8-9
UNIVERSAL DRILLING CYCLE (Cycle 203) ........................................................ .8-l 0
TAPPING with a floating tap holder (Cycle 2) ....................................................... .8-l 2
RIGID TAPPING (Cycle 17). ................................................................................... 8-13
Examples for exercise.. .......................................................................................... .8-l 4

8.3 Cycles for Milling Pockets, Studs and Slots ................................. 8-16
POCKET MILLING (Cycle 4) ................................................................................. .8-17
POCKET FINISHING (Cycle 212) ......................................................................... .8-18
STUD FINISHING (Cycle 213) ............................................................................... 8-20
CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING (Cycle 5). ............................................................. .8-22
CIRCULAR POCKET FINISHING (Cycle 214) ...................................................... .8-23
CIRCULAR STUD FINISHING (Cycle 215) ........................................................... ,8-25
SLOT MILLING (Cycle 3). ...................................................................................... .8-27
SLOT with reciprocating plunge-cut (Cycle 210) ................................................... .8-28
CIRCULAR SLOT with reciprocating plunge-cut (Cycle 210) ................................ 8-30
Examples for exercise.. .......................................................................................... .8-32

8.4 Cycles for Machining Hole Patterns ............................................... 8-34

CIRCULAR PATTERN (Cycle 220) ....................................................................... .8-35
LINEAR PATTERN (Cycle 221) .............................................................................. 8-36
Examples for exercise.. .......................................................................................... .8-38

8.5 SL Cycles .......................................................................................... 8-40

CONTOUR GEOMETRY (Cycle 14). ...................................................................... 8-41
ROUGH-OUT (Cycle 6) ......................................................................................... .8-42
SL Cycles: Overlapping contours .......................................................................... .8-44
PILOT DRILLING (Cycle 15) ................................................................................. .8-50
CONTOUR MILLING (Cycle 16). ........................................................................... .8-51

8.6 Cycles for Multipass Milling ............................................................ 8-54

MULTIPASS MILLING (Cycle 230) ........................................................................ 8-55
RULED SURFACE (Cycle 231) .............................................................................. 8-57
Examples for exercise.. .......................................................................................... .8-59

8.7 Cycles for Coordinate Transformations ........................................ 8-60

DATUM SHIFT (Cycle 7) ........................................................................................ 8-61
MIRROR IMAGE (Cycle 8) .................................................................................... .8-63
ROTATION (Cycle IO) ........................................................................................... .8-65
SCALING FACTOR (Cycle 1 1) .............................................................................. .8-66

8.8 Special Cycles .................................................................................. 8-68

DWELL TIME (Cycle 9). ......................................................................................... .8-68
PROGRAM CALL (Cycle 12) .................................................................................. 8-68
ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP (Cycle 13). ............................................................... .8-69
-

TNC 370
 9 3D Touch Probes
.~
9.1 General Information on Touch Probes ............................................. 9-2
TS 120 Triggering touch probe ................................................................................ .9-2
TS 630 Triggering touch probe ................................................................................. 9-2
lT 120 Touch probe for tool measurement.. ........................................................... .9-3

9.2 Touch Probe Cycles in the MANUAL and

ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL Operating Modes ............................... 9-4
To select the touch probe functions ......................................................................... 9-4
Calibrating a triggering 3D touch probe .................................................................... 9-5
Compensating workpiece misalignment ................................................................... 9-7
Setting the datum with the 3D touch probe system ................................................. 9-9

9.3 Measuring Workpieces with a 3D Touch Probe ............................ 9-14

Finding the coordinate of a position on an aligned workpiece ............................... 9-l 4
Finding the coordinates of a corner in the working plane ....................................... 9-14
Measuring workpiece dimensions. .......................................................................... 9-l 5
Measuring angles ................................................................................................... .9-l 6
Measuring with the 3D touch probe during program run ....................................... .9-18
-

9.4 Digitizing with a Triggering 3D Touch Probe (Optional) .............. 9-21

L
Defining the digitizing range.. ................................................................................. .9-22
Input data ............................................................................................................... .9-22
Setting the scanning range .................................................................................... .9-22
. Line-by-line digitizing with Cycle 6 MEANDER ....................................................... 9-24
Contour line digitizing with Cycle 7 CONTOUR LINES ......................................... .9-26
Input data ................................................................................................................ 9-27

9.5 Using Digitized Data in a Part Program ......................................... 9-29

Executing a part program from digitized data ....................................................... .9-30

9.7 Measuring Tools with the TT 120 Touch Probe ............................ 9-31
Calibrating the TT 120 ............................................................................................ 9-33
Measuring the tool length ....................................................................................... 9-34
Measuring the tool radius ....................................................................................... 9-36

- TNC 370
External Data Transfer

10.1 Functions for External Data Transfer ............................................. IO-2

Blockwise transfer ................................................................................................... 1 O-2

10.2 Pin Layout and Connecting Cable for Data Interface .................... .lO-3
RS-232-C/V.24 Interface .......................................................................................... 1O-3

10.3 Preparing the Devices for Data Transfer ......................................... 10-4

HEIDENHAIN devices ............................................................................................. IO-4

Non-HEIDENHAIN devices ...................................................................................... IO-4

TNC 370
 11 MOD Functions, HELP Functions

11.1 Calling and Exiting the MOD Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

11.2 Machine-Specific User Parameters .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..m..................*... 11-2

11.3 Selecting the Programming Format and Unit of Measure............ 11-3

11.4 Setting the Axis Traverse Limits . . . . . . . . ..~......................................... 11-4

11.5 Setting the External Data Interface ................................................. 11-5

RS-232-C Interface ................................................................................................. 1 1-5
BAUD RATE ............................................................................................................ 1 1-5

11.6 Selecting Position Display Types ................................................... 11-6

11.7 Code Numbers .................................................................................. 11-7

L

11.8 NC and PLC Software Numbers, Free Memory ............................. 11-7

11.9 HELP Function ........................................ . ......................................... 11-8

Selecting and exiting HELP .................................................................................... 1 l-8

- TNC 370
12 Tables, Overviews and Dialogs

12.1 General User Parameters ....................................... . ........................ 12-2

Selecting the general user parameters. .................................................................. 12-2
External data transfer ............................................................................................. 12-3
3D Touch probes and digitizing .............................................................................. 12-4
TNC displays, TNC editor ....................................................................................... 12-6
Machining and program run .................................................................................... 12-8
Override behavior, electronic handwheel ............................................................... 12-9

12.2 Miscellaneous Functions (M Functions) ....... . .............................. 12-10

Miscellaneous functions with predetermined effect. ............................................. 12-l 0
Vacant miscellaneous functions ........................................................................... 12-l 1

12.3 Preassigned Q Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 12-12

12.4 Features, Specifications and Accessories .................................. 12-14

Accessories ........................................................................................................... 12-l 6

12.5 TNC Error Messages ...................................................................... 12-17

TNC error messages during programming ........................................................... 12-l 7
TNC error messages during test run and program run ........................................ 12-18
TNC error messages during digitizing .................................................................. 12-21

TNC 370
1 Introduction

1.1 TNC 370 ............................................................................................... 1-2

The operating panel with the TE 370 keyboard unit ............................................... 1-3
Soft key structure ..................................................................................................... 1-7
TNC Accessories .................................................................................................... l-l 7

1.2 Fundamentals ................................................................................... 1-18

introduction ............................................................................................................. 1-I 8
What is NC? ............................................................................................................ l-l 8
The part program .................................................................................................... l-l 8
Conversational programming ................................................................................. l-l 8
Reference system ................................................................................................... l-l 9
Cartesian coordinate system ................................................................................. l-l 9
Additional axes ....................................................................................................... I-20
Polar coordinates .................................................................................................... I-20
Setting a pole at a circle center (CC) .................................................................... 1-21
Setting the datum ................................................................................................... I-21
Absolute workpiece positions ................................................................................. l-23
Incremental workpiece positions ............................................................................ I-23
Programming tool movements ............................................................................... 1-25
Position encoders ................................................................................................... 1-25
Reference marks ................................................................................................... I-25

1.3 Switch-On .......................................................................................... 1-26

1.4 Graphics and Status Display .......................................................... I-27

Plan view ................................................................................................................. 1-27
Projection in three planes.. ..................................................................................... I-28
3D View .................................................................................................................. 1-29
Repeating graphic simulation ................................................................................. I-30
Status display ......................................................................................................... 1-31
Additional status displays ....................................................................................... 1-31

1.5 Interactive Programming Graphics ................................................ l-34

Generating graphics during programming ............................................................. I-34
Generating graphics for an existing program ........................................................ 1-34
Magnifying/reducing a detail .................................................................................. I-35

1.6 Programs.. ......................................................................................... 1-36

Program management .......................................................................................... 1-36
Selecting, protecting, copying, renaming and erasing programs ......................... I-37
1 Introduction
4

1.1 TNC 370

Control
The TNC 370 is a shop-floor programmable contouring control for milling
machines with up to four axes. The spindle can be rotated to a given
angular stop position (oriented spindle stop).

Visual Display Unit and Operating Panel

The flat luminescent monochrome screen clearly displays all information
necessary for operating the TNC 370. The keys on the operating panel
are grouped according to their functions. This simplifies operating and
programming the control. The following keyboard units are available:
l TE 370 with machine operating keys
(such as NC start, NC stop, coolant on/off)
l TE 371 without machine operating keys

Programming
The TNC 370 is programmed directly at the machine with the easy-to-
use HEIDENHAIN plain language dialog format. Programming in IS0
format is also possible, and is described in the TNC 370 User’s Manual
for IS0 Programming.

Graphics
The graphic simulation feature enables you to test programs before
actual machining. Several types of graphic representation can be
selected.

Compatibility
The TNC 370 can execute any part program that was created on a TNC
150B or subsequent HEIDENHAIN control.

1-2 TNC 370 .-

1 Introduction
1 .I TNC 370

The operating panel with the TE 370 keyboard unit

The flat luminescent screen, the control keys, and all machine operating
keys are integrated in the operating panel. If you are using the TE 371
keyboard unit, the machine operating keys are not available.

Flat luminescent
screen
Calls the last soft-key
Soft keys

! r row

Select screen layout,

HELP function

Numerical entries and

editing keys

Calls the next soft-

key row

Alphabetic keyboarl d: Editing keys

Entry of file names
and/or comments; Arrow keys and jump
IS0 programming instruction GOT0

Knobs for feed rate Dialog initiation for

and spindle speed
tool traverse
override

Control on
Electronic (TE 370 only)
handwheel
(TE 370 only) EMERGENCY
STOP button
(TE 370 only)

NC start, NC stop (TE 370 only)

Machine functions
(e.g. coolant on/off,
TE 370 only)

Operating mode keys

Axis direction keys

for tool traverse
(TE 370 only)

TNC 370 1-3

1 Introduction
-/

1.1 TNC 370

Screen Layout

The screen layout is selected with the key. .,

These are the available layouts:

-/

Modes of apcarcvtion !breen layout

PROGRAM RUN, FULL SEQUENCE Program text
PROGRAM RUN, SINGLE BLOCK
TEST RUN
Left: Program text
Right: Program information

Left: Program text

Right: Additional position display

Left: Program text -

Right: Tool information

Left: Program text -/

Right: Active coordinate transformations

(Not in the TEST RUN mode of operation) .-

Left: Program text

Right: Results of automatic tool measurement

PROGRAMMING AND EDITING Program text

Programming graphics

Left: Program text

Right: Programming graphics

Left: Program text

Right: Graphics only during cycle programming -/

The screen layout cannot be changed in the MANUAL, HANDWHEEL d

and POSITIONING WITH MANUAL DATA INPUT modes.

1-4 TNC 370 -

 1 Introduction
i-
1.1 TNC 370

MANUAL OPERATION, EL. HANDWHEEL and

POSITIONING WITH MANUAL DATA INPUT modes of operation:

__ Status
MRNURL OPERRTION R -
display
operating
modes
ACTL.
X -25,580 1 y ;,
l Coordinates Y +21,325
t indicates -Soft keys
l

control is in 2 +1509080 II 2 ';‘

operation c +909000 c ‘)
Additional position I i. if
l
NOHL.x -25,588 T
display Y +21,325 I a
l Status display, +150,008 H5/9 Current soft-
e.g. feed rate F f +90,068 - key row

PROGRAM RUN, FULL SEQUENCE and

PROGRAM RUN, SINGLE BLOCK modes of operation (TEXT):

I
PROGRRM RUN, FULL SEQUENCE Status
display
operating
Section of
modes
selected
program
5 CYCL DEF 268 DRILLING
-Soft keys

Position values
Current soft-
key row

L
TNC 370 1-5

L
 1 Introduction
1.1 TNC 370

PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode of operation (TEXT+GRAPHICS):

PROGRRMMING RN0 EDITING -Status

I,3 GRA ~- display
operating
Section of selected modes
program at left, -
graphics at right

-Soft keys

ICTL.
x
Position values _
rC
-25,506
+21,325
+15o,oaB
0T 0 M5/9
)--
Current soft-
+9a,aaa Q=e - - key row

TEST RUN operating mode (GRAPHICS):

_ Status
Test graphics display
or section of operating
the selected modes
program

Soft keys

_ Current soft-
key row

l-6 TNC 370 -

 1 Introduction
L
1.1 TNC 370

Soft key structure

Most of the TNC 370 functions are activated and programmed by soft
keys. A soft key is a key whose function is controlled by software. The
individual soft key functions are arranged in a “menu tree” structure.
This makes it possible for a single hardware key to perform a multitude
of different functions. The following section shows the menu tree of the
TNC 370 and will help you-particularly in the beginning-to select a
specific function.

MANUAL mode of operation

Set datum 10
‘\1 IOmm
in X axis I 4 /
traverse

\: 5 mm
L- 5 :
traverse

1 \, 1 mm traverse
r ,.a’

0.1 ‘\,) 0.1 mm traverse

\
L-J 0.01 i 0.01 mm traverse

0 v

Select probing functions --

( , 1 PRO,,,,) Workpiece surface

= datum

Corner = datum

Circle center = datum

Calibrate effective
length

Calibrate effective
radius

TNC 370 1-7

1 Introduction
1.1 TNC 370

ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL mode of operation

tzx 1 Set datum in X axis

with handwheel
10 mm traverse

y ‘)
I---- Set datum in Y axis
with handwheel
5 mm traverse

\
I 2 / Set datum in 2 axis
with handwheel
mm traverse

Set datum in axis IV 0.1 mm traverse

with handwheel

incremental . 0.01 mm traverse

jog mode

r
0

Select probing functions

L-IQ Enter miscellaneous pRoB;$ ,) y;;;or;ce surface

function i

Enter spindle speed Corner = datum

Circle center = datum

CRL’\. Calibrate effective

I l&Z1 C$\ Cal!brate effective

/’ radrus

TNC 370 -
1-8
 1 Introduction
---
1.1 TNC 370

PROGRAM RUN, FULL BLOCK and PROGRAM RUN, SINGLE BLOCK modes of operation

i
Blockwise transfer

\-

POSITIONING WITH MANUAL DATA INPUT modes of operation

Move X axis paraxially

\
I y i Move Y axis paraxially

r- :) 2 Move Z axis paraxially

Move axis IV paraxially

(depending on machine parameters)

Tool call for entering spindle speed

TNC 370 1-9

1 Introduction
4
1.1 TNC 370

PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode of operation

The soft-key structure in the Programming and Editing mode varies
d
according to the selected screen layout (see page l-4). The structure
shown here applies for:
l TEXT
l TEXT+GRAPHICS 4

l TEXT+FIGURE

_-

I\ Define cycle MEASURE

IR, RBIUS/ TOOL RADIUS

\$ Define cycle CALIBRATE

i l-r120

Programmable probe function _

v
0
RANGE digitizing cycle
Set program label (for digitizing option only)

MEANDER digitizing cycle -

Call program label (for digitizing option only)

\ CONTOUR LINES digitizing cycle

/ (for digitizing option only)

Stop program run r---y -

Define workpiece blank i) Jump back one level

-i
v
0

Paraxial positioning

Paraxial positioning

v
0
Automatic draw function
! Enlarge zoom range
on /off

Start graphics blockwise Reduce zoom range

Start graphics from beginning -

Start graphics from current Show selected detail

Show the space defined in

I-IO TNC 370 -

 1 Introduction
.-
1 .I TNC 370

PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode of operation

The structure shown here applies for the
l GRAPHICS
screen layout:

Automatic drawing on/off

Start graphics blockwise

Start graphics from

beginning of program

s T FIR T ‘1, Start graphics from

/ current block

Reset graphics

Enlarge zoom range

I ,’
,.’ /’
‘, \ ) Reduce zoom range
‘*, ‘,

WINOO,. ‘\
1 Show selected detail
OETRIL /

WINDOW
BLK
\
Show the space defined in
FORM / BLK FORM

PROGRnMMlNG AND EDITING mode of operation, Program Management

@ E> Data input/output l

) Protect program Input offered program

Input selected program

Rename program Output selected program

y) Erase program - FJ) Output all programs

i,, Show programs in

N0 ‘i Abort erasure \\,

/ I /

TNC 370 l-l 1

1 Introduction
d
1 .I TNC 370

PROGRAMMING AND EDITING, cycle programming mode

Drilling cycles 4

Cycles for milling pockets, studs

and slots

CYCL Cycles for coordinate transfor-

‘)/ Cycle definition
I DEF mations
-
CYCL ‘1 SL Cycles for milling any pocket
‘)
E CFILL ) :
CYCLES
/ or island
I‘, I\
1 Q-DEF) PATTERN Machining patterns
,j

Cycles for milling surfaces

-

Other cycles

PROGRAMMING AND EDITING, programming Q parameters

BASIC ?
‘j Fundamental
ARITHMETIC operations
/i

Trigonometric functions

If/Then conditional operations

C Parameter functions l

1-12 TNC 370

 1 Introduction
L
1 .I TNC 370

PROGRAMMING AND EDITING, FK programming mode

Straight line .-+z) End point X

Straight line, tangen- j End point Y

tial connection
Polar coordinates -
Circle radius of the end point

Circular arc, tangen- Polar coordinates -

tial connection angle of the end point

FP0 L ‘%I Pole for FK functions Contour beginning/

d?/ Contour end

0v
Automatic drawing on/off Length of a straight line

Gradient angle of
Start graphics blockwise a straight line

Start graphics from Parallel to block number

program beginning

Start graphics from Distance between

current block parallel lines

Reset graphics

Enlarge zoom Point at distance D,

range X coordinate
Reduce zoom Point at distance D,
range Y coordinate

Point at distance D

Point on the contour,

Show selected detail X coordinate

Show the space defined in Point on the contour,

BLK FORM Y coordinate

TNC 370 I-13

1 Introduction 4
1.1 TNC 370

PROGRAMMING AND EDITING, FK programming mode (continued)

3, G $ ‘) End point X J
@ v) Straight line
/

I Fc f \/ Circle
WC ,’
l
I
-
\,%Polar coordinates -
Circular arc, tangen-
’ angle of the end point
tial connection -
Contour beginning/
Pole for FK functions Contour end

0 v 1
AUTO ON ‘\,<
1 { OR q ) Direction of rotation
i Automatic drawing on/off Y .& ) X coordinate
ORAU m ,

Start graphics blockwise

Start graphics from Circle center X coordinat,-

program beginning

I? S T !J R T ‘> Start graphics from

current block
Circle center Y coordinai
d

r- CLEW

GRRPHICS
‘\
Reset graphics Circle center-point angle

0 r

Enlarge zoom range Circle center polar radiusd

Reduce zoom range Circle center polar angle _,

‘5
I: i
Show selected detail

J
Show the space defined in

0 v

Point at distance D,
4
Point at distance D,

Point on the contour,

-

1-14 TNC 370 -

 1 Introduction
L
1.1 TNC 370

TEST RUN mode of operation

In the Test Run mode of operation the soft-key structure varies accord-
ing to the selected display mode. The TNC provided three structures:

ON“\ Test run in Full Sequence/

SINGLE ‘\ Block skip
BLOCKm /1 Single block o:! k i active/inactive
I---

Test run with/without graphics

RESET
f ‘\i Start test run from beginning
START
L---f of program
Start test run from
current block

Test run up to block number

N

Plan view or fast internal image Projection in three planes 3D view

generation is active: is active is active
..
Plan view 1 n j Plan view

Projection in three planes Projection in three planes Projection in three planes

L b,,Y’2 \/ 3Dvrew 1g ,) 3Dview

Fast internal image Fast internal image
rGRiICS ) generation
RESET \ RESET \
BLK i Reset blank form SLK ) Reset blank form
FORM / FORM I’

0T
Move sectional plane
to the right

‘\ Move sectional plane

) to the left

‘1,. Move sectional plane

/1’ upward
‘1%Move sectional plane
!’ downward

in positive direction

Move sectional plane

in negative direction

TNC 370 l-l 5

1 Introduction
1.1 TNC 370

MOD function

~PKZ
*) User parameters

L t i : i S ‘1 Set axis traverse limits

E /’

: E T E z2 \ Set data interface

/

Show NC- and PLC-software numbers,

dlaj ) Enter code number

r-

HELP function

List of M functions .

List of address letters l

List of Q parameters for machining

1-16 TNC 370 -

 1 Introduction
1.1 TNC 370

TNC Accessories

i 3D touch probe systems

The TNC provides the following features when
used in conjunction with a 3D touch probe:
.- l Automatic workpiece alignment (i.e. compensa-
tion of workpiece misalignment)
l Datum setting
l Measurement of the workpiece during program
run
l Digitizing 3D surfaces (option)
l Tool measurement with the lT 120 touch probe
The TS 220 transmits signals via cable, the
TS 630 via infrared light.

Fig. 1.6: HEIDENHAIN 3D Touch Probe Systems TS 220 and

TS 630

Floppy disk unit 1

The HEIDENHAIN FE 401 floppy disk unit serves
as external memory for the TNC, enabling you to
store programs and tables on diskette.

With the FE 401, you can transfer programs that

were written on a PC to the TNC. Very large
L
programs that exceed the storage capacity of the
TNC can be “drip fed” block-by-block: The ma-
chine executes the transferred blocks and erases
them immediately, freeing memory for further
blocks from the FE.

I
Fig. 1.7: HEIDENHAIN FE 401 Floppy Disk Unit

Electronic handwheel
The electronic handwheels give you manual
control of the axis slides. Similar to a conventional
machine tool, the machine slide moves in direct
relation to the rotation of the handwheel. The
traverse distance per handwheel revolution can be
adjusted over a wide range.

I
Fig. 1.8: The HR 330 Electronic Handwheel

TNC 370 1-17

1 Introduction
4

1.2 Fundamentals

Introduction
This chapter addresses the following topics:
l What is NC?
l The part program
l Programming
l Reference system
l Cartesian coordinate system
l Additional axes
l Polar coordinates
l Setting a pole
l Datum setting
l Absolute workpiece positions
l Incremental workpiece positions
l Programming tool movements
l Position encoders
l Reference mark evaluation

What is NC?
NC stands for Numerical Control. Simply put, numerical control is the
operation of a machine by means of coded instructions. A modern
control such as the TNC 370 has a built-in computer for this purpose
and is therefore also called CNC (Computerized Numerical Control).

The part program

A part program is a complete list of instructions for machining a work-
piece. It contains such information as the target position of a tool
movement, the tool path - i.e. how the tool should move towards the
target position - and the feed rate. The program must also contain
information on the radius and length of the tools, the spindle speed and
the tool axis.

Conversational programming
Conversational programming is an especially easy way of writing and
editing part programs. From the very beginning, the TNCs from HEI-
DENHAIN were developed specifically for shop-floor programming
by the machinist. This is why they are called TNC, for Touch Numerical
Controls. You begin programming each machining step by simply
pressing a key. The control then asks for all further information required
to execute the step. You can also program the TNC 370 in IS0 or in
DNC mode.

1-18 TNC 370 -

 1 Introduction
1.2 Fundamentals of NC

.-
Reference system

In order to define positions one needs a reference system. For example,

positions on the earth’s surface can be defined “absolutely” by their
geographic coordinates of longitude and latitude. The term “coordinate”
L comes from the Latin word for “that which is arranged,” i.e. dimensions
used for determining or defining positions. The network of horizontal and
vertical lines around the globe constitute an “absolute reference system”
-in contrast to the “relative” definition of a position that is referenced,
for example, to some other, known location.

Fig. 1.9: The geographic coordinate system

is an absolute reference system

Cartesian coordinate system

A workpiece is normally machined on a TNC 370 controlled milling

machine according to a workpiece-reference Cartesian coordinate
system (a rectangular coordinate system named after the French
mathematician and philosopher Fiene Descartes, Latin: Renatus Cartesi-
us; 1596 to 1650). The Cartesian coordinate system is based on three
coordinate axes X, Y and Z, which are parallel to the machine guide-
ways. The figure to the right illustrates the “right hand rule” for remem-
bering the three axis directions: the middle finger is pointing in the
positive direction of the tool axis from the workpiece toward the tool (the
Z axis), the thumb is pointing in the positive X direction, and the index
finger in the positive Y direction.

Fig. 1 .I 0: Designations and directions of the

axes on a milling machine

TNC 370 1-19

1 Introduction
V
1.2 Fundamentals of NC

Additional axes
Die TNCs can control the machine in more than three axis. The axes U,
V and W are secondary linear axes parallel to the main axes X, Y and Z,
respectively (see illustration). Rotary axes are also possible. They are
designated as A. B and C.

F ig. 1 .I 1: Directions and designations of

additional axes

--

Polar coordinates
-
The Cartesian coordinate system is especially
useful for parts whose dimensions are mutually
perpendicular. But when workpieces contain
circular arcs, or when dimensions are given in 1

degrees, it is often easier to use polar coordi-

nates. While Cartesian coordinates are three-
dimensional and can describe points in space,
polar coordinates are two dimensional and can 10 0”
describe points only in a plane. Polar coordinates
have their datum at a circle center (CC), or pole,
from which a position is measured in terms of its
distance from that pole and the angle of the line
from the pole. X
You could think of polar coordinates as the result Fig. 1.12: Positions on an arc with polar coordinates .-

of a measurement using a scale whose zero point

is fixed at the datum and which you can rotate to
different angles in the plane around the pole.

Positions in this plane are defined by:

l Polar Radius PR - The distance from the
circle center (CC) to the defined position.

l Polar Angle PA - The angle between the

reference axis and the scale.

--
I-20 TNC 370
 1 Introduction
b
1.2 Fundamentals of NC

Setting a pole at a circle center (CC)

The pole is defined by setting two Cartesian coordinates. These two
coordinates also determine the reference axis for the polar angle (PA).

XY +x
YZ +Y
zx +z

i- Fig. 1 .I 3: Polar coordinates and their associated reference axes

Setting the datum

The workpiece drawing identifies a certain prominent point on the
*s
workpiece (usually a corner) as the “absolute datum” and perhaps one
or more other points as relative datums. The process of datum setting
establishes these points as the origin of the absolute or relative coordi-
nate systems: The workpiece, which is aligned with the machine axes, is
moved to a certain position relative to the tool and the display is set
either to zero or to another appropriate position value (e.g. to compen-
sate the tool radius).

Fig. 1.14: The workpiece datum serves as

the origin of the Cartesian
coordinate system

TNC 370 1-21

1 introduction
1.2 Fundamentals of NC

Example:

Drawings with several relative datums

(according to IS0 129 or DIN 406, Part 11; Figure 171)

Example:

Coordinates of point @I :

X=lOmm
Y= 5mm
Z= Omm i

The datum of the Cartesian coordinate system is located in negative

direction 10 mm away from point @ on the X axis and 5 mm on the Y
4
axis.

The 3D Touch Probe System from HEIDENHAIN is an especially

convenient and efficient way to find and set datums. d

Fig. 1.16: Point W detlnes the coordinate

-
system.

-..
1-22 TNC 370
 1 Introduction
.-
1.2 Fundamentals of NC

Absolute workpiece positions

Each position on the workpiece is clearly defined by its absolute coordi-
nates.

Example: Absolute coordinates of the position 0:

X=20mm
Y=lOmm
Z=15mm

If you are drilling or milling a workpiece according to a workpiece

drawing with absolute coordinates, you are moving the tool to the
coordinates.

Incremental workpiece positions Fig. 1.17: Posltion definition through

absolute coordinates
A position can be referenced to the previous nominal position: i.e. the
relative datum is always the last programmed position. Such coordinates
are referred to as incremental coordinates (increment = growth), or
also incremental or chain dimensions (since the positions are defined as
a chain of dimensions). Incremental coordinates are designated with the
prefix I.

Example: Incremental coordinates of the position

0 referenced to position 0

Absolute coordinates of the position 0 :

X= IOmm
Y= 5mm
Z=20mm

Incremental coordinates of the position 0 :

IX= IOmm
IY= IOmm
Fig. 1 ,I 8: Position definition through
IZ = -15 mm incremental coordinates

If you are drilling or milling a workpiece according to a workpiece

drawing with incremental coordinates, you are moving the tool by the
coordinates.

An incremental position definition is therefore intended as an immediate-

ly relative definition. This is also the case when a position is defined by
the distance-to-go to the target position (here the relative datum is
located at the taruet oosition). The distance-to-go has a negative
algebraic sign if the target position lies in the negative axis direction from
the actual position.
\r
The polar coordinate system can also express
both types of dimensions:
l Absolute polar coordinates always refer to
the pole (CC) and the reference axis. {@q\
l Incremental polar coordinates always refer to
the last programmed nominal position of the
tool.

10 _-_- ----- 0”

-
X
Fig, 1.19: Incremental dimensions in polar coordinates (designated
with an “I”)

TNC 370 1-23

L
1 Introduction
d
1.2 Fundamentals of NC

Example:
Workpiece drawing with dimensional coordinates
(according to IS0 129 or DIN 406, Part 11; Figure 179)

Yl

.-.--

&mm nsin n n -
Coardinate cm dinate
origin
WY2 I i d

1 1 0 0
1 1.1 325 320 0 120 H7
4
1 1.2 900 320 0 120 H7
1 1.3 950 750 0 200 H7
1 2 450 750 0 200 H7
1 3 700 1225 0 400 H8 4

2 2.1 -300 150 0 50 HI1

2 2.2 -300 0 0 50 HI1
2 2.3 -300 -150 0 50 HI1
-
3 3.1 250 0” 0 26
3 3.2 250 30" 0 26
3 3.3 250 60" 0 26
3 3.4 250 90" 0 26
3 3.5 250 120" 0 26
3 3.6 250 150" 0 26
3 3.7 250 180" 0 26
3 3.8 250 210" 0 26
3 3.9 250 240" 0 26
3 3.10 250 270" 0 26
3 3.11 250 300" 0 26
3 3.12 250 330" 0 26

1-24 TNC 370

 I Introduction
1.2 Fundamentals of NC

Programming tool movements

-- During workpiece machining, an axis position is changed either by moving
the tool or by moving the machine table on which the workpiece is fixed.

.- Yau always program 8s if the mat is moving and the workpiece is

stationary.

Fig. 1.21: On this machlne the tool moves in

the Y and 2 axes; the workpiece
moves in the X axis.

Position encoders
The position encoders - linear encoders for linear axes, angle encoders
r
for rotary axes - convert the movement of the machine axes into
electrical signals. The control evaluates these signals and constantly
calculates the actual position of the machine axes. Y
If there is an interruption in power, the calculated position will no longer
correspond to the actual position. When power is returned, the TNC can
re-establish this relationship.

Fig. 1.22: Linear posltlon encoder, here for

the X axis

‘-

Reference marks
The scales of the position encoders contain one or more reference
marks. When a reference mark is passed over, it generates a signal
which identifies that position as the machine axis reference point.
With the aid of this reference mark the TNC can re-establish the assign-
ment of displayed positions to machine axis positions.
If the position encoders feature distance-coded reference marks, each
axis need only move a maximum of 20 mm (0.8 in.) for linear encoders,
and 20” for angle encoders.

Fig. 1.23: Linear scales: above with

distance-coded-reference marks,
below with one reference mark

TNC 370 l-25

1 Introduction

1.3 Switch-On

Switch-m and traversing the reference points can vary dspending on the individual machinetool. Your machine
manuelprovides mare information an these functions.
-,

Switch on the power supply for control and machine. The TNC 370 then
begins the following dialog:

The memory of the TNC is automatically checked. I

Message from the TNC indicating that the power was interrupted.
Clear the message.

Switch on the control voltage.

The TNC checks the functioning of the EMERGENCY STOP circuit.

Cross the reference marks manually by using the machine direction

keys, or
------Me---------------
Cross the reference points in several axes at once:
Select appropriate axes (the selected axes are highlighted on the
screen).

Start the function for traversing reference marks

The TNC is now ready for operation in the

MANUAL OPERATION mode.
 1 Introduction

1.4 Graphics and Status Display

In the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode of operation the TNC

shows a two-dimensional graphic of the programmed contour. During FK
free contour programming the graphics are interactive.

In the TEST RUN operating mode the TNC graphically simulates work-
piece machining in:
l Plan view
l Projection in three planes
l 3Dview

The display mode is selected via soft keys.

The TNC graphic depicts the workpiece as if it were being machined by

a cylindrical end mill. The graphics cannot show rotary axis movements.

With the fast internal image generation option, the TNC calculates the
contour and displays a graphic only of the completed part.

Plan view

14

In this mode, contour height is shown by image

brightness. The deeper the contour, the darker the
image.
Number of depth levels: 7

Plan view is the fastest of the three display modes.

Fig. 1.24: TNC graphics, plan view

TNC 370 l-27

1 Introduction
d
1.4 Graphics and Status Display

Projection in three planes

4

rE--)
d
Here the program is displayed as in a technical
drawing. The symbol left of the drawing indicates
whether the display is in first angle or second
angle projection according to IS0 6433, Part 1.
The type of projection can be selected with
MP 7310.

Fig. 1.25: TNC graphics, projection in three planes

Moving the sectional planes

The sectional planes can be moved to any
position.
-

The position of the sectional plane is displayed on f34+

the screen while it is being moved.

Fig. 1.26: Move sectional planes In the display mode “projection in

three planes”

Shift the soft-key row

Shift the vertical sectional plane to the right or left.

IT,s’or~)~ Shift the horizontal sectional plane upwards or downwards

 1 Introduction
1.4 Graphics and Status Display

3D View

L This mode displays the simulated workpiece in

three dimensional space.

\
STRRT )

Fig. 1.27: TNC graphic display in 3D view

Rotating the 3D view

In the 3D view, the image can be rotated around
the vertical axis.
The angle of orientation is indicated with a special
symbol:

L O” rotation
1 90° rotation
1 1 80° rotation
r 270° rotation

Fig. 1.28: Rotated 3D view

Shift the soft-key row.

Rotate the part by 90” in the horizontal plane.

/ pg Orpgg 1

TNC 370 1-29

1 Introduction -
1.4 Graphics and Status Display

Detail magnification
Details can only be magnified in the 3D view
display mode.

The abbreviation MAGN appears on the screen to

indicate that the image is magnified.

Fig. 1.29: Detail magnification of a 3D graphic

Shift the soft-key row.

Select the side to be moved

E) or m; Reduce or enlarge workpiece.

/ E) 1 Transfer
detail.

-
Repeating graphic simulation
A part program can be graphically simulated as often as desired, either
with the complete workpiece blank or with a detail of it. J

Restore workpiece blank as it was last shown RESET \

\
BLK
FORM i ’
d

Show the complete BLK FORM as it appeared

before a detail was magnified via TRANSFER
DETAIL

I-30 TNC 370 -

 1 Introduction
\
1.4 Graphics and Status Display

Status display
PROGRRH RUN, FULL SEQUENCE 3
The status display in the lower part of the screen
provides the following information:

l Type of position values (ACTL, NOML, ...).

The type of position values is selectable via 4 L 2+100 RO FHRX
MOD function) 5 CYCL DEF 200 DRILLING
6 L X+20 Y+15.5 R0 FMAX M3
l Axis is clamped ( m is shown in front of the axis) 7 LBL 1
l T: Number of the current tool 8 L 1X+12,5 R0 FHRX M99
l X or Y or Z: Active tool axis 9 CALL LBL 1 REP 5
l s: Active spindle speed
l F: Active feed rate
l M: Active miscellaneous
functions
l Spindle power indicated by a moving bar
graphic
Fig. 1.30: Status display in a program run mode of operation
l TNC is in operation (indicated with YE)
l On machines with different gear ranges:
Gear range indicated behind the ‘I/’ character
(depends on setting of machine parameter)
l The current mode of operation (above the soft
keys)
l The number of available soft-key rows; active
L
soft-key row is highlighted (beneath the soft
keys)

Additional status displays

The additional status displays contain further
information on the program run. With the SELECT
SCREEN LAYOUT key (see page l-4) you can
change the arrangement of the two status win-
dows in the right half of the screen:

General program information

Positions and coordinates

rx-,iH51,

Tool information

Coordinate transformations TEXT ‘\,

COORO.TRANS. /
r- STRTUS /

Results of automatic tool measurement TEXT ‘\

TOOL PROSE i
r- STRTUS /

TNC 370 1-31

1 Introduction
4
1.4 Graphics and Status Display

d
General program information

Active program / Current block number J

TEST RUN

XTL. x -51,666 T12 2

+11,325 I
: +138.086
C +18O,O'dO

Positions and coordinates

Active program / Current block number

Additional position display

Display of active basic rotation

KTL. )( -51,868 T12 2

+11,325 q mm
r +138,000 M5/9
C +180,000

Active tool

Active tool length and active tool radius

Oversizes (delta values) programmed with

TOOL CALL (PGM) and defined in the tool 4
table (TAB)
Tool life, maximum tool life and maximum
tool life for TOOL CALL

XTL. x -4,905 Display of the active tool and the (next)

+39,175
r +138,060 replacement tool
C +180,000

I-32 TNC 370 -

 1 Introduction
L.
1.4 Graphics and Status Display

Coordinate transformations

Active program / Current block number

Active rotation angle defined in Cycle IO

Mirrored axis defined in Cycle 8

Active datum shift defined in Cycle 7

KTL. x -4,985 T 12 2
+39,175 0 Iam Active scaling factor defined in Cycle 11
I +138>066 H5/9
C +180,088

Results of automatic tool measurement

‘ROGRRM RUN, FULL SEQUENCE 3 Number of the tool measured

Measured MIN and MAX values of the

single cutting edges and the result of
measuring the rotating tool

Cutting edge number with the correspond-

ing measured value. If the measured value
ICTL. x -25,566 T is followed by an asterisk (*), the allow-
+21,325 q able wear tolerance defined in the tool
I +150.000 table was exceeded. If the measured
C +9a.aaa
value is followed by the letter B, the
allowable break tolerance defined in the
tool table was exceeded.

TNC 370 1-33

1 Introduction
d

1.5 Interactive Programming Graphics

The TNC’s interactive graphics generates the part

contour as it is being programmed. Movements in
the negative tool axis direction are displayed as a
circle (circle diameter = tool diameter) to provide
interactive graphics for drilling operations as well.
In addition, the following functions are available:
l Detail magnification
l Detail reduction
l Clearing the graphic
The graphic functions are selected exclusively with
soft keys.

Fig. 1.36: Programming graphics

ff you w&h to work with ttre pragrammin~ graphics,you must switch the screen tayout to GRAPHICS(JrTEXT + _
GRAPfliCS {see page I-4).

Generating graphics during programming

If necessary, shift the soft-key row.

/ I \
Select/deselect graphic generation during programming. The default
i) 1 setting is OFF.

Generating graphics for an existing program

1 If necessary, shift the soft key row.

Select the desired block with the vertical cursor keys.

Enter the desired block number, e.g. 47.

J-

Generate a graphic from block 1 to the entered block.

I 1 START / 1
I --

1-34 TNC 370 -

 1 Introduction
\
1.5 Interactive Programming Graphics

Generate interactive graphic blockwise

Generate a complete graphic or

Interrupt interactive graphics \

STOP )
r- I
Reset graphics

& The STCP soft key appears white Ihe TNC generarss the gwphic.

Magnifying/reducing a detail

XTL. x -25,500 T
+21,325 0 0
r +150,000 M5/9
C +90,000

Fig. 1.37: Detail from an interactive graphtc

Shift the soft-key row.

Reduce or enlarge the frame overlay.

Show the selected section.

TNC 370 1-35

1 Introduction
J

1.6 Programs
The TNC can store up to 64 part programs at once. The programs can
be written in HEIDENHAIN plain language dialog or IS0 format.
Each program is identified by numbers or letters with up to 8 characters.

Program management Action Operating Call program

mode management with ...
The program management is called with the PGM
MGT soft key. In the program management, Create (a program)
.
programs can be input/output, protected, copied,
renamed and erased.
Edit
The individual functions are selected by pressing
the corresponding soft keys.
Input/Output
$3/j
EB

Protect

COPY

Rename

Erase

Execute
QQ tB .-
The program directory provides the following
PROGRRM SELECTION <I
information:
l Program name 1 .H 234 M
l Program type .H (HEIDENHAIN plain language) 15687 108
ZJZK ?I
l Program type .I (ISO) RLBERT .H 1~~
l Program type .T (tool table) CYCLS .H 1304
. Program type .TCH (pocket table) 135K2 .I
4
Program size in byte (1 byte = 1 character) -H 2::
l COPY ‘i
PkT :I 108
l Program status: TOOL .T 8224 M /
TOOLP .TCH 36 M
M: Program is selected in a R E N R M E “1)
,’
PROGRAM RUN operating mode RCTL. x -25,500 T I’
P: Program is protected +21,325 0 0 CLERR \
M5/9 PGM ,!
; +150>000 -
C +90,000

Fig. 1.38: Program directon/ on the screen

1-36 TNC 370 -

 1 Introduction
L
1.6 Programs

Selecting, protecting, copying, renaming and erasing programs

,
To select a program

Call program management.

c /

r 1
FILE NAME =
, I
Use cursor keys to select the program.
0 Or 0
_------_---_.-------------------------
Enter the desired program name, for example 15.

Confirm your selection.

To protect a program

IB Call program management.

I 1
FILE NAME =
c 2
Use cursor keys to select the program.
0 Or 0

Protect the program.

I- PROTECT’
IJNPROTECT
\
/’
The program protection is then indicated with a P.

To remove edit protection

,
Call program management.
L /
f
FILE NAME =
i I
Use cursor keys to select the program.
0 Or 0

Press the soft key to remove protection.

c J

/ -3
CODE PiUMBER E
c ,
Enter the code number 86357 and confirm with ENT. The file
protection is removed, the “P” disappears.

TNC 370 1-37

1 Introduction
1.6 Programs

To copy a program

Select program management.

I-
Use cursor keys to select the program you wish to copy.

Copy the file.

DE!STINA’fION FlLE
,
Type the new program name into the highlight in the screen headline and confirm with ENT.

To rename a program

Select program management.

L /

c , -
FILENAME=
c ,
Use cursor keys to select the program.
0 Or 0 J
\

Rename the file.

-l
i- DES'TINATICMFLLE
I J -
Type the new program name into the highlight in the screen headline and confirm with ENT.
c J
 1 Introduction
\-
1.6 Programs

To erase a program
I
Select program management.

/ 1
ETLEIUME=
2
Use cursor keys to select the program.
0 Or 0
L J

I 3

CLERR Press the CLEAR PROGRAM soft key.

PGM
i

I \ Erase the file.

YES
E )
_-_________-.__-__-_-_C---_--_--------

Abort erasure.

TNC 370 1-39

2 Manual Operation and Setup

2.1 Moving the Machine Axes ................................................................. 2-2

Traversing with the axis direction keys.. ................................................................. .2-2
Traversing with the electronic handwheel .............................................................. .2-3
Working with the HR 330 electronic handwheel.. ................................................... .2-3
Positioning with manual data input ......................................................................... .2-4
Incremental jog positioning ..................................................................................... .2-4

2.2 Spindle Speed S, Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M . . 2-5

To enter the spindle speed S .................................................................................. .2-5
To change the spindle speed S .............................................................................. .2-5
To change the feed rate F.. ..................................................................................... .2-6
To enter the miscellaneous function M.. ................................................................. .2-6

2.3 Setting the Datum without a 3D Touch Probe ................................. 2-7

Setting the datum in the tool axis ........................................................................... .2-7
Setting the datum in the working plane .................................................................. .2-8
2 Manual Operation and Setup 4

2.1 Moving the Machine Axes

Traversing with the axis direction keys

-

Press the axis direction key and hold it for as long as you wish the
e.g.
0 X+ axis to move.
/
\

You can move several axes at once in this way

For continuing movement:

Press and hold the machine axis direction, then press the NC start
key: -
The axis continues to move after you release the keys.
I together J
\
To stop the axis, press the NC stop key.

2-2 TNC 370

 2 Manual Operation and Setup
‘-
2.1 Moving the Machine Axes

Traversing with the electronic handwheel

0@ bC ELECT&UBlC IZANDWm

i MTERPOLATION FBCTOR: x= 3

Enter the interpolation factor (see table).

e4.~ y
Select the axis that you wish to move: for portable handwheels at
e.g the handwheel, for integral handwheels at the TNC keyboard.
\
Now move the selected axis with the electronic handwheel. If you are
using the portable handwheel, first press the enabling switch (on side of
handwheel).

Interpolation factor Traverse in mm

per revolution
0 20.000
1 10.000
L
2 5.000
3 2.500
4 1.250
i
5 0.625
6 0.312
7 0.156
8 0.078
9 0.039
10 0.019
Fig.2.1: Interpolation factors and handwheel speed Fig. 2.2: HR 330 Electronic Handwheel

The smattest programmableinterpolation factor dependson the individual machine toot. Your
machine manual provides more detatiledinformation on this subject.

1 Working with the HR 330 electronic handwheel

The HR 330 portable .handwheel has an enabling switch that is located
on the side opposite to the star grip and the EMERGENCY STOP
-. switch. You can only move the machine axes when the enabling switch
is depressed.

* As long as the handwheel is attached to the machine tool, the enabling switch is automatically depressed.
l Attach the electronic handwheel to a steel surface with the mounting magnets such that it cannot be operated
Uf-lif7tt3~tiO~dty.
* When you remove the handwheet from its position, be sure not to press the axis direction keys unintentionally
when the -enablirrg switch is depressed.

TNC 370 2-3

 2 Manual Operation and Setup
2.1 Moving the Machine Axes

Incremental jog positioning

With incremental jog positioning, a machine axis will move by a preset
increment each time you press the corresponding machine axis direction
key

Fig. 2.3: Incremental jog positioning in the

X axis

‘: 0r
INCRE-
MENT m
ON Select incremental jog positioning with the INCREMENT soft key.

-3
JuE~INcm 4 8
I
Enter the jog increment, for example 8 mm, or
c e.g.Om
_--____________--_-__-__---_-_--_-
I\
e.g. Set the jog increment with the soft keys, for example 1 mm.
I II
I I I
e.g. X-i- Press the machine axis direction key as often as desired.
0
CL

Press the INCREMENT soft key again to switch off incremental jog
positioning.

Positioning with manual data input

Page 5-57 describes positioning by manually entering the target coordi-

nates for the tool.

2-4 TNC 370

 2 Manual Operation and Setup

2.2 Spindle Speed S, Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M

The following values can be entered and changed in the MANUAL

CO
OPERATION mode:
l Miscellaneous functions M 000000000
l Spindle speed S 000000000
l Feed rate F (can be changed but not entered) 000000000
For part programs, these functions are entered directly in the PRO- 000000000
GRAMMING AND EDITING operating mode. WFI OS%
1w ,ca

0 0

F%1 S%II

Fig. 2.4: Knobs for spindle speed and feed

rate overrides

- To enter the spindle speed S

Shift the soft key row.

I
I
Is)
I / I Select the S soft key to enter the spindle speed.

J
1

,
SPINDLE SPEED S=
c J
e.g. moo@ Enter the spindle speed, for example 1000 rpm.

Confirm the spindle speed S with the NC start key.

A miscellaneous function M starts spindle rotation at the entered

speed S.

To change the spindle speed S

i!!! The knQb far spindle speed override is effective anly on machineswith a stkyless spindle drive.

Turn the spindle speed override knob:

Adjust the spindle speed S to between 0 % and 150 % of the last
active value.

TNC 370 2-5

2 Manual Ooeration and Setuo
-
2.2 Spindle Speed S, Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M

To change the feed rate F

In the MANUAL OPERATION mode the feed rate is set in a d
machine parameter.
, 100 Turn the feed rate override knob:
d
Adjust the feed rate to between 0 % and 150 % of the last active
50
value.
1

To enter the miscellaneous function M

Shift the soft key row.

-

Select the M soft key to enter the miscellaneous function. 1

-
Enter the desired miscellaneous function M, for example M6.

Activate the miscellaneous function M with the NC start key.

Chapter 12 provides an overview of the miscellaneous functions.

2-6 TNC 370

 2 Manual Operation and Setup
.-

2.3 Setting the Datum without a 3D Touch Probe

You fix a datum by setting the TNC 370 position display to the coordi-
nates of a known point on the workpiece. The fastest, easiest and most
accurate way of setting the datum is by using a 3D touch probe system
from HEIDENHAIN (see page 9-9).

To prepare the TNC

I Clamp and align the workpiece. I

Insert the zero tool with known radius into the spindle.

Select the MANUAL OPERATION mode.

Ensure that the TNC is showing actual position values (see page 1 I-6).

Setting the datum in the tool axis

Fig. 2.5: Datum setting in the tool axis; right with protective shim

Move the tool until it touches the workpiece surface.

1

Select the tool axis.

For a zero tool: Set the display to Z = 0 or enter thickness d of the

shim.
------------------------
For a preset tool: Set the display to the length L of the tool, for
example Z=50 mm, or enter the sum Z=L+d.

TNC 370 2-7 ’

2 Manual Operation and Setup 4
2.3 Setting the Datum without a 3D Touch Probe

Setting the datum in the working plane

Fig. 2.6: Setting the datum in the working plane; plan view (upper
right)

Move the zero tool until it touches the side of the workpiece.

I > -
Select the axis.
e.g.

Enter the position of the tool center (here X = -5 mm) in the se-
lected axis. Be careful to enter the correct algebraic sign.
c I / -
Repeat the process for all axes in the working plane.

J
 3 Test Run and Program Run
L-

3.1 Test Run ............................................................................................... 3-2

To do a test run.. ...................................................................................................... .3-2

3.2 Program Run ........................................................................................ 3-3

To run a part program ............................................................................................... 3-3
Interrupting machining ............................................................................................. .3-4
Resuming program run after an interruption ........................................................... .3-5

3.3 Blockwise Transfer: Executing Long Programs .............................. 3-6

3.4 Skipping Blocks During Program Run/Test Run ............................ .3-7

3.5 Optional Interruption of a Program Run ........................................... 3-7

3 Test Run and Program Run
4

3.1 Test Run

In the TEST RUN mode of operation the TNC checks program and
program sections for the following errors without moving the machine
axes:
l Geometrical incompatibility
l Missing data
l Impossible jumps

To do a test run
,
Test the entire program.
) ISTRRT\
Test the program up to a certain block number.

Test run features

Punction Soft kq
Test run in Full Sequence/Single Block

Test run with/without graphics

Start test run from program beginning

Start test run from current block

Test run up to block N

32 TNC 370
 3 Test Run and Program Run
\-

3.2 Program Run

In the PROGRAM RUN / FULL SEQUENCE mode of operation the TNC

executes a part program continuously to its end or up to a program stop.

In the PROGRAM RUN / SINGLE BLOCK mode of operation you execute

each block separately by pressing the NC start key.

The following functions can be used during a program run:

l Interrupt program run
l Start program run from a certain block
l Blockwise transfer of very long programs from external storage
l Checking/changing Q parameters

To run a part program

l Clamp the workpiece to the machine table,

l Set the datum.
l Select the program.

lRBoIm/ Select the first block of the program.

1 Run the part program.

I
Only in mode
Run each block of the part program separately.
PROGRAM RUN /
SINGLE BLOCK

I repeatedly I I

I!!!3 The feed rate and spindle spesd can be changed with the override knobs.

)I
TNC 370 3-3
3 Test Run and Program Run
d
3.2 Program Run

Interrupting machining
There are various ways to interrupt a program run:
l Programmed interruptions
l External STOP key
l Switching to PROGRAM RUN / SINGLE BLOCK
l EMERGENCY STOP button

If the control registers an error during program run, it automatically

interrupts machining.

Programmed interruptions
Interruptions can be programmed directly in the part program. The part
program is interrupted at a block containing one of the following entries:
l STOP
l Miscellaneous functions MOO, MOI, MO2 or M30
l Miscellaneous function M06, if the machine tool builder has assigned a
stop function

To interrupt or abort machining immediately:

The block which the TNC 370 is currently executing is not
completed.

Interrupt machining.

The % sign in the status display blinks.

__
The part program can be aborted with the STOP soft key.
/ \

Interrupt machining.
, J

The 5% sign disappears from the status display.

To interrupt machining by switching to the PROGRAM RUN / SINGLE BLOCK operating mode:
The program run is interrupted at the end of the current block.

Select PROGRAM RUN / SINGLE BLOCK.

34 TNC370 -
 3 Test Run and Program Run
.-
3.2 Program Run

Resuming program run after an interruption

When a program run is interrupted the control stores:
l The data of the last called tool
l Active coordinate transformations
l The coordinates of the last defined circle center
l The count of a running program section repeat
l The number of the last block that calls a subprogram or a program
section repeat

Resuming program run with the START button

You can resume program run by pressing the NC start key if the program
was interrupted in one of the following ways:
l Pressing the NC stop key
l A programmed interruption
l Pressing the EMERGENCY STOP button (machine-dependent
function)

l if you have interrup%d machining with the STOP soft key, you can jump to another bfock with GOTO and
fesun-te machining from there,
* If you select black 0, the TNC will r&set all stored data (such as tool data, etc4.
* If a program run was interrupted during a program section repeat, GOTO cm-~ only be used ta jump to father
bfocks within the program section repeat.

-- Resuming program run after an error

l If the error message is not blinking:

Remove the cause of the error.

Clear the error message from the screen.

r- Restart the program.

l If the error message is blinking:

Switch off the TNC 370 and the machine.

Remove the cause of the error. 7

Restart the program. 7

l If you cannot correct the error:

Write down the error message and contact your repair service agency. 7

.-

TNC 370 3-5

3 Test Run and Program Run
-1

3.3 Blockwise Transfer: Executing Long Programs

Part programs that occupy more memory than the TNC provides can be
“drip fed” block by block from an external storage device.

During program run, the TNC transfers program blocks from a floppy disk
unit or PC through its data interface, and erases them after execution.

To prepare for blockwise transfer:

l Prepare the data interface.
l Configure the data interface with the MOD function (see page 1 l-5).
l If you wish to transfer a part program from a PC, adapt the
TNC and PC to each other (see pages IO-4 and 12-3).
l Ensure that the transferred program meets the following requirements:
- The highest block number must not exceed 65534. However, the
block numbers can repeat themselves as often as necessary.
- All programs called from the transferred program must be present in
the control’s memory.
- The transferred program must not contain:
Subprograms
Program section repeats
The function FN15:PRINT
- The TNC can store up to 20 TOOL DEF blocks. .-,

a hIor PRtKXAMRUN/FULL8EQUENCE
\ -0
,
Select the function for blockwise transfer.
BLOCKWISE
1
TRANSFER
Jzmz J

f*RDGR.AM NUMBER

Enter the program number and start data transfer.

‘e.9.~~ m
c

Execute the transferred program blocks.

!!!b tf the data transfer is interrupted, press rhe NC start key again.

3-6 TNC370 -
 3 Test Run and Program Run
L

3.4 Skipping Blocks During Program Run/Test Run

Blocks that were programmed with a “/’ sign can be ignored during a
program run or test run.

\
PRQWAM RUN f FULL SEQXIENCE or TEST lWN
J
Select the part program.

Set the soft key to OFF to execute programs with the ‘I/” blocks, or
\
set the soft key to ON to execute programs without the “/” blocks.

& This function is not effective with TOOL DEF blocks.

- 3.5 Optional Interruption of a Program Run

The TNC interrupts the program run at blocks programmed with MO1 if
the soft key function “Optional Stop” is set to ON.

Select the part program.

Set the soft key to OFF to disable program run interruption at MOI, or
set the soft key to ON for program run interruption at MO1

-
TNC 370 3-7
4 Programming

4.1 Editing Part Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*................................. 4-2

Layout of a program .................................................................................................. 4-2

Plain language dialog ................................................................................................ 4-2
Editing functions ........................................................................................................ 4-3

4.2 Tools .................................................................................................... 4-5

Determining tool data ................................................................................................ 4-5
Oversizes for lengths and radii - delta values.. ........................................................ 4-6
Entering tool data into the program .......................................................................... 4-7
Entering tool data in program TO0L.T ..................................................................... 4-8
Entering tool data in tables ....................................................................................... 4-9
Pocket table for tool changer.. ............................................................................... .4-l 2
Calling tool data ...................................................................................................... 4-13
Tool change ............................................................................................................ 4-l 4

4.3 Tool Compensation Values ............................................................. 4-15

Effect of tool compensation values ......................................................................... 4-l 5
Tool radius compensation ....................................................................................... 4-16
Machining corners.. ................................................................................................. 4-l 8

4.4 Program Creation ............................................................................. 4-19

Creating a new part program .................................................................................. 4-l 9

Defining the blank form ........................................................................................... 4-l 9

4.5 Entering Tool-Related Data ............................................................. 4-21

Feed rate F .............................................................................................................. 4-21
Spindle speed S ...................................................................................................... 4-22

4.6 Entering Miscellaneous Functions and STOP . . . . . . . . . . . ..m................ 4-23

4.7 Actual Position Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . ..#........... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

4.8 Marking Blocks to be Skipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

4.9 Entering Comments in the Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*................ 4-26

4 Programming
d

4
4 Programming
In the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING (see page l-36) mode of operation
you can

l create,
l add to,
l edit, and
l erase files.

This chapter describes basic functions and programming input that do not
cause machine axis movement. The entry of geometry for workpiece
machining is described in the next chapter.

4.1 Editing Part Programs

Layout of a program
Block: .-
A part program consists of individual program
blocks.
10 L X+10 Y+ZO RO FIOO M3
The TNC numbers the blocks in ascending order.
Program blocks contain units of information called
words.

Block Words
Number

Fig. 4.1: Program blocks contain words of specific information

--

Plain language dialog

You initiate a dialog for conversational programming by pressing a function
key (see inside front cover). The TNC then asks you for all the information
necessary to program the desired function. After you have answered all
the questions, the TNC automatically ends the dialog.

You can shorten the dialog by skipping over words that need not be
programmed or ending the block immediately after entering the necessary
information.

Continue the dialog

Ignore the dialog prompt

End the dialog immediately

Abort the dialog and erase

4-2 TNC 370 -

J
 4 Programming
4.1 Editing Part Programs

Editing functions
Editing means entering, adding to or changing commands and informa-
tion for the TNC.

The TNC enables you to

l Enter data with the keyboard
l Select desired blocks and words
l Insert and erase blocks and words
l Correct erroneously entered values and commands
l Easily clear messages from the screen

Types of input
Numbers, coordinate axes and radius compensation are entered directly
by keyboard. You can set the algebraic sign either before, during or after a
numerical entry.

Selecting blocks and words

l To call a block with a certain block number:

Block number 10 is shown between two horizontal lines.

l To move one block forward or backward:

0 Or0 Press the vertical arrow keys.

l To select individual words in a block:

0 Or0 Press the horizontal arrow keys.

l To find the same word in other blocks:

1 Select the word in the block.

Jump to the same word in other blocks.

Inserting blocks
Additional program blocks can be inserted behind any existing block

[ 0 Oro/m /
L I
Select the block in front of the desired insertion.

Program the new block.

TNC 370 4-3

4 Programming
4.1 Editing Part Programs

Editing and inserting words

Highlighted words can be changed as desired: simply overwrite the old
value with the new one. After entering the new information, press a
horizontal arrow key to remove the highlight from the block or confirm the
change with the END key. Conversational programming also enables you
to insert additional words into any desired block.

Erasing blocks and words

Funclian
Set the selected number to 0

Erase an incorrect number

Clear a non-blinking error message

Delete the selected word

Delete the selected block

Erase program sections:

First select the last block of the program section
to be erased.
 4 Programming
\

4.2 Tools
Each tool is identified by a number.

The tool data, consisting of the:

.-
l Length L, and
l Radius R
are assigned to the tool number.
.
The tool data can be entered:
l into the individual part program in a TOOL DEF block, or
l once for each tool into a common tool table that is stored as program
TO0L.T.

Once a tool is defined, the control then associates its dimensions with the
tool number and accounts for them when executing positioning blocks.

Determining tool data

Tool number
Each tool is designated with a number between 0 and 254.

The tool with the number 0 is defined as having length L = 0 and radius
R = 0. In tool tables, TO should also be defined with L = 0 and R = 0.

Tool radius R
The radius of the tool is entered directly.

Tool length L
The compensation value for the tool length is measured
l as the difference in length between the tool and a zero tool, or
l with a tool presetter.
A tool presetter eliminates the need to define a tool in terms of the
difference between its length and that of another tool.

TNC 370 4-5

4 Programming d
4.2 Tools

Oversizes for lengths and radii - delta values

In tool tables and in a TOOL CALL block you can enter so-called delta
values for tool length and radius.
l Positive delta values: tool oversize -/
l Negative delta values: tool undersize
The TNC adds the delta values from the table and the TOOL CALL block.

Applications:
l Undersize in the tool table for wear
l Oversize in the TOOL CALL block, for example as a finishing
allowance during roughing.
Delta values can be numerical values, Q parameters (only in a TOOL
CALL block) or the value 0. The maximum permissible oversize or
undersize is +/- 99.999 mm.

Determining tool length with a zero tool

For the sign of the tool length L:
L > L, A positive value means the tool is longer
than the zero tool.
L < L, A negative value means the tool is
shorter than the zero tool.

Fig. 4.2: Tool lengths can be given as the difference from the zero
tool

Move the zero tool to the reference position in the tool axis (e.g. workpiece surface with Z = 0).

If necessary, set the datum in the tool axis to 0.

Change tools.

I Move the new tool to the same reference position as the zero tool. I-

The TNC displays the compensation value for the length L. --

Write the value down and enter it later.

-s-m--------------------------------

i Enter the display value by using the “actual position capture” function (see page 4-24).

4-6 TNC 370

 4 Programming
L
4.2 Tools

Entering tool data into the program

The following data can be entered for each tool in the part program:
l Tool number
l Tool length compensation value L
l Tool radius R

The dialog initiation soft keys are located in the third soft key row

To enter tool data in the program block:

Designate the tool with a number, for example 5.

\ J

6 T
TOOL LENGTB L
I i
Enter the compensation value for the tool length, for example L = 10
J
f ,
TcmL RADRIS R
c *’
Enter the tool radius, for example R = 5 mm.
L J
Resulting NC block: TOOL DEF 5 L+lO R+5

I!!! * ‘&u can mm the tool feng?hand tad raffius IS m actual positim by pressingthe ACrtJAt PCS. X, ACTUAL
POS. Y or ACTUAL PQS. Z saft key.
* If you are using program TOOL.T, enter toot rrunbers that are tarper than 99 in the ‘7301, EEF block.

TNC 370 4-7

4 Programming
4.2 Tools

Entering tool data in program TO0L.T

The data for all tools can be entered in a common tool table. The number 4
of tools in the table is selected through the machine parameter MP 7260.
With MP7266 you can determine which data can be entered in the tool
table as well as the sequence in which they appear (see page 12-6).
d

If your machine uses an automatic tool changer or if you are working with
the automatic tool measurement function, the tool data must be stored in
the tool table.

Editing the tool table (program TO0L.T)

~~ffi~~~~~~~~
Call the program directory.
k I /

r >
PRQGRAM NAME = -
J
Select the tool table.

Diaiogguiddamein the tooi tabk?

Confirm the entered value, select the next
column in the table
Clear an incorrect numerical entry

Recall the last stored value

Move the highlight one column to the left/right

Move the highlight one line up/down

Page one screen upward

Page one screen downward

Answer yes to a dialog question

Answer no to a dialog question

r--
NO \,
/

4-8 TNC 370

 4 Programming
L
4.2 Tools

Entering tool data in tables

PROGRRMMING RND EDITING 9
You can enter the following information in the tool uum
#I PRCE ~
L
tables:
l Tool lengths and radii : L, R 0 +a +a +a
l Oversizes (delta values) for tool radius and 1 +5 +a,1 +a,@5 I’PI”“;
length: DR. DL
l Tool name: NAME (maximal 16 characters)
l Maximum tool life and current tool age: TIMEI,
TIME2, CUR.TIME
l Number of a Replacement Tool: RT
l Tool Lock: TL
l Tool comment: DOC
l Information on this tool for the Programmable +21,325 0 0
Logic Control (PLC), which integrates the control I +150,000
to the machine: PLC C +90,000

Fig. 4.3: Section of a tool table

The TNC needs the following tool data for auto-
matic tool measurement:

l Number of cutting edges for tool measurement:

CUT.
l Tolerance for wear in the tool length for auto- PROGRRMMING RND EDITING
.
w-13 p I=
L matic tool measurement: LTOL
.T MM
l Tolerance for wear in the tool radius for auto-
matic tool measurement: RTOL
l Cutting direction of the tool for dynamic tool
L measurement: DIRECT.
l Offset of the tool center from stylus center for
automatic tool length measurement: lT:R-OFFS z 14 250 240 125
Default setting: tool radius R ; 17 :
55 ii :
l Offset of the tool end from stylus top for 8 0 ym 22
automatic tool radius measurement: lT:L-OFFS
Default setting: 0
l Breakage tolerance in the tool length for ACTL.x -25,500 1T
+21.325 q 0
automatic tool measurement: LBREAK I +150,000
l Breakage tolerance in the tool radius for auto- C +90.000
matic tool measurement: RBREAK
Fig. 4.4: Sectton of a tool table

The sequence of information in the illustrations at right is only one of

- many possibilities.

If a table is too large to show all information on one screen a “>>” or

“cc” symbol appears in the line with the table name. By moving the
cursor to the left or right with the arrow keys you can pan to the other
columns.

6 You can save the too1 length and tool radius as an actual position by pressing the ACTUAL POS.X, ACTUAL POS.Y
or ACTUAL POS. Z soft key.

TNC 370 4-9

4 Programming
4.2 Tools

T Number by which the tool is called in the program d

NAME Name by which the tool is called in the program
(up to 16 characters) TOOL NAME ?
L Compensation value for tool length TOOL LENGTH L ? d

R Tool radius R TOOL RADIUS R ?

DL Delta value for tool length TOOL LENGTH OVERSIZE ?
DR Delta value for tool radius R TOOL RADIUS OVERSIZE ?
TL Tool lock TOOL LOCKED ?
RT Number of a Replacement Tool, if available (see also TIME21 REPLACEMENT TOOL ?
TIME1 Maximum tool life in minutes:
The meaning of this information can vary depending on
the individual machine tool. Your machine manual
provides more information on TIMEI. MAXIMUM TOOL LIFE ?
TIME2 Maximum tool life in minutes during TOOL CALL:
If the current tool life reaches or exceeds this value,
the TNC changes to the replacement tool during
the next TOOL CALL (see also CUR.TIME) MAX. TOOL LIFE FOR TOOL CALL ? -
CUR.TIME Time in minutes that the tool has been in use:
The TNC automatically counts the current tool life. A
starting value can be entered for used tools. CURRENT TOOL AGE ?
DOC Comment on the tool (up to 16 characters) TOOL DESCRIPTION ?
PLC This function is not available vet. PLC STATUS --

Overview: Information in tool tables

4-10 TNC 370 -

 4 Programming
4.2 Tools

CUT. Number of cutting edges that are measured in automatic

tool measurement (20 cutting edges maximum) NUMBER OF TEETH ?
LTOL Permissible deviation from tool length L for monitoring
wear. If the entered value is exceeded, the TNC locks the
tool (status L). Input range: 0 to 0.9999 mm
0: Wear monitoring is not active WEAR TOLERANCE: LENGTH ?
RTOL Permissible deviation from tool radius R for monitoring
wear. If the entered value is exceeded, the TNC locks the
tool (status L). Input range: 0 to 0.9999 mm
0: Wear monitoring is not active WEAR TOLERANCE: RADIUS ?
DIRECT. Cutting direction of the tool for dynamic tool measurement CU-I-TING DIRECTION ( M3 = -)
TT:R-OFFS Offset between stylus center and tool center
Default setting: Tool radius R TOOL OFFSET: RADIUS ?
TT:L-OFFS Tool end offset in addition to MP 6530 (see page 12-5) from
top of stylus.
Default setting: 0 TOOL OFFSET: LENGTH ?
LBREAK Permissible deviation from tool length L for monitoring
breakage. If the entered value is exceeded, the TNC locks
the tool (status L). Input range: 0 to 0.9999 mm
0: Breakage monitoring is not active BREAKAGE TOLERANCE: LENGTH ?
RBREAK Permissible deviation from tool radius R for monitoring
breakage. If the entered value is exceeded, the TNC locks
the tool (status L). Input range: 0 to 0.9999 mm
0: Breakage monitoring is not active BREAKAGE TOLERANCE: RADIUS ?
Overview: lnformatton in tool tables forautomatic tool measurement

TNC 370 4-11

4 Programming
4.2 Tools

Pocket table for tool changer

PROGRRHMING RN0 EDITING
. . II
The table TOOLP.TCH is programmed for auto-
TOOLP .TCH MM
matic tool changers.

In the pocket table the following information is

assigned to the individual pocket numbers.

RCTL. )( +10>000 NOML.

x +10,000
+20,000 +20,000
; +30.000 ; +30,000
C +0,000 C +0,000 c3
Fig. 4.5: Tool pocket table

P Pocket number of the tool in the magazine -

T Tool number TOOL NUMBER

ST If the tool that is so large that it blocks the adjacent pockets -
in the tool magazine, you can lock the pockets before and
after it in MP7264 (see S. 12-6). SPECIAL TOOL
F Tool is always returned to a certain pocket in the magazine FIXED POCKET
L Tool pocket is locked POCKET LOCKED
PLC This function is not available yet PLC STATUS
Overview: Information in tool pockettables

4-12 TNC 370 -

 4 Programming
L
4.2 Tools

Calling tool data

The tool data are called in a part program with TOOL CALL.
Program TOOL CALL together with
l Tool number
l Spindle axis
i
l Spindle speed S
l Oversize for the tool length DL
l Oversize for the tool radius DR
The letter D represents the Greek delta, which is used as a symbol for
differences and deviations.

To call the tool data:

Enter the number of the tool as it was defined in the tool table or in a
“TOOL DEF” block, for example 5.
I /
-
WOrnG SrnLEAxIs wvlz 2 i
Select the spindle axis, for example Z.
i I / I /

I -9

SPIFJDLE SPEED Sr?

J
Enter the desired spindle speed, for example S = 500 rpm.
t3QO

i I
\
r TOOL LENGTEt OVERSIZE ?
i
Enter delta values for the tool length, for example DL = 0.2 mm.
’ e.g.n(C)@

c /
-3
TOaL RADIcfs OVERSIZE ?
J
Enter delta values for the tool radius, for example DR = -1 mm.

Resulting NC block: TOOL CALL 5 Z S500 DL+O.Z DR-1

Tool pre-selection with tool tables

If you enter only one tool number in the TOOL DEF block while the tool
table is active, the TNC will select the next tool to be used from the tool
magazine.

TNC 370 4-13

4 Programming
4.2 Tools

Tool change
Automatic tool change 4

Automatic tool change can vary depending on the individual machinetool, Your machine manuaI provides more
information on this. function. J

If your machine is built for automatic tool changing, the TNC 370 controls
the replacement of the inserted tool by another from the tool magazine.
The program run is not interrupted.

Manual tool change

To change the tool manually, stop the spindle and move the tool to the
tool change position. Sequence of action:

l Move to the tool change position (under program control, if desired)

l Interrupt program run (see page 3-4)
l Change the tool 1

l Continue the program run (see page 3-5)

Tool change position -I

A tool change position must lie next to or above the workpiece to prevent
tool collision. With the miscellaneous functions M91 and M92 (see page
5-54) you can enter machine-referenced rather than workpiece- 4

referenced coordinates for the tool change position.

If TOOL CALL 0 is programmed before the first tool call, the TNC 370
moves the spindle to an uncompensated position.

If a positive fsngth compensation value was in effect before TOOL CALL 0, the ~Ieaf~t#ceto the workpiece is d

FedLEed.

.’

4-l 4 TNC 370

 4 Programming
L

4.3 Tool Compensation Values

--
For each tool, the control adjusts the spindle path
in the tool axis by the compensation value for the
tool length. In the working plane it compensates
the tool radius.

Fig. 4.6: The TNC must compensate the length and radius of the tool

Effect of tool compensation values

Tool length
The compensation value for the tool length is calculated as follows:

Compensation value = L + DL-TC + DL-TAB

L
where L: is the tool length L (from the TOOL DEF block or
the tool table)
L DL-TC: is the oversize for length DL in the TOOL CALL
block (not taken into account for the position values)
DLJAB: is the oversize for length DL in the tool table

Length compensation becomes effective automatically as soon as a tool

is called and the tool axis moves. Length compensation is cancelled by
calling a tool with the length L = 0.

tf a positive length compensationwas in efftjct before TWL CALL 0, the distance to the workpiece is decreased. In
an incrementalmovement of ohstool axis immediaely after a TOOL CALL, the diffsrenca in length between the old
and new tools is moved in additionto the programmedvalue.

Tool radius
The compensation value for the tool radius is calculated as follows:

Compensation value q R + DR-TC + DR-TAB

where R: is the tool radius R (from the TOOL DEF block or

the tool table)
DR-TC: is the oversize for radius DR in the TOOL CALL
block (not taken into account for the position values)
DR-TAB: is the oversize for radius DR in the tool table

Radius compensation becomes effective as soon as a tool is called and is

moved in the working plane with RL or RR. Radius compensation is
cancelled by programming a positioning block with RO.

TNC370 4-15

L
4 Programming
4.3 Tool Compensation Values

Tool radius compensation

Tool traverse can be programmed:
l Without radius compensation: RO
l With radius compensation: RL or RR
l As single-axis movements with R+ or R-

Fig. 4.7: Programmed contour (-, +) and the path of the

toolcenter (- --)

Traverse without radius compensation: RO

The tool center moves to the
programmed coordinates.

Applications:
l Drilling and boring
l Pre-positioning

Fig. 4.8: These drilling positions are entered without radius

compensation

In the positioning block, answer the dialog prompt :

I \
RaElIus COMP. l&r.Jmmo @Orn.T i
L i’
Select no compensation.
\ J -
.

-
4-l 6 TNC 370
 4 Programming
L
4.3 Tool Compensation Values

Traverse with radius compensation RL, RR

* Between two pragrm blocks tith differing radius compensationyou must programat leastone btacfcwithout
raditls compensarian(that is, with RO).
* Radiuscomp&xzation is nd in affect until the end of the block in which it is first programmed.
l Whenever radius compensation is activated of cancstted, the TAfC positions tha tool perpendicularto the
programmedstarting ar and pbsitlon. Positian the tool at a sufficient distance from the first (or Iast) Contour
point ta prevent t&a possibility of damagingthe conrout-.

The tool center moves to the left (RL) or to the right (RR) of the pro-
grammed contour at a distance equal to the tool radius. “Right” or “left” is
meant as seen in the direction of tool movement as if the workpiece were
stationary.

Fig. 4.9: The tool moves at left (RL) or at right (RR) of the workpiece during milling

In the positioning block, answer the dialog prompt:

f >
RADfuS CDMP: RfdffwNo CIDMP,?
c i
\ Select tool movement at left of the programmed contour.
RL ‘1
r- /
r~~r~.+~--~l ------- -----------------i
Select tool movement at right of the programmed contour.

TNC 370 4-l 7

4 Programming
4.3 Tool Compensation Values

Shortening or lengthening single-axis movements R+, R-

This type of radius compensation is possible only for single-axis move-
ments in the working plane: The programmed tool path is shortened (R-) d
or lengthened (R+) by the tool radius.

Applications:
l Single-axis machining
l Occasionally for pre-positioning the tool, such as for the SLOT MILLING
cycle.

* A+ and R- am svaifabfewhenever Bpositioningblack is craated with the soft key for axis X, Y, Z w IV.
* Tha machinetool builder can set.a machinepar-am&r b inhibit such single-axispositioning l&&s.

Machining corners

If yx.~ work without radiuscompansatian,yau can influence the machiningof otisido ~33n-t~~with the
miscelianeousfuncW7 M9Q fkw3 page 5-51).
1

Outside corners
The control moves the tool in a transitional arc
around outside corners. The tool “rolls around” the
corner point.

If necessary, the feed rate F is automatically

reduced at outside corners to reduce machine
strain, for example for very sharp changes in
direction.
-

Fig. 4.10: The tool “rolls around” outside corners

Inside corners

To prevent the tool from damagingthe contour, be sure WI to programthe starting (or endf pcx&tionsfor machining
inside cofners at a ccxnef of the contour.

The control calculates the intersection of the tool

center paths at inside corners. From this point it
then starts the next contour element. This prevents
damage to the workpiece at inside corners.

When two or more inside corners adjoin, the

chosen tool radius must be small enough to fit in
the programmed contour.

Fig. 4.11: Tool path for inside corners

 4 Programming
-

4.4 Program Creation

Creating a new part program

Call the file directory.

Select any program.

Enter the name of the new program,

for example 743.

Create a HEIDENHAIN dialog program or a

program in IS0 format. Either HDH or DIN
appears in the dialog line.
Select millimeters or inches as units of measure,
Either MM or INCH appears in the dialog line.

Confirm your selection

Defining the blank form

If you wish to use the graphic workpiece simulation you must first define a
rectangular workpiece blank. Its sides lie parallel to the X, Y and Z axes
and can be up to 30 000 mm long.

The dialog for defining the blank form is initiated with the BLK FORM soft
key (in the second soft-key row).

MIN

Fig. 4.12: The MIN and MAX points define

the blank form

F!!i The ratio of the blank-form side lengths must be leas than 84:1.

MIN and MAX points

The blank form is defined by two of its corner points:
l The MIN point-the smallest X, Y and Z coordinates of the blank
form, entered as absolute values.
l The MAX point-the largest X, Y and Z coordinates of the blank form,
entered as absolute values or incremental values.

TNC 370 4-l 9

4 Programming
4
4.4 Program Creation

Enter the tool axis, for example Z.

f
DEFRLKFfXtlkbMlON~CORIVER?

' e.g. 0" Enter the MIN point coordinates for the X, Y and Z axes.

0”

r I
DEFBLKKHtMzMAX-m-R?
c I
Enter the MAX point coordinates for the X, Y and Z axes.

The entered program section appears on the screen:

Block 0: Program beginning, name, unit of measure.

Block 1: Spindle axis, MIN point coordinates.

Block 2: MAX ooint coordinates. 4

3ENDPGM783MM -

Block 3: Program end, name, unit of measure.

The unit of measure used in the program appears behind the program
name. You can select the desired unit of measure, mm or inch, with the
MOD function (see page 1 I-3).

4-20 TNC 370 -

 4 Programming
L

4.5 Entering Tool-Related Data

Besides the tool data and compensation, you must

also enter the following information:
l Feed rate F
l Spindle speed S
l Miscellaneous functions M

Fig. 4.13: Feed rate F and spindle speed S of the tool

Feed rate F
The feed rate is the speed in mm/min (or inch/min) with which the tool
center moves.
Input range:
F = 0 to 99 999 mm/min (3937 inch/min)
1 The maximum feed rate is set in machine parameters individually for each
axis.

-- To set the feed rate:

f-
lXEl3RATE?
, 1
Enter the feed rate F, for example F = 100 mm/min.

-----------mm-------------------------

Move the tool in rapid traverse.

L J

Rapid traverse
If you wish to program rapid traverse, press ENT for FMAX. If you know
the maximum traverse speed, you can also program it directly. FMAX is
effective only for the block in which it is programmed.

Duration of feed rate F

A feed rate that is entered as a numerical value remains in effect until the
control executes a block in which another feed rate has been pro-
grammed.

If the new feed rate is FMAX (rapid traverse), the feed rate will return to
the last numerically entered feed rate as soon as the FMAX block is
executed.

Changing the feed rate F

You can vary the tool feed rate by turning the knob for feed rate override
on the operating panel (see page 2-6).

TNC 370 4-2 1

4 Programming
d
4.5 Entering Tool-Related Data

Spindle speed S
Enter the spindle speed S in revolutions per minute (rpm) in the TOOL
CALL block.
Input range:
S = 0 to 99 999 rpm

To change the spindle speed S in the part program:

Press the TOOL CALL key.

TOOL NUMBER 1

Ignore the prompt for the tool number

Ignore the prompt for the tool axis.

Resulting NC block: TOOL CALL SIOOO

To change the spindle speed S during program run:

r \
100
You can vary the spindle speed S on machines with stepless
ballscrew drives by turning the override knob on the operating panel.

\ J

4-22 TNC 370 -

 4 Programming
L

4.6 Entering Miscellaneous Functions and STOP

The machine toof buitder determines which M functions are available QFIyour TNC and what effects they have.
Your maoliine manual provirles mom information on this subject.

The M functions (M for miscellaneous) affect:

l Program run
l Machine functions
l Tool behavior
On the inside back cover of this manual you will find a list of M functions
that are predetermined for the TNC. The list indicates whether an M
function begins at the start or at the end of the block in which it is pro-
grammed.

Answer the following prompts in a positioning block:

Enter the miscellaneous function, for example M3 (spindle on,

clockwise rotation).

To enter an M function in a STOP block:

r 1
Mrsmus mcTIos M 7
i.
Enter the miscellaneous function, for example M5 (spindle stop).
e.g. 0 *’
L /
Resulting NC block: STOP M5

A program run or test run is interrupted when it reaches an NC block

containing the STOP function.

An M function can be programmed in a STOP block.

If you wish to interrupt the program run for a certain duration, use the
Cycle 9: DWELL TIME (see page 8-68).

To enter a STOP function:

I>
STOP Press the STOP key.

MRWELLANECNJ~ FIPXX’IQN M ?

Enter an M function, if desired, for example M6 (tool change).

e.9.m m
-
L
Resulting NC block: STOP M6

TNC 370 4-23

 4 Programming

4.7 Actual Position Capture

Sometimes you may want to enter the actual

position of the tool in a specific axis as a coordinate
in a part program. Instead of reading the actual
position values and entering them with the numeric
keypad, you can simply press the “actual position
capture” key. This feature can be used, for example,
to enter the tool length.

Fig. 4.14: Capturing the actual position

To capture the actual position

r
MANUALQPERATTON
UN b,,
Move the tool to the position that you wish to capture.

Select or create the program block in which you wish to enter the actual position of the tool.

e.g. Select the axis in which you wish to capture a coordinate, for example
the Y axis.
c /
f I \

Transfer the actual position coordinate to the program.

Enter the radius compensation according to the position of the tool relative to the workpiece.

4-24 TNC 370 -

 4 Programming
l-

4.8 Marking Blocks to be Skipped

During a program run or test run, the
TNC ignores the program blocks
that are marked to be jumped over
(see page 3-7).

ACTL. )( -25,500 T
+21,325 q 0
I +150,000
C +90>000
To mark blocks Fig. 4.15: Blocks marked with ‘/”

Select a block that should not be executed each time.

Mark the block by entering the “r sign at the beginning of the block.

To erase the “1” sign

Select the block in which you wish to erase the ‘I/” sign.

Erase the ‘I/” sign.

TNC370 4-25
4 Programming
d

4.9 Entering Comments in the Part Program

4
In the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode of
operation you can add comments to the part ‘ROGRRHMING RND EDITING 1”
program. They can be entered as separate blocks or
at the end of blocks. 4

Applications:
l Describing programming steps
l Adding general information
910 :FIRST
LBL 1 HOLE [ DEF ,!

11 L 1X+12,5 R0 FMAX M99 -

12 CRLL LBL 1 REP 5

CTL. x -25,500 T
+21,325 q 0
I +150,000 M5/9
C +90,000

Fig. 4.16: Adding comments to the part program -

To enter comments

cl*9 Enter a semicolon.

1
4

Enter the comment by using the alphabetic and numerical keys.

Terminate the comment.

.-

-_

4-26 TNC 370 -

5 Programming Tool Movements

5.1 General Information on Programming Tool Movements.. .............. 5-2

5.2 Contour Approach and Departure .................................................... 5-4

Starting and end positions ........................................................................................ 5-4

Smooth approach and departure .............................................................................. 5-6

5.3 Path Functions .................................................................................... 5-7

General information .................................................................................................. 5-7

Machine axis movement under program control ..................................................... .5-7
Overview of path functions ....................................................................................... 5-8

5.4 Path Contours - Cartesian Coordinates ........................................ 5-9

Straight line ............................................................................................................... 5-9
Chamfer ................................................................................................................. .5-l 2
Circles and circular arcs - General information ..................................................... 5-14
Circle center CC ...................................................................................................... 5-l 5
Circular path C around the circle center CC.. ......................................................... 5-1 7
Circular path CR with defined radius ...................................................................... 5-20
Circular path CT with tangential connection ........................................................... 5-23
Corner rounding RND ............................................................................................. 5-25

5.5 Path Contours - Polar Coordinates .............................................. 5-27

Polar coordinate origin: Pole CC ............................................................................. 5-27

Straight line LP ........................................................................................................ 5-27
Circular path CP around pole CC ........................................................................... 5-30
Circular path CTP with tangential connection.. ....................................................... 5-32
Helical interpolation ................................................................................................. 5-33

5.6 Contours - FK Free Contour Programming.. ................................. 5-36

Programming contour elements with FK ................................................................ 5-36
Interactive graphics during FK programming ......................................................... 5-38
FK Functions ........................................................................................................... 5-39
Free programming of straight lines ......................................................................... 5-40
Free programming of circular arcs .......................................................................... 5-44
Identifying closed contours ..................................................................................... 5-47

5.7 M Functions for Contouring Behavior and Coordinate Data ....... 5-51
Smoothing corners: M90 ......................................................................................... 5-51
Machining small contour steps: M97 ...................................................................... 5-52
Complete machining of open contours: M98 .......................................................... 5-53
Setting the coordinates for the datum: M91/M92 ................................................... 5-54
Reducing rotary axis display values to under 360”: M94 ....................................... 5-55
Optimized traverse of rotary axes: Ml 26 ............................................................... 5-55
Feed rate at circular arcs: Ml 09/Ml 1 O/Ml 11 ........................................................ 5-56

5.6 Positioning with Manual Data Input (MDI). ..................................... 5-57

5 Programming Tool Movements
J

5.1 General Information on Programming Tool Movements

d
A tool movement is always programmed as if the
tool is moving and the workpiece is stationary.

Always pn-position the tool at the beginning of a pat-t program to prevent the passibifity of damaging the tool or
workpiece.

Path functions
Each element of the workpiece contour is entered
separately using path functions. The various path
functions produce:
l Straight lines
l Circular arcs
You can also program a combination of the two -

(helical paths).

Fig. 5.1: A contour consists of a combination of straight lines and

circular arcs

The contour elements are executed in sequence to

machine the programmed contour.
-

d
Fig. 5.2: Contour elements are programmed and executed in sequence

FK Free contour programming

4
FK free contour programming enables you to enter
workpiece drawing dimensions directly into the part
program even when the drawing is not dimen-
sioned for conventional NC programming. -

As in conventional programming, FK programming

describes straight lines and circular arcs. The TNC
calculates the missing information for you.

Fig. 5.3: This drawing was not dimensioned for conventional NC

5-2 TNC 370 -

 5 Programming Tool Movements
L.
5.1 General Information on Programming Tool Movements

Subprograms and program section repeats

If a machining sequence repeats itself in a program, you can save time
and reduce the chance of programming error by entering the sequence
once and defining it as a subprogram or program section repeat.
Programming possibilities:
l To repeat a machining routine immediately after it is executed (program
section repeat)
l To insert a machining routine at certain locations in a program (subpro-
gram)
l To call a separate program for execution or test run within the main
program (main program as subprogram)

Cycles
Common machining routines are delivered with the control as standard
cycles. The TNC 370 features fixed cycles for:
l Pecking
l Tapping
l Slot milling
l Pocket and island milling

Coordinate transformation cycles can be used to change the coordinates

of a machining sequence in a defined way, i.e.:
l Datum shift
l Mirroring
l Rotation
l Enlarging and reducing

Parameter programming
Instead of numerical values you enter markers in the program, so-called
parameters, which are defined through mathematical functions or logical
comparisons. You can use parametric programming for:
l Conditional and unconditional jumps
l Measurements with the 3D touch probe during program run
l Output of values and messages
l Transferring values to and from memory
The following mathematical functions are available:
l Assign
l Addition/Subtraction
l Multiplication/Division
l Angle measurement/Trigonometry

TNC 370 5-3

5 Programming Tool Movements
4

5.2 Contour Approach and Departure

J
An especialfycanvmient way to approachand depart a workpiece is m-ta tangential cm. This is done with the
!!!i ‘Jcomefrounding” function W40) fsee pags 54%

Starting and end positions

Starting position
The tool moves from the starting position to the first contour point, The
starting position is programmed without radius compensation.
The starting position must be:
l approachable without collision
l near the first contour point
l located to prevent contour damage during workpiece approach
If you choose a starting position within the hatch marked area of Fig. 5.4
the tool will damage the contour as it approaches the first contour point.
The best starting position @ lies on the extension of the tool path for
machining the first contour element.

Fig. 5.4: Starting position @ for contour

First contour point
aDDrOaCh
Workpiece machining starts at the first contour point. The tool moves on a
radius-compensated path to this point.

Fig. 5.5: First contour point @ for machin-

ing
Approaching the starting point in the spindle axis
The spindle moves to its working depth as it approaches the starting
position 0.
If there is any danger of collision, move the spindle axis separately to the
starting position.
Example: L x Y .., Positioning in X/Y
L Z-IO Positioning in Z

w Q

Fig. 5.6: Move the splndle axis separately if _

there is any danger of collision

5-4 TNC 370 -

5 Programming Tool Movements

5.2 Contour Approach and Departure

End position
The end position, like the starting point, must be
l approachable without collision
l near the last contour point
l located to prevent contour damage during workpiece departure
The best end position @ lies on the extension of the tool path. The end
position can be located anywhere outside of the hatch marked area. It is
approached without radius compensation.

Fig. 5.7: End position @ after machining

Departing the end position in the spindle axis

The spindle axis is moved separately when the end position is departed.
Example: L X Y RO approaching the end position
L z+50 retracting the tool

Fig. 5.8: Retract separately in the spindle

axis

Common starting and end position

A common starting and end position @ can be located outside of the
hatch marked area in the figures.

The best common starting and end position lies exactly between the
extensions of the tool paths for machining the first and last contour
elements.

A common starting and end position is approached without radius com-

pensation.

Fig. 5.9: Common starting and end position

TNC 370 5-5

5 Programming Tool Movements
. J
5.2 Contour Approach and Departure

Smooth approach and departure

With the RND function the tool approaches and departs the workpiece at
a tangent. This prevents dwell marks on the workpiece surface.

Starting and end position

The starting @ and end @ positions of machining lie outside of the
workpiece and near the first and last contour elements, respectively.

The tool paths to the starting and end positions are programmed without
radius compensation.

Fig. 5.10: Smooth approach onto a contour

Input
The RND function is entered at the following locations in the program:
l During contour approach: after the block in which the first contour point
is programmed, i.e. after the first RL/RR radius-compensated
block.
l During contour departure: after the block in which the last contour point
is programmed, i.e. after the last RYRR radius-compensated
block.

Fig. 5.11: Smooth departure from a contour

-
Program example

L X Y RO .. ... ... .. ... .. .... ... .... ... ... .... .. ...._.__._.....Starting position @
L X __.Y RL .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .... ... ... .... .. ... ... .... .. ... First contour point @ 4

RND R . ... .. .... ... .... .._................................................ Smooth approach

Contour elements
-

L X ... Y ... RL ........................................................ Last contour point @

RND R ....................................................................... Smooth departure
L X ... Y ... RO ........................................................ End position @

For proper execution of an RND function, a radius must be chosen such that the arc can connect the start or end
point with the contour points.
 5 Programming Tool Movements
L

,
5.3 Path Functions

General information
Part program input
To create a part program you enter the dimensional information given on
the workpiece drawing. The workpiece coordinates are entered as relative
or absolute values.

You normally program a contour element by entering its end point.

The TNC automatically calculates the tool path from the tool data and the
radius compensation.

Machine axis movement under program control

All axes programmed in a single NC block are moved simultaneously.

Paraxial movement

Fig. 5.12: Paraxial movement

Movement in the main planes

With this type of movement the tool moves to the programmed position
on a straight line or circular arc in a “working plane.” ‘t
Number of axes programmed in the NC block: 2

Fig. 5.13: Movement in a main plane (X/Y

.. . plane)

TNC 370 5-7

5 Programming Tool Movements
5.3 Path Functions

Movement of three machine axes (3D movement)

The tool moves in a straight line to the programmed position.
Number of axes programmed in the NC block: 3

Exception: A helical path is created by combining a circular movement in

a plane with a linear movement perpendicular to the plane.

Fig. 5.74: Three-dimensional tool movement

Overview of path functions

The path function keys (soft keys) determine the type of contour element
and initiate the plain language dialog.

-
Line Straight line
0Y

CHamFer Chamfer between two straight lines -

Circle Center Coordinates of a circle center or pole

Circle c Circular arc around a circle center

El
-
Circle by Radius Circular arc with a certain radius

Circle Tangential Circular arc with a tangential connection to the _

previous contour element
FK Free contour programming Straight and circular movement selectable via
0FK
soft key d
Corner RouNDing RllD Circular arc with tangential connection to the
cl*fit previous and subsequent contour elements
4

5-8 TNC 370 -

J
 5 Programming Tool Movements
L

5.4 Path Contours - Cartesian Coordinates

L

Straight line
To program a straight line, you enter:
L
l The coordinates of the end point @
l If necessary:
Radius compensation, feed rate, miscellaneous function
The tool moves in a straight line from its starting position @ to the end
point 0. The starting position was reached in the previous block.
/
0

Fig. 5.15: A linear movement

To program a straight line

Identify coordinates as relative values.

e.g. \ Select the axis (by soft key or alphabetic keyboard), for example X.
X /

e.g. 0 0 Enter the coordinate of the end point.

0 If a coordinate
IX=-50 mm.
is negative, press the - key once, for example

Enter all further coordinates of the end point

After entering all coordinates, close the dialog with the ENT key
5 Pronrammina Tool Movements
5.4 Path Contours - Cartesian Coordinates

The tool must move to the left of the programmed contour to com-
pensate its own radius.
------mm__ ------------------------
The tool must move to the right of the programmed contour to
compensate its own radius.
------------me----------

The tool moves directly to the end point.

/c -3
FEEBRATEF? F=
c i
Enter the feed rate of the tool on the straight line, for example
e’g’ ~~~ m 100 mm/min.

Enter rapid tool traverse, F = FMAX. d

--Y
f ME%xLLArnUS l3TJNC~QN M P
, d
Enter a miscellaneous function, for example M3 (spindle on, clock-
wise rotation).

Resulting NC block: L IX-50 Y+ 10 Z-20 RR FIOO M3

5-10 TNC 370 -

 5 Programming Tool Movements
L
5.4 Path Contours - Cartesian Coordinates

Example for exercise: Milling a rectangle

Coordinates of the corner points:

.@ X = 5mm Y = 5mm
OX = 5mm Y = 95 mm
@ X = 95 mm Y = 95 mm
@ X = 95 mm Y = 5 mm

Milling depth: Z =-IO mm

Part program

0 BEGIN PGM 36051 1 MM ................................... Begin program; program number 36051 1; dimensions in
millimeters
1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+lOO Z+O ..................... Define blank form for graphic workpiece simulation
(MIN and MAX point)
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+5
4 TOOL CALL 1 Z SIOOO ....................................... Define tool in the program; call tool in the spindle axis Z;
spindle speed S = 1000 rpm
5 L Z+lOO RO FMAX M6 ....................................... Retract in the spindle axis; rapid traverse; insert tool
6 L X-l 0 Y-l 0 FMAX.. ........................................... Pre-position in X and Y; rapid traverse
7 L Z-l 0 FMAX M3 ............................................... Move to working depth; rapid traverse; spindle ON with
clockwise rotation
8 L X+5 Y+5 RL FIOO ............................................ Move to first contour point-corner point ($ -with radius
compensation (RL) and reduced feed rate (F 100)
9 L Y+95 ................................................................ Move to second contour point - corner point 0: all
values that remain the same as in block 8 need not be
reprogrammed
10 L X+95 ................................................................ Move to third contour point - corner point @
11 L Y+5 .................................................................. Move to fourth contour point - corner point @
12 L X+5 Y+5 .......................................................... Conclude milling, return to first contour point
13 L X-l 0 Y-l 0 RO FMAX ....................................... For safety reasons, retract in X and Y; rapid traverse
14 L Z+lOO FMAX M2 ............................................. Move tool to setup clearance; rapid traverse;
spindle OFF, coolant OFF, STOP program run,
Return jump to block 1
15 END PGM 36051 1 MM ...................................... End of program

TNC 370 5-l 1

5 Programming Tool Movements
4
5.4 Path Contours - Cartesian Coordinates

Chamfer
The chamfer function permits you to cut off corners at the intersection of
two straight lines.

--I
CHF

:ig. 5.16: Chamfer from @ to @

You enter the length to be removed from each side of the corner

Prerequisites:
l The blocks before and after the chamfer block must be in the same
working plane.
l The radius compensation before and after the chamfer block must be
the same.
* An inside chamfer must be large enough to accommodate the current
tool.

Fig. 5.17: Tool radius too large

To program a chamfer

Select the chamfer path function.

e.g. zt”
El
r
1

, J

Enter the length to be removed from each side of the corner, for
example 5 mm.
I

Resulting NC block: CHF 5

-

5-12 TNC 370 -

 5 Programming Tool Movements
L
5.4 Path Contours - Cartesian Coordinates

Example for exercise: Chamfering a corner

Coordinates of the
corner point 0: X = 95 mm
Y = 5 mm
Chamfer length: CHF = 10 mm
Milling depth: Z = -15 mm
Tool radius: R = +I0 mm

Part program

0 BEGIN PGM 360513 MM ................................... Begin program

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-20 ........................ Workpiece blank MIN point
2 BLK FORM X+1 00 Y+lOO Z+O ........................... Workpiece blank MAX point
3 TOOL DEF 5 L+5 R+lO ...................................... Tool definition
4 TOOL CALL 5 Z S500 ......................................... Tool call
5 L Z+lOO RO FMAX M6 ....................................... Retract spindle and insert tool
6 L X-l 0 Y-5 FMAX.. ............................................. Pre-position in X, Y
7 L Z-l 5 FMAX M3 ............................................... Pre-position to the working depth
8 L X+0 Y+5 RR F200.. .......................................... Move with radius compensation (RR) and reduced feed (F200)
to the first contour point
9 L X+95 Y+5 ........................................................ Program the first straight line for corner @
10 L IO.. ................................................................... Chamfer block: inserts a chamfer with L = 10 mm
11 L X+95 Y+lOO .................................................... Program the second straight line for corner @
12 L X+1 10 Y+l 10 RO FMAX .................................. Retract the tool in X, Y (12) and Z (13); return to block 1 (13)
and end program
13 L Z+lOO FMAX M2
14 END PGM 360513 MM

TNC 370 5-13

L
 5 Programming Tool Movements
4
5.4 Path Contours - Cartesian Coordinates

Circles and circular arcs - General information

The TNC 370 can control two machine axes

Y Y
simultaneously to move the tool in a circular path.

d
cc

Fig. 5.18: Circular arc and circle center

Circle Center CC
You can define a circular movement by entering its
center CC.
A circle center can also serve as reference (pole) for
polar coordinates.

Fig. 5.19: Circle center coordinates

Direction of Rotation DR
When there is no tangential transition to another
contour element, enter the mathematical direction
of rotation DR, where
l a clockwise direction of rotation is mathematical-
ly negative: DR-
l a counterclockwise direction of rotation is
mathematically positive: DR+

Fig. 5.20: Direction of rotation for circular movements

5-14 TNC 370

 5 Programming Tool Movements

5.4 Path Contours - Cartesian Coordinates

Radius compensation in circular paths

You cannot begin radius compensation in a circle block. It must be
activated beforehand in a line block.

Circles in the main planes

When you program a circle, the TNC assigns it to
one of the main planes. This plane is automatically
defined when you set the spindle axis during TOOL Main plane
CALL.
XY
WV. xv. UY)
Y zx
&vu. zu. wx)
X YZ
WV, YW. vi?

I
Fig. 5.21: Defining the spindle axis also defines the main plane

You can program circles that do not fie paraltel to a main plane by using Q parameters, See Chapter 7.

-- Circle center CC
If you program an arc using the C path function
the circle center CC by:
key, you must first define VA
l entering the Cartesian coordinates of the circle center
l using the circle center defined in an earlier block
l capturing the actual position C
Y cc -- -------- +
You can define the last programmed position as circle center CC by I
entering an empty CC block. I
I
I
I
I
I t
I
Xcc X
I
Fig. 5.22: Circle center CC

Duration of a circle center definition

A circle center definition remains effective until a new circle center is
defined.

TNC 370 5-l 5

5 Programming Tool Movements
--
5.4 Path Contours - Cartesian Coordinates

Entering CC in relative values

If you enter the circle center with relative coordi-
nates, you have defined it relative to the last
programmed tool position.

Fig. 5.23: Incremental circle center coordinates

* The circfo cwmw CC also %wvesaa pole for polar ~aar&n@ite%. .-

l CC defines a position as a circle center. The resulting contour is located on the circle, not on the circle center.

To program a circle center (pole):

Select the coordinate axis, for example X

Enter the coordinate for the circle center in this axis, for example
e.g.0 0 X = 20 mm.

\
e.g. Select the second coordinate axis, for example Y.
Y )

Enter the coordinate of the circle center, for example Y = -10 mm.

Conclude the block.

Resulting NC block: CC X+20 Y-IO

5-16 TNC 370 -

 5 Programming Tool Movements

5.4 Path Contours - Cartesian Coordinates

Circular path C around the circle center CC

Prerequisites
The circle center CC must have been previously defined in the program.
The tool is located at the arc starting point @

input

L
l Arc end point
l Direction of rotation (DR)

.-

Fig. 5.24: A circular arc from @ to @

around CC

The starting and end points of the arc must tie on the ciroie.
Input tolerance: up to 0.016 mm.

l To program a full circle, enter the same point for

the end point as for the start point in a C block.

Fig. 5.25: Full circle around CC with a Fig. 5.26: Coordinates of a circular arc
C block

TNC 370 5-l 7

5 Programming Too) Movements ./
5.4 Path Contours - Cartesian Coordinates

To program a circular arc C around a circle center CC:

Shift to the next soft key row, select incremental values.

Enter the first coordinate of the arc end point, for example
IX=5 mm.

Enter the second coordinate of the arc end point, for example
Y=-5 mm.

00
Terminate coordinate entry.

r 1
BCBTATJONfI&fKKW~ DR- ?
t * -

lx
0 or 2x
0 Select negative (DR-) or positive (DR+) direction of rotation.

-
If necessary, enter also:
l Radius compensation
l Feed rate
l Miscellaneous function
Resulting NC block: C IX+5 Y-5 DR-

5-l 8 TNC 370 -

 5 Programming Tool Movements
L
5.4 Path Contours - Cartesian Coordinates

Example for exercise: Milling a full circle in one block

Circle center CC: X = 50 mm

Y = 50 mm
Beginning and end
-- of the circular arc C: X = 50 mm
Y = Omm
Milling depth: Z = -5mm
\ Tool radius: R = 15mm

.-

Part program

0 BEGIN 360519 MM ... .. ... ..... .. ..... ..... .. ... . . . .. ... . Begin program
1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-20 .._................... Define workpiece blank
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+lOO Z+O
3 TOOL DEF 6 L+O R+15 ..__...__............................. Define tool
4 TOOL CALL 6 Z S500 ... .. .... ... .. .. .. .. . .. ... .... ... .. Call tool
5 CC X+50 Y+50 ....__.__........................................... Coordinates of the circle center CC
6 L Z+lOO RO FMAX M6 . .... ... .... ... ...._................... Insert tool
7 L X+50 Y-40 FMAX _.___..._____..___.......................... Pre-position the tool
8 L Z-5 FMAX M3
9 L X+50 Y+O RL FIOO ___..___.................................. Move under radius compensation to the first contour point
10 RND RI 0 .. . ... . .. ..____......................................... Smooth approach
11 C X+50 Y+O DR- ... .. . .. ... .. .... .. ..... .... .. .. . .. . . . Mill circular arc C around circle center CC; end point coordi-
nates X = +50 mm and Y = 0; negative direction of rotation
12 RND RI 0 .._._.___..__,,.,..,.......,.,...........................,,.. Smooth departure
13 L X+50 Y-40 RO FMAX
14 L Z+lOO FMAX M2
15 END PGM 360519 MM Retract tool and end program
-

TNC 370 5-l 9

-..-
5 Programming Tool Movements
d
5.4 Path Contours - Cartesian Coordinates

Circular path CR with defined radius

The tool moves on a circular path with the radius R

input
R 0
l Coordinates of the arc end point
Arc radius R
l

l Direction of rotation DR
\

/
0

‘ig. 5.27: Circular path from @) to @ with

radius 13

Sl =E2

I
Fig. 5.28: Full circle with two CR blocks

Arc radius R
Starting point @ and end point @ can be con-
nected by four different arcs with the same radius. __----_
-.
,’
The arcs differ in their curvatures and lengths. ,’
I ‘\
\\

To program a large circular arc: CCA > 180”(arc is /.y;,.

greater than a semicircle), enter the radius R with a

negative sign (R<O).

To program a small circular arc: CCA < 180”(arc is

smaller than a semicircle), enter the radius R with a
positive sign (R>O). \\
\. ,,’
-. -____* ,’

CCA>180” CCAe180”

Fig. 5.29: Arcs with central angles greater than and less than 180”

5-20 TNC 370

d
 5 Programming Tool Movements

5.4 Path Contours - Cartesian Coordinates

Direction of rotation DR and arc shape

This direction of rotation determines whether the arc is
l convex (curved outward) or
RL,DR-,(R<O)

Fig. 5.30: Convex path

l concave (curved inward)

RL,DR+,(R>O)

Fig. 5.31: Concave path

To program a circular arc with defined radius:

\
J
Enter the coordinates of the arc end point, for example X = 10 mm,
Y=Zmm.

,
r \
CIRaE RADlEUS (SXGN) a
J
Enter the arc radius, for example R = 5 mm; and determine the size
of the arc using the sign, here the negative sign. /
,
c
ROTATION CLOCIKWISE: DR- P
c i
lx
0 or 2x
0 Define the circular arc with a negative (DR-) or positive direction
rotation (DR+).
of

‘.__
Resulting NC block: CR X+ 10 Y+2 R-5 DR- RL

TNC 370 5-21

5 Programming Tool Movements
4
5.4 Path Contours - Cartesian Coordinates

Example for exercise: Milling a concave semicircle

Semicircle radius: R = 50 mm
Coordinates of the
arc starting point: x = 0
Y = 0
Coordinates of the
arc end point: X = 100 mm
Y = 0
Tool radius: R = 25 mm
Milling depth: Z = 18mm

Part program

0 BEGIN PGM 360522 M .. .. .. ...____.__....................Begin program

BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-20 .. .. .... . . .. . ... ... Define the workpiece blank
BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+lOO Z+O
TOOL DEF 2 L+O R+25 .. ... ... ..... .... .... ... ... ..... ... ... Define the tool
TOOL CALL 2 Z S2000 . .. ... ... ..... .... .... ... ... ..... ... ... Call the tool
L Z+lOO RO FMAX M6 . .. ... ... ..... .... .... ... .... .... ... ... Insert and pre-position the tool
L X+25 Y-30 FMAX
L Z-l 8 FMAX M3
L X+0 Y+O RR FIOO .. .... ... .. ... ..... .... ..... ... .... ... ... ... First contour point
CR X+100 Y+O R+50 DR- .. ... ...._.__.._.................. Mill circular arc CR to the end point X = 100 mm, Y = 0; radius
R = 50 mm, negative direction of rotation
10 L X+70 Y-30 RO FMAX
11 L Z+lOO FMAX M2
12 END PGM 360522 MM . .. .... ... ... ..... .... ... .... ... ..... . Retract the tool and end the program

5-22 TNC 370 --

 5 Programming Tool Movements

5.4 Path Contours - Cartesian Coordinates

Circular path CT with tangential connection

The tool moves in an arc that starts at a tangent
with the previously programmed contour element.

A transition between two contour elements is l -----------------------------

0
called tangential when one contour element makes 0 0

a smooth and continuous transition to the next.

There is no visible corner at the intersection.

Input
-\,

Coordinates of the arc end point. 0

Fig. 5.32: The straight line @ - @ is connected tangentially to the

circular arc @ - @

Fig. 5.33: The path of a tangential arc depends on the preceding

contour element

Prerequisites:
l The contour element to which the tangential arc connects must be
programmed immediately before the CT block.
l There must be at least two positioning blocks defining the tangentially
connected contour element before the CT block.

A tangential arc is a two-dimensional operation: the coordinates in the CT block and in the positioning block before
it should be in the plane of the arc.

L.

TNC 370 5-23

5 Programming Tool Movements
4
5.4 Path Contours - Cartesian Coordinates

To program a circular path CT with tangential connection:

COaWmAm 1 d

Enter the coordinates of the arc end point, for example X = 50 mm,
Y = -10 mm. --

L-Y \
OR0
L
If necessary, enter also:
l Radius compensation
l Feed rate
l Miscellaneous function
Resulting NC block: CT IX+50 IY-10 RR

Example for exercise: Circular arc connecting to a straight line

Coordinates of the transition point

from the line to the arc: .-

X= IOmm
Y = 40mm
-

Coordinates of the
arc end point: X = 50 mm
Y= 50mm
Milling depth: Z = -15mm
Tool radius: R = 20 mm

J 4

Part program
d
0 BEGIN PGM 360524 MM ... ....__..................._.._... Begin program
BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-20 ._....._................ Define the workpiece blank
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+1 00 Y+lOO Z+O
3 TOOL DEF 2 L+O R+20 . .. . ... .. . . . .. ... ... .. ... ... ... .. Define the tool
4 TOOL CALL 2 Z S 1000 . .. ... ... .... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. ... Call the tool
5 L Z+lOO RO FMAX M6 . ... .. ...._...................._.._... Insert the tool
6 L X+30 Y-30 FMAX . ... ... ... .. .... .. ... .. .. . . ... .. .. . . .. Pre-position the tool
7 L Z-l 5 FMAX M3
8 L X+50 Y+O RL FIOO .. ... ... . ....._.__....................... First contour point
9 L X+10 Y+40 . . . . ... .. .. ... . .... .. .. .. ... .... ... .. ... ... Straight line connecting tangentially to the arc
10 CT X +50 Y +50 . ... . .. .. . ... .... .. ... .. ... . .... ... .. . . ... Arc to end point with coordinates X = 50 mm and Y =
50 mm; Connects tangentially to the straight line in block 9
11 L X+1 00 ... ... .... ... ... .... ... .. ... ... .... .. ... .... . .... ... .. .. . .... . End of contour
12 L X+1 30 Y+70 RO FMAX
13 L Z+lOO FMAX M2 . ... .. .. .... .. ... .. .... . .. . . . .. . .... . Retract tool and end program
14 END PGM 360524 MM

5-24 TNC 370

 5 Programming Tool Movements
L-
5.4 Path Contours - Cartesian Coordinates

Corner rounding RND

The tool moves in an arc that connects tangentially
both with the preceding and the subsequent
elements. The RND function is useful for:

l Rounding corners

-
Fig. 5.34: Rounding radius R between Gl and G2

l Approaching and departing contours on a tangent

L.

Input
l Radius of the arc
l Feed rate for RND

Prerequisite
On inside corners, the rounding arc must be large enough to accommo-
date the tool.

Fig. 5.35: Smooth approach with RND

l In the preceding and subsequent positioning blocks both coordinates should lie in the plane of the arc.
l The corner point @ is cut off by the ruunding arc and is not part of the contour.
l A feed rate prugrammed in the RND block is effective only in that block. After the RNR block the previous feed
rate becomes effective again.

TNC 370 5-25

5 Programming Tool Movements
4
5.4 Path Contours - Cartesian Coordinates

To program a tangential arc between two contour elements:

Enter the feed rate for the rounding radius, here F = 100 mm/min.

Resulting NC block: RND 10 F 100

Example for exercise: Rounding a corner

Coordinates of
the corner point: X = 95 mm
Y = 5mm
Rounding radius: R = 20 mm
Milling depth: Z =-15mm
Tool radius: R = IOmm

Part program 4

0 BEGIN PGM 360526 MM . . . . .. ... .. . .. . . . ... ... ... . Begin program

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-20 . ..._._................. Define the workpiece blank
d
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+1 00 Y+lOO Z+O
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+lO . .. ... .. .. ... ...__.................. Define the tool
4 TOOL CALL 1 Z S1500 .. .. .... .. ... ... ..__................... Call the tool
5 L Z+lOO RO FMAX M6 .. .. .... .. ... ... ..___.__..__...........Insert the tool
6 L X-l 0 Y-5 FMAX ___..........................,................. Pre-position the tool
7 L Z-l 5 FMAX M3
8 L X+0 Y+5 RR FIOO . . . . ... ... .. .. ... . ... ... .. .. . ... . . . First contour element
9 L X+95 . .. .... ... .... .. .... .. ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .... ... ... . Program the first straight line for the corner
10 RND R20 . ... ... .._................................................... Round the corner with a tangential arc with radius
R = 20 mm between the two contour elements
11 L Y+lOO ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .... .. ... ... .... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... . Program the second straight line for the corner -
12 L X+1 20 Y+120 RO FMAX . .. ..._.__................___.._._Retract the tool and end program
13 LZ+lOOROFMAXM2
14 END PGM 360526 MM
-

5-26 TNC 370

 5 Programming Tool Movements
L

5.5 Path Contours - Polar Coordinates

Polar coordinates are useful for programming:

l Positions on circular arcs
l Positions from workpiece drawings showing
L
angular dimensions

Section 1.2 “Fundamentals of NC” provides a

L detailed description of polar coordinates.

Polar coordinates are marked with a P.

Polar coordinate origin: Pole CC

You can define the pole anywhere in the program before the blocks Y,
containing polar coordinates. Enter the pole in Cartesian coordinates as a
circle center in a CC block.

I
I
I
I
I
I
I b
I

x x
cc

Fig. 5.36: The pole is entered as CC

Straight line LP
l You can enter any value from -360” to +360” for PA.
l Enter the algebraic sign for PA relative to the angle reference axis:
For an angle from the reference axis counterclockwise to PR: PA>0
For an angle from the reference axis clockwise to PR: PA<0

Fig. 5.37: Contour consisting of straight

lines with polar coordinates

TNC 370 5-27

5 Programming Tool Movements
4
5.5 Path Contours - Polar Coordinates

Select polar coordinates.

Enter the radius from the pole to the straight line end point, for
example PR = 5 mm.

POLdR C#RDINA% ANILE PA ? --

L ,
Enter the angle from the reference axis to PR, for example PA = 30”.

If necessary, enter also:

Radius compensation
Feed rate
Miscellaneous function
Resulting NC block: LP PR+5 PA+30

5-28 TNC 370

 5 Programming Tool Movements
L
5.5 Path Contours - Polar Coordinates

Example for exercise: Milling a hexagon

Corner point coordinates:

10 PA = 180” PR= 45mm I

I--
@

I-
PA = 300”
@J PA = 240”
PR = 45 mm
PR = 45 mm

Milling depth: Z =-IO mm

Tool radius: R = 5mm

Part program

0 BEGIN PGM 360529 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+1 00 Y+lOO Z+O
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+5
4 TOOL CALL 1 Z S 1000
General data and first contour point (corner point 1)
5 cc x+50 Y+50
6 L Z+lOO RO FMAX M6
7 LP PR+60 PA-190 RO FMAX
8 L Z-l 0 FMAX M3
9 LP PR+45 PA+1 80 RL FIOO d

10 LP PA+1 20 >
11 LP PA+60
12 LP IPA- Corner points @ to @ and last contour point at 0;
13 LP PA-60 absolute and incremental programming
14 LP PA+240 i
15 LP PA+1 80 J
16 LP PR+60 PA+1 70 RO FMAX ,....,,,,,,..,......,........ Retract the tool and end the program
17 L Z+lOO FMAX M2
18 END PGM 360529 MM

TNC 370 5-29

5 Programming Tool Movements
d
5.5 Path Contours - Polar Coordinates

Circular path CP around pole CC

The polar coordinate radius is also the radius of the arc. It is already
defined by the distance from the pole CC to the starting point 0.
t
input
l Polar coordinate angle PA for arc end point
l Direction of rotation DR

* For incrementalvalues, enter the satms sign for DR and PA,

* You can enter values from -540aa to +5400” far PA,

Fig. 5.38: Circular path around a pole

E / ,
El b COCIW~A~ 2
J
Select polar coordinates. d
P
u
\ /
f -J
: POLAR CWRDINATE ANGLE PA 1
i I
Enter the angle PA of the arc end point, for example PA = IO”.

f-ROTATION CzoGKm 7 -
m- ?
c, J
Set the direction of rotation for the tool path, for example negative for
clockwise rotation.
L ...

If necessary, enter also:

Radius compensation
Feed rate
Miscellaneous function
Resulting NC block: CP PA+ 10 DR-

5-30 TNC 370

 5 Programming Tool Movements
L
5.5 Path Contours - Polar Coordinates

Example exercise: Milling a full circle

Circle radius: 50 mm
Circle center
coordinates: X = 50mm
Y = 50mm
Milling depth: Z =-5mm
Tool radius: R = 15mm

Part program

0 BEGIN PGM 360531 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+1 00 Y+lOO Z+O
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+15
4 TOOL CALL 1 Z SIOOO *General data and first contour point
5 cc x+50 Y+50
6 L Z+lOO RO FMAX M6
7 LP PR+70 PA+280 FMAX
8 L Z-5 FMAX M3
9 LP PR+50 PA-90 RL FIOO
10 RND RI 0 .. ..____.______..__.........................................Smooth approach
11 CP PA+270 DR- ____._.__........................................ Circle to end point PA = 270”. negative direction of rotation
12 RND RIO .. . ... ...._.__........_._________...........................
Smooth departure
13 LP PR+70 PA-l 10 RO FMAX
14 L Z+lOO FMAX M2 Retract tool and end program
15 END PGM 360531 MM I)
5 Programming Tool Movements
4
5.5 Path Contours - Polar Coordinates

Circular path CTP with tangential connection

The tool moves on a circular path, starting tangentially (at 0) from a
preceding contour element (0 to 0).

Input:
l Polar coordinate angle PA of the arc end point @
l Polar coordinate radius PR of the arc end point @

Fig. 5.39: Circular path around a pole,

tangential connection

* The transition paints must be defined exactly.

* T&3 PQLE is not the center of the cw~tour arc.

Select polar coordinates.

Enter the distance from the pole to the arc end point, for example
PR = 10 mm.

r 1
R%A.R CoOm~A~ ANGLE PA B
c d
Enter the angle from the reference axis to PR, for example PA = 80”.
-

If necessary, enter also:

Radius compensation
Feed rate
Miscellaneous function
Resulting NC block: CTP PR + 10 PA +f?O 4

5-32 TNC 370

 5 Programming Tool Movements
L
5.5 Path Contours - Polar Coordinates

Helical interpolation
A helix is the combination of a circular movement in
a main plane and a linear movement perpendicular
to the plane.

A helix is programmed only in polar coordinates.

Applications:
You can use helical interpolation with form cutters
to machine:
l Large-diameter internal and external threads
l Lubrication grooves

Fig. 5.40: Helix: a combination of circular and linear paths

input
l Total incremental angle of tool traverse on the helix
l Total height of the helix

Input angle

Always witer the sanw sign for din&ion of rotation and incremental input angle The TNC may otherwise move
the tool on an incorrect path.

Calculate the incremental polar coordinate angle IPA as follows:

IPA = n 360”; where
n = number of revolutions of the helical path.
For IPA you can enter any value from -5400” to +5400” (n = 15).

Input height
Enter the helix height H in the tool axis, The height is calculated as:
H=nxP,
-_ n = number of thread revolutions
P = thread pitch

Radius compensation 1
Enter the radius compensation for the helix accord- Internal thread Work direction Rotation Radius camp.
ing to the table at right. Right-hand z+ DR+ RL
Left-hand Z+ DR- RR
Right-hand z- DR- RR
Left-hand z- DR+ RL

External thread Work direction Rotation Radius camp.

Right-hand z+ DR+ RR
Left-hand z+ DR- RL
Right-hand z- DR- RL
Left-hand z- DR+ RR

Fig. 5.41: The shape of the helix determines the direction of rotatron
and the radius comcensation

TNC 370 5-33

L
5 Programming Tool Movements
4
5.5 Path Contours - Polar Coordinates

To program a helix:

m 1 Select polar coordinates.

I -

f- -3
pI)LbRCI)oRDINATE~GlwEPA"!
c i
Enter PA incrementally.
0I
Enter the total angle of tool traverse along the helix, for example
PA = 1080”.

Enter the tool axis; for example Z.

e.g.
-
\ J

r \
COORDTWA’SES ? d
L ,. ,,,. J
if necessary
0 1 Identify the height entry as incremental.
-

e.g. Enter the height H of the helix, for example 5 mm.

-
Terminate coordinate input.
L ,
f \
ROTATRJN cLoCm& DR- ?
c -I
-
lx
0 or 2X
0 Clockwise helix: DR- or counterclockwise: DR+

Enter radius compensation according to the table.

--------------------____

If necessary, enter also:

Feed rate
Miscellaneous function
Resulting NC block: CP IPA+ 1080 lZ+5 DR-RL

5-34 TNC 370

 5 Programming Tool Movements

5.5 Path Contours - Polar Coordinates

Example for exercise: Tapping

Given Data
Thread:
Right-hand internal thread M64 x 1.5
Pitch P: 1.5 mm ‘A, =O”
Start angle A,: 0” ,, ;,
End angle A,: 360” = 0” at Z, = 0
L Thread revolutions n+ 8 A= -180”+ + ?A=O”
-I
Thread overrun ‘\
l at start of thread ns: 0.5 1%
l at end of thread r-y 0.5
Number of cuts: 1

Calculating the input values

l Total height H: H = P.n
P=1.5mm
n = nT + ns + nE = 8 + 0.5 + 0.5 = 9
H = 1.5 mm.9 = 13.5 mm
l Incremental polar coordinate angle IPA:
IPA = n 360”
n = 9 (see total height H)
IPA = 36OO.9 = 3240”
l Start angle A, with thread overrun ns
ns = 0.5
n = 1 = 360”. n = 0.5 = 180” (half a revolution)
The starting angle of the helix is advanced by 180”. With positive
rotation this means that A, with ns = A, - 180” = -180”
l Starting coordinate: Z = P,(n, + ns) = -1.5.8.5 mm = -12.75

Note:
l The thread is being cut in an upward direction towards Z, = 0; there-
fore Z, is negative.

Part program
0 BEGIN PGM 360535 MM
1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+lOO Z+O
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+5
4 TOOL CALL 1 Z S 1500
5 L Z+lOO RO FMAX M6
6 L X+50 Y+50 FMAX
7 cc
8 L Z-12.75 RO FMAX M3
9 LP PR+32 PA-180 RL FIOO
10 CP IPA +3240 lZ+13.5 DR+ RL F200
11 L X+50 Y+50 RO
12 L Z+lOO FMAX M2
13 END PGM 360535 MM

Part program for cutting a thread with more than 15 revolutions (also see Chapter 6)
.

8’ L Z-12.75 RO F MAX M3
9 LP PR+32 PA-180 RL FIOO
10 LBL 1 _......._..____..._............................................... Identify beginning of program section repeat
11 CP IPA +360 12+1.5 DR+ F200 .._..____._..___...... Enter thread pitch directly as an IZ dimension
12 CALL LBL 1 REP 24 .. ... ... .... .. ... .... .. ... ... .. ..... .... .. Program the number of repeats (thread revolutions)
13 L X+50 Y+50 RO F500
.
.
TNC 370 5-3
5 Programming Tool Movements

5.6 Contours - FK Free Contour Programming

Workpiece drawings often contain unconventional coordinate data that
cannot be entered with the gray path function keys. You can enter this
dimensional data directly on the TNC by using its FK free contour program-
ming.

FK programming allows you to define a contour element through

l Auxiliary points on the contour element

l Auxiliary points in its proximity
l Directional data
l Data regarding the course of the contour

FK programming is supported with soft keys.

Fig. 5.42: These dimensions can be

programmed with FK

Programming contour elements with FK

5-36 TNC 370 -

 5 Programming Tool Movements
L
5.6 Path Contours - FK Free Contour Programming

Initiating FK contour programming

You can program free contour elements with the following soft keys:

Cantour element Soft key

Straight line with tangential connection FLT
lFLT\
Straight line without tangential connection FL

Circular arc with tangential connection FCT

Circular arc without tangential connection FC

FPOL defines the pole for FK polar coordinates.

L
FPOL is set with Cartesian coordinates and remains effective until it is
redefined.

Pole for programming FK polar coordinates FPOL

L.-

TNC 370 5-37

5 Programming Tool Movements
4
5.6 Path Contours - FK Free Contour Programming

Interactive graphics during FK programming

PROGRRMMING RN0 EDITING 3 GRA
You can use two-dimensional contour-line graphics
as an aid during FK programming. The screen
shows the contour elements as you program them
and offers you possible solutions when the contour
is not yet fully defined.

The programmed contour elements are displayed

according to their stage of definition:

Broken line: The entered data do not suffice to

start a calculation of the contour or
contour element.
Solid line: l The contour element is fully defined,
or
l the entered data describe more
than one possible solution. Fig. 5.43: FKprogrammingwith interactivegraphics

If the entered data apply for more than one solution, the following soft
keys appear:

Show possible solutions described by the

entered data

Run the next block

Select a solution that matches the workpiece

drawing

Enter data for subsequent contour elements

If the entered data describe more than one solution, you should select the
correct solution with FSELECT as soon as possible.

Movements in the negative tool axis direction are displayed as a circle

(circle diameter = tool diameter).

5-36 TNC 370

 5 Programming Tool Movements
5.6 Path Contours - FK Free Contour Programming

FK Functions

Cartesian coordinates for the

end point of a straight line or
circle
Polar coordinates for the end
point of a straight line or circle

Gradient angle of a straight line

Length of a straight line

Parallel path of a straight line to

another straight line

Beginning or end of a closed

contour

Cartesian coordinates of
auxiliary points on or in the
direction of a straight line
Cartesian coordinates of an
auxiliary point at distance D
from a contour element
Cartesian coordinates of
a circle center

Polar coordinates of a
circle center

Radius of an arc
Rotational direction of a
circular path
Reference angle for
the end of an arc

Incremental values
Incremental values are marked with an “I”, just as they are in convention-
al programming.

TNC 370 5-39

5 Programming Tool Movements
4
5.6 Path Contours - FK Free Contour Programming

Free programming of straight lines

Direct data for straight lines or end points of straight lines

Knaiun data Dialag Soft key

X coordinate X-COORDINATE ?

Y coordinate Y-COORDINATE ?

Polar coordinate radius POLAR-COORDINATE RADIUS ?

Polar coordinate angle POLAR-COORDINATE ANGLE ?

Length of a straight line LENGTH OF EDGE ?

Gradient angle of a straight line SLOPE ?

Begin/End of a closed contour CLOSED CONTOUR: BEGIN/END = +/-

5-40 TNC 370

 5 Programming Tool Movements
5.6 Path Contours - FK Free Contour Programming

Example for exercise: Angle between two lines, length

Known data for line Gl :

Gl forms the angle IAN=45” with the

previous contour element El and has
the length LEN=20 mm.

Initiate the dialog:

Fb,’ Straight line without tangential connection

Enter angle:

1 Enter incremental angle IAN=45”.

‘I El00 I
Enter length of straight line:

Enter length, LEN=20 mm.

Close the block:

Resulting NC block: FL IAN+45 LEN 20

TNC 370 5-41

5 Pronrammind Tool Movements
d

5.6 Path Contours - FK Free Contour Programming

Values given relative to another contour element, auxiliary points

Knovun data Dialag S& by

Straight line parallel to LINE PARALLEL TO BLOCK ?
another contour element .--

Distance from a straight line DIST. BETWEEN PARALLEL LINES ?

to a parallel element

X coordinate of an auxiliary point AUXILIARY POINT 1 X-COORDINATE ?

on a contour

Y coordinate of an auxiliary point AUXILIARY POINT 1 Y-COORDINATE ?

on a contour

X coordinate of an auxiliary point DIST AUXIL POINT PD X-COORDINATE ?

at distance D

Y coordinate of an auxiliary point DIST AUXIL POINT PD Y-COORDINATE ?

at distance D

Distance from an auxiliary point DISTANCE FROM AUXILIARY POINT ? .-.

to a straight line

-..

5-42 TNC 370 -

 5 Programming Tool Movements
L
5.6 Path Contours - FK Free Contour Programming

Example for exercise: Auxiliary point at a distance from a straight line

Known data for Gl : Y

Auxiliary point PD with the coordinates
PDX = 15 mm and PDY = 20 mm lies at
the distance D = 5 mm from Gl.

20-

Initiate the dialog:

y ) Straight line with tangential connection

\-
Enter the X coordinate of the auxiliary point:

Enter the X coordinate of auxiliary point PD. X=1 5 mm.

Enter the Y coordinate of the auxiliary point:

Enter the Y coordinate of auxiliary point PD, Y=20 mm.

Enter the distance from the auxiliary point to the straight line:

DXSTMeE FROM AUXILIARY POm ?

r’
Enter the distance from the auxiliary point PD to the straight line Gl,
Q D=5 mm.

Close the block:

Resulting NC block: FLT PDX+ 15 PDY+20 05

-.-
TNC 370 5-43
5 Programming Tool Movements
5.6 Path Contours - FK Free Contour Programming

Free programming of circular arcs

Center of free-programmed circles d

The TNC calculates a circle center for free-programmed arcs (FC and
FCT blocks). This makes is possible to program full circles in an FK
program block. --,
A circle center that was previously entered or calculated is then no longer
valid.

If, for example, you enter conventional polar coordinates that refer to a
pole from a CC block preceding an FC or FCT block, then you must enter
the pole again.

input procedures and soft keys not described here have the mne functions as fw straight lines.

Direct input for an arc or arc end point

Rotational direction of the arc ROTATION CLOCKWISE: DR- ?

-

Radius of the arc CIRCLE RADIUS ?

Angle of leading axis to arc ANGLE FOR CIRCLE END POINT ?

end point

Data on a circle center

Known data Dielag S&t key

X coordinate of the CIRCLE CENTER X COORDINATE ?
cc)( \
circle center
r- +I/

Y coordinate of the CIRCLE CENTER Y COORDINATE ?

circle center

Polar coordinate radius CIRCLE CENTER POLAR RADIUS ?

of the circle center

Polar coordinate angle CIRCLE CENTER POLAR ANGLE ?

of the circle center

5-44 TNC 370 -

 5 Programming Tool Movements
L
5.6 Path Contours - FK Free Contour Programming

Example for exercise: Circle center in polar coordinates referenced to FPOL

Known data for CC:

Cartesian coordinates of FPOL:

X=13, Y=17mm

Polar coordinate radius

20 mm

Polar coordinate angle:

65"

L
Initiate the dialog for FPOL:

Enter the X coordinate of FPOL:

Enter the X coordinate, X=13 mm.

Enter the Y coordinate of FPOL:

FPoLc:ooRDINA~?
i
Enter the Y coordinate, Y=l7 mm.

Close the block:

Resulting NC block: FPOL X+13 Y+17

TNC 370 5-45

5 Programming Tool Movements
4
5.6 Path Contours - FK Free Contour Programming

Initiate dialog for FC:

i--F2

Enter direction rotation for arc:

Direction of rotation, e.g. minus (clockwise)

Enter radius: _-
1

I
Circle center, e.g. 20 mm

Enter polar coordinates for CC:

Polar coordinate radius, e.g. 20 mm

Enter polar angle for CC:

C!XRfXECEN’IF,RPOLARANGLE?
J
Polar coordinate angle, e.g. 65”

Conclude the block:

Resulting NC block:
FC DR- R+25 CCPR+PO CCPAi65

5-46 TNC 370

 5 Programming Tool Movements
L
5.6 Path Contours - FK Free Contour Programming

Auxiliary points
Auxiliary points are entered for arcs in the same way as for straight lines.

Fig. 5.44: Auxiliary points on a free arc

Identifying closed contours

You can identify the beginning and end of a closed contour with the CLSD A
soft key. This reduces the number of possible solutions for the last
contour element.

Enter CLSD as an addition to another contour data entry.

The closed contour results from the geometric context, for example from
a tangential transition.

Fig. 5.45: Beginning and end of a closed

contour

To program a closed contour:

2x
0 or lx
0 The contour element is the beginning
of a closed contour whose beginning
of a closed contour, or the end
was identified with CLSD+.

TNC 370 5-47

5 Programming Tool Movements
4
5.6 Path Contours - FK Free Contour Programming

Example 1 for exercise in FK free contour programming

Part program
Y
0 BEGIN PGM FKEXAMP 1 MM
1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+lOO Z+O
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+2
4 TOOL CALL 1 Z SIOO
5 L Z+lOO RO F MAX M6
6 L X-IO Y-IO RO FMAX
7 L Z-15 F500 M3
8 L X+0 Y+O RL F250
9 RND 1
10 FPOL X+50 Y+20
11 FL LEN64.5 CLSD+ PlX+15 Ply+35 35 -
12 FSELECT 1
13 FL PR+67 AN+21
14 FL IX+1 5 IY+O 20
15 FL LEN 40 PAR 11
16 FSELECT 2
17 FL X+75 Y+20
i
18 FL CLSD-
19 L X-IO Y-IO RO FMAX @
20 L Z+lOO RO FMAX M2
21 ENDPGMFKEXAMPI MM

Program block Contour element Known data FK input

10 FPOL l Cartesian coordinates xy

11 Straight line FL l Length LEN
l Contour beginning CLSD+
l Auxiliary point on the straight line PIX, PIY
13 Straight line FL l Polar coordinate radius
l Gradient angle :“N
14 Straight line FL l X coordinate relative to block 13 IX
l Y coordinate relative to block 13 IY
15 Straight line FL l Length LEN
l Parallel to block 11 PAR N
17 Straight line FL l Cartesian coordinates x. y
18 Straight line FL l End of contour CLSD-

5-48 TNC 370 --

 5 Programming Tool Movements
L.
5.6 Path Contours - FK Free Contour Programming

Example 2 for exercise in FK free contour programming

Part program

0 BEGIN PGM FKEXAMPZ MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-20 IOO-
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+lOO Z+O
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+5
4 TOOL CALL 1 Z SIOOO
5 L Z+lOO RO F MAX M6
6 L X+30 Y+30 RO F MAX
7 FPOL X+30 Y+30
. -- 8 L Z-IO F250 M3
9 L X+0 Y+30 RR FIOO
IO RND5
11 FC DR- R30 CCX+30 CCY+30
12 FL AN+60 PDX+30 PDY+30 D+lO
13 FSELECT 3 30-
14 FC DR- R20 CCPR+55 CCPA+GO
15 FSELECT 2
.-
16 FL AN-l 20 PDX+30 PDY+30 D+lO
17 FSELECT 3
18 FC X+0 Y+30 DR- CCX+30 CCY+30
L 19 FSELECT 2
20 RND 5
21 L X+30 Y+30 RO F MAX
22 L Z+lOO RO F MAX M2
L
23 END PGM FKEXAMP2 MM

Program block Contour element Known data FK input

7 FPOL l Cartesian coordinates KY

.-
11 Circular arc FC l Direction of rotation DR
l Radius R
l Cartesian circle center coordinates CCX, CCY
12 Straight line FL l Gradient angle AN
l Auxiliary point outside of a PDX, PDY
straight line
l Distance straight line - aux. point D
14 Circular arc FC l Direction of rotation DR
l Radius R
l Polar circle center coordinates CCPA, CCPR
16 Straight line FL l Gradient angle AN
l Auxiliary point outside of a
straight line PDX, PDY
l Distance straight line - aux. point D
18 Circular arc FC l Cartesian coordinates of the
end point x. y
l Direction of rotation DR
l Cartesian circle center coordinates CCX, CCY

TNC 370 5-49

5 Programming Tool Movements
d
5.6 Path Contours - FK Free Contour Programming

Example 3 for exercise in FK free contour programming

Part program
0 BEGIN PGM FKEXAMP3 MM
1 BLK FORM 0.1 2 X+0 Y+O Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+lOO Z+O
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+2
4 TOOL CALL 1 Z SIOO
5 L Z+lOO RO F MAX M6
6 L X-IO Y-l 0 RO F MAX
7 L Z-IO FIOO M3
8 L X+0 Y+lO RR F250
9 FL X+90.65 PDX+75 PDY +7.5 D+2.5
10 FSELECT 1
11 FL IAN-135
12 FC DR+ R12.7 CCX+84.3 CCY+16.35
13 FLT PAR9
14 FSELECT 2
15 FCT DR -RIO
16 FLT
17 FCT DR+ R7.94 CCX+76.2 CCY+73.5
18 FLT PAR16 4 l
90,65
19 FCT DR+ R12.7 CCX+12.7 CCY+22.7
20 FLT X+0 Y+lO
21 L X-IO Y-IO RO FMAX
22 LZ+lOOFMAXM2
23 ENDPGMFKEXAMP3MM

Program block Contour element Known data FK input

9 Straight line FL l Cartesian X coordinate of the straight-line end point X

l Auxiliary point outside of the straight line PDX, PDY
l Distance between straight line and auxiliary point D
11 Straight line FL l Gradient angle relative to reference axis IAN
12 Circular arc FC l Direction of rotation DR
l Radius R
l Cartesian coordinates of circle center ccx, CCY
13 Straight line FLT l Parallel to element from block 9 PAR N
15 Circular arc FCT l Direction of rotation DR
l Radius R
16 Straight line FLT l None
17 Circular arc FCT l Direction of rotation DR
l Radius R
l Cartesian coordinates of circle center ccx, CCY
18 Straight line FLT l Parallel to element from block 16 PAR N
19 Circular arc FCT l Direction of rotation DR
l Radius R
l Cartesian coordinates of circle center ccx, CCY
20 Straight line FLT l Cartesian coordinates of a straight-line end point x. y

5-50 TNC 370

 5 Programming Tool Movements
L

‘_

5.7 M Functions for Contouring Behavior and Coordinate Data

The following miscellaneous functions enable you to change the standard

contouring behavior of the TNC 370 in certain situations, such as:
l Smoothing corners
L l Machining small contour steps
l Machining open contour corners
l Entering machine-referenced coordinates

Smoothing corners: MS0

Standard behavior - without M90
At angular transitions such as internal corners and contours without radius
compensation, the TNC stops the axes briefly.
Advantages:
l Reduced wear on the machine
l High definition of outside corners

In program blocks with radius compensation (RR/RL), the TNC automati-

cally inserts a transition arc at external corners.

Fig. 5.46: Standard contouring behavior with

RO and without M90

Smoothing corners with M90

The tool moves around corners at constant speed.
Advantages:
l Provides a smoother, more continuous surface
l Reduces machining time
Application example:
Surfaces consisting of several straight line elements.

Fig. 5.47: Contouring behavior with RO and

M90

Duration of effect
The miscellaneous function M90 is effective only in the blocks in which it
is programmed. Operation with servo lag must be active.

A limit angle can be set in machine parameter MP7460 fsee page 128) below which the toot will muve at constant
feed rate, even when MQO is not programmed, MP 7480 is effective both with servo lag and with feed forward
control.

‘-

L
TNC 370 5-51
5 Programming Tool Movements
5.7 M Functions for Contouring Behavior and Coordinate Data

Machining small contour steps: M97

Standard behavior - without M97
The TNC inserts a transition arc at outside corners.
At very short contour steps this would cause the
tool to damage the contour. In such cases the TNC
interrupts the program run and shows the error
message TOOL RADIUS TOO LARGE.

Fig. 5.48: Standard behavior without M97 if the block were to be

executed as programmed

Machining contour steps with M97

The TNC calculates the contour intersection @
(see figure) of the contour elements - as at inside
corners -and moves the tool over this point. M97
is programmed in the same block as the outside
corner point.

Duration of effect
The miscellaneous function M97 is effective only in
the blocks in which it is programmed.

Fig. 5.49: Contouring behavior with M97

A contour machined with M97 is less complete than one without. You may wish to rework the contour with a
smatlet tool.

Program example

5 TOOL DEF 1 L R+20 ... .. .. .. . . . . . . ..... .. . Large tool radius

13 L X ... Y ... R .. F .. M97 ....................................... Move to contour point 13

14 L IY-0.5 .... R .. F ................................................ Machine the small contour step 13 - 14
15 L IX+1 00 ............................................................ Move to contour point 15
16 L IY+O.5 ... R .. F.. M97 ...................................... Machine the small contour step 15 - 16
17 L X .. Y ............................................................... Move to contour point 17

The outer corners are programmed in blocks 13 and 16: these are the
blocks in which you program M97.

5-52 TNC 370

 5 Programming Tool Movements
L

5.7 M Functions for Contouring Behavior and Coordinate Data

Complete machining of open contours: M98

Standard behavior-without M98
The TNC calculates the intersections @ of the
radius-compensated tool paths at inside corners
and changes traverse direction at these points. If
L
the corners are open on one side, however,
machining is incomplete.

Fig. 5.50: Tool path without M98

Machining open corners with M98

L
With the miscellaneous function MS8 the TNC
temporarily suspends radius compensation to
ensure that both corners are completely machined.
L

Duration of effect
The miscellaneous function M98 is effective only in
the blocks in which it is programmed.

I I
Fig. 5.51: Tool path with M98

Programming example

10 L X ... Y ... RL F .................................................. Move to contour point 10

11 LX .. IY- ..... M98 ............................................... Move to contour point 11
12 L IX + ................................................................ Move to contour point 12

TNC 370 5-53

 5 Programming Tool Movements
J
5.7 M Functions for Contouring Behavior and Coordinate Data

Setting the coordinates for the datum: MSl/M92

Standard behavior
Coordinates are referenced to the workpiece datum (see page I-21)

Scale reference point

The position feedback scales are provided with one or more reference
marks. Reference marks are used to indicate the position of the scale
reference point. If the scale has only one reference mark, its position is
the scale reference point. If the scale has several - distance-coded -
reference marks, then the scale reference point is indicated by the left-
most reference mark (at the beginning of the measuring range).

Machine datum - miscellaneous function M91

The machine datum is required for the following tasks:

l Defining the limits of traverse (software limit switches)

l Moving to machine-reference positions (e.g. tool-change position)
l Setting the workpiece datum

Machine zero is identical with the scale reference point.

If you want the coordinates in a positioning block to be referenced to the

machine zero point, end the block with the miscellaneous function M91.

Coordinates that are referenced to the machine datum are indicated in the
display with REF.

Additional machine datum M92

In addition to the machine zero point, the machine
tool builder can define another machine-reference
position, the machine datum.
-
The machine tool builder defines the distance for
each axis from the machine zero to the machine
datum.
-
If you want the coordinates in a positioning block to
be referenced to the machine datum, end the block
with the miscellaneous function M92.
4

Workpiece datum
4
The user enters the coordinates of the datum for
workpiece machining in the MANUAL OPERATION
mode (see page 2-7).
Fig. 5.52: Machine datum @and workpiece datum @ 4

5-54 TNC 370

 5 Programming Tool Movements
L
5.7 M Functions for Contouring Behavior and Coordinate Data

Reducing rotary axis display values to under 360”: M94

Machine parameter 7470 determines whether the position display value of
a rotary axis are limited to

l +/- 360” or
l +I- 30 000”

If the display values are limited to +/- 30 000”. you can reduce the display
value to under 360” by entering the miscellaneous function M94.

Example: L M 94 Only reduce display

L C+538 FMAX M94 Reduce display and then move to
programmed value

Duration of effect
M94 is effective at the start of block and only in the block in which it is
programmed.

Optimized traverse of rotary axes: Ml26

L Standard behavior-without Ml26

If the display of a rotary axis is reduced to a value under 360”. the TNC will
move the tool on the following path:

350” IO” -340”

\
IO” 340” +330”

Optimized traverse of rotary axes - with Ml26

If the display of a rotary axis is reduced to a value under 360”. the TNC will
move the tool on the following path:

Aotwtl position Naminat ptition Actual path of Travis

L 350” IO” +20”
IO” 340” -30”

Resulting NC block: L C+ 10 A+340 RO F500 M 126

Duration of effect
Ml 26 is effective at the start of block. Ml 26 is cancelled by Ml 27 or at
the end of the program.

TNC 370 5-55

5 Programming Tool Movements
4
5.7 M Functions for Contouring Behavior and Coordinate Data

Feed rate at circular arcs: M109/Ml lo/Ml 11

Standard behavior - Ml 11
The programmed feed rate refers to the center of the tool path.

-/
Constant contouring speed at circular arcs (feed rate increase and decrease) - Ml09
The TNC reduces the feed rate for circular arcs at inside contours such
that the feed rate at the tool cutting edge remains constant. At outside -
contours the feed rate for circular arcs is correspondingly increased.

Constant contouring speed at circular arcs (feed rate decrease only) - Ml10
The TNC reduces the feed rate for circular arcs only at inside contours. At
outside contours the feed rate remains the same.

5-56 TNC 370 -

 5 Programming Tool Movements
L

5.8 Positioning with Manual Data Input (MDI)

In the POSITIONING WITH MANUAL DATA INPUT mode you can pro-
gram:

l Single-axis positioning blocks with the corresponding soft keys

l Linear blocks with path function key L
l Tool call (spindle speed) with the TOOL CALL soft key

The entered positioning blocks are not stored.

Application example
To correct workpiece misalignment on a rotary table

Preparation:
Perform a basic rotation with the 3D touch probe system; write down the
ROTATION ANGLE and cancel the basic rotation again.

Select the positioning with MDI mode of operation.

l Program the desired rotation

‘- -
/ . Enter the ROTATION ANGLE for the rotary table axis that you previously wrote down.
. Enter RO, FEED RATE.

Conclude entry.

The table rotates to correct the misalignment.

\I

TNC 370 5-57

-.
6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats

6.1 Subprograms . .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Principle.. ................................................................................................................... 6-2
Operating limits ........................................................................................................ .6-2
Programming and calling subprograms .................................................................... 6-3

6.2 Program Section Repeats ................................... . ............................. 6-5

Principle.. ................................................................................................................... 6-5

Programming notes.. ................................................................................................ .6-5
Programming and calling a program section repeat ............................................... .6-5

6.3 Program as Subprogram ................................................................... 6-8

Principle.. ................................................................................................................... 6-8

Operating limits ......................................................................................................... 6-8
Calling a program as a subprogram ......................................................................... 6-8

i
6.4 Nesting ................ ..*..a....* ....................................... . ............................. 6-9
Nesting depth ............................................................................................................ 6-9
Subprogram in a subprogram .................................................................................. .6-9
Repeating program section repeats ...................................................................... .6-l 1
Repeating subprograms .......................................................................................... 6-l 2
6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats 4

6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats

Subprograms and program section repeats enable you to program a
machining sequence once and then run it as often as you wish.

Labels
Subprograms and program section repeats are marked by labels.
A label carries a number from 0 to 254. Each label number (except 0) can
only appear once in a program. Labels are assigned with the command
LABEL SET.
LABEL 0 marks the end of a subprogram.
The soft keys for defining subprograms and program section repeats are
located in the fourth soft key row.

6.1 Subprograms

Principle
0 BEGIN PGM
The program is executed up to the block in which I
the subprogram is called with CALL LBL (0).
Then the subprogram
end (LBL 0) (@I.
is executed from beginning to
. CALLLBL
9
1

1
Finally, the main program is resumed
block after the subprogram call (0).
from the

’ LZ+lOO
0
3

M2
03
0

’ LBL 1 ”

. LBLO ,. ,,
END PGM

Fig. 6.1: Flow diagram for a subprogram

@= jump, @= return jump
Operating limits
l One main program can contain to 254 subpro-
grams.
l Subprograms can be called in any sequence and
as often as desired.
l A subprogram cannot call itself.
l Subprograms should be located at the end of the
main program (after the block with M2 or M30).
l If subprograms are located in the program before
the block with MO2 or M30, they will be execut-
ed at least once even without being called.

6-2 TNC 370

 6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats
L
6.1 Subprograms

Programming and calling subprograms

To mark the beginning of the subprogram

The subprogram begins with label number 5.

Resulting NC block: LBL 5

To mark the end of the subprogram

A subprogram must always end with label number 0.

T&i.mrdmmT
End of subprogram.
L
Resulting NC block: LBL 0

To call the subprogram

A subprogram is called with its label number.

Calls the subprogram following LBL 5.

Program section is subprogram: no repetitions.

Resulting NC block: CALL LBL 5

The command CALL LBL 0 is not atlowed because label 0 can only be usedt# mark the end of a sukprogram+

TNC 370 6-3

6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats
d
6.1 Subprograms

Example for exercise: Group of four holes at three different locations

The hales are drilfed with cycle 1 PECKING,

You, enter the Wal hole depth, setup clearance,
drilling feed rate etc. once in the cycle.
Yau can then call the cycle w&h the
miscellaneous function M99 (see page E&6)+

Coordinates of the first hole in each group:

Group @ X = 15mm Y = IOmm
Group @ X =45mm Y =60mm
Group @ X =75mm Y = IOmm
Spacing of holes:
IX = 20 mm IY = 20 mm
Total hole depth (DEPTH): Z = IOmm
Hole diameter: 0 = 5mm

Part program

0 BEGIN PGM 360064 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+1 00 Y+lOO Z+O
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+2.5
4 TOOL CALL 1 Z SIOOO
5 CYCL DEF 1 .O PECKING
6 CYCL DEF 1.1 SETUP2
7 CYCL DEF 1.2 DEPTH -10
8 CYCL DEF 1.3 PECKGIO Cycle definition PECKING (see page 8-6)
9 CYCL DEF 1.4 DWELL 0
IO CYCL DEF 1.5 FIOO
11 LZ+lOO FMAX
12 L X+15 Y+lO RO FMAX M6 .. . .. .. ....__............... Move to hole group 1, insert tool
13 L Z+2 FMAX M3 . .. ... . . . .. .. ..____._.__..................Pre-position in the infeed axis
14 CALL LBL 1 .... ... .... ... .. ... .... ... ... .... .. ... ... .. ... .. .... ... . Subprogram call (with block 14 the subprogram is executed
once)
15 L X+45 Y+60 FMAX . . . . . ..._.__....................._._.. Move to hole group 2
16 CALL LBL 1 .....__._............................................... Subprogram call
17 L X+75 Y+lO FMAX .. ... ... .. . . .. . ... . ... . .... .. ... .. . Move to hole group 3
18 CALL LBL 1 ..... .. .... ... ... .... .. .... .. .... ... .. ... .. .... ... ... ... Subprogram call
19 L Z+l 00 FMAX M2 . ..._...________...........................Retract tool; return to program (M2):
The subprogram is entered after M2
20 LBL 1 .. ... ..... ..... .... ... .. ... .... .. .... .. .... ... ... .. .. .... ... ... ... Beginning of subprogram
21 L M99 . ... ..... .... .... .... .. ... ... ... ... ... .... ... .. ... .. .... ... ... .. . Execute pecking cycle for first hole in group
22 L IX+20 FMAX M99 .. ... ... .. . . .._....................... Move to position for second hole and drill
23 L IY+20 FMAX M99 .. .. ... ... .. ... .. .. ... .. .. ... . . . . ... Move to position for third hole and drill
24 L IX-20 FMAX M99 .. ... .... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... Move to position for fourth hole and drill
25 LBL 0 ... .....__........................................................ End of subprogram
26 END PGM 360064 MM

4
6-4 TNC 370

4
 6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats
L-

6.2 Program Section Repeats

As with subprograms, program section repeats are

marked with labels.

Principle
1
‘- The program is executed up to the end of the
labelled program section (block with CALL LBL) (0, 0 BEGIN PGM
0).
Then the program section between the called LBL
and the label call is repeated the number of times
01

LBL 1
entered after REP in the CALL LBL command (0,
0).
After the last repetition, the program is resumed
CALL LBL 1 REP 2/Z
(@.
5
0
Programming notes END PGM
l A program section can be repeated up to 65 534
times in succession.
l The number behind the slash after REP indicates Fig. 6.2: Flow diagram with program section repeats, @= return
the number of remaining repetitions. jump
l The total number of times the program section
will be carried out is always one more than the
programmed number of repetitions.

Programming and calling a program section repeat

To mark the beginning

Repeat the program section beginning with LABEL 7.

Resulting NC block: LBL 7

Number of repetitions
Enter the number of repetitions in the block which calls the label. This
block also identifies the end of the program section.

LABELNIJMBER?

Execute the program section beginning with LABEL 7.

r ‘“1
REX’EATREP?
L >
Repeat the program section from LBL 7 to this block 10 times.
The oroaram section will therefore be executed a total of 11 times.

Resulting NC block: CALL LBL 7 REP IO/IO

i
TNC 370 6-5

i
6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats 4
6.2 Program Section Repeats

Example for exercise: Row of holes parallel to X axis

zoordinates of 1st hole: X = 5 mm

Y =I0 mm
Spacing between holes: IX =I5 mm
Vo. of holes: N=6
iole depth: z = 10
iole diameter: 0=5mm

Part program

0 BEGIN PGM 360066 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+lOO Z+O
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+2.5
4 TOOL CALL 1 Z SIOOO
5 L Z+lOO RO FMAX M6
6 L X-l 0 Y+lO Z+2 FMAX M3 _____......................... Pre-position in negative X direction
7 LBL 1 .. .. ..__._______.__...............................................Beginning of program section to be repeated
8 L IX+1 5 FMAX
9 L Z-IO FIOO
10 L Z+2 FMAX _._._._...,.............................,,..,.......... Move to hole position, drill, retract
11 CALL LBL 1 REP 5/5 ... .. .. ...._.._..._....................... Call LABEL 1; repeat program section between blocks 7 and
11 five times (for 6 holes!)
12 LZ+lOO RO FMAX M2
13 END PGM 360066 MM

6-6 TNC 370

 6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats
L
6.2 Program Section Repeats

Example for exercise: Milling with program section repeat without radius compensation

Machining sequence
l Upward milling direction
l Machine the area from X=0 to 50 mm
(program all X coordinates with the tool
radius subtracted) and from Y=O to
100 mm: LBL 1
l Machine the area from X=50 to X=1 00 mm
(program all X coordinates with the tool
radius added) and from Y=O to 100 mm:
LBL 2
l After each upward pass, the tool is moved
by an increment of +2.5 mm in the Y axis.

The iflusitrrvtionto tft@right shows the bfock

numberscantaining the end points of the
correspondingccmt~ur ~lemel~t~.

Part program:

0 BEGIN PGM 360067 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-70
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+lOO Z+O Note: the blank form has changed
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+lO
4 TOOL CALL 1 Z SIOOO
5 L X-20 Y-l RO FMAX M3
6 LBL 1
7 L Z-51 FMAX
8 LX+1 FIOO
9 L X+1 1.646 Z-20.2
10 CT X+40 Z+O Program section repeat 1: machining from
11 L x+41 X=0 to 50 mm and Y=O to 100 mm
12 L Z+lO FMAX
L X-20 IY+2.5
13
14
15
CALL LBL 1 REP40/40
L Z+20 FMAX
/
16
17
LX+12OY-1
LBL2
1 Retract, reposition

18 L Z-51 FMAX -I
19 L X+99 FIOO
20 L X+88.354 Z-20.2
21 CT X+60 z+o Program section repeat 2: machining from X=50 to
22 L x+59 100 mm and Y=O to 100 mm
23 L Z+lO FMAX
24 L X+1 20 IY+2.5
25 CALL LBL 2 REP40140
26 L Z+lOO FMAX M2
27 END PGM 360067 MM

i
TNC 370 6-7

L
6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats
d

d
6.3 Program as Subprogram
4
Principle
A program is executed until another program is
called (block with CALL PGM) (0).
0 BEGIN PGM A... : ,,, ” 0 BEGIN PGM B...
The called program is executed from beginning to I I
end (@I.
Execution of the program from which the other
.
41

CALL PGM B ,,,,,.,.,,l.

program was called is then resumed with the block
following the CALL PGM block (0). I

43

END PGM A... ,.,,, ’ END PGM B..

Fig. 6.3: Flow diagram of a program as subprogram;

@ = jump, @ = return jump
Operating limits
l Programs called from an external data storage
medium must not contain any subprograms or
program section repeats.
l No labels are needed to call programs as
subprograms.
l The called program must not contain the miscel-
laneous functions M2 or M30.
l The called program must not contain a jump into
the calling program.

Calling a program as a subprogram

F PR4IXXAM P#UMRER?
‘I
d
Enter the main program call and the number of the program you want to call.
/
._

Call an externally stored program -

EXT
r- /
4
Call a plain-language program
. H ;
r--

Call an IS0 program

Call a program from the TNC memory

(default setting)

Resulting NC block: CALL PGM NAME

l A main program can atso be called with cycle 12 PGM CALL bee page 83%
l Whan calling an tS0 program, the program name must not contain G50, E70 OF G71.

4
6-8 TNC 370
 6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats
L

6.4 Nesting
Subprograms and program section repeats can be nested in the following
variations:
l Subprograms in subprograms
L
l Program section repeats in program section repeats
l Subprograms can be repeated
l Program section repeats can appear in subprograms

Nesting depth
The nesting depth is the number of successive levels for which subpro-
grams or program sections can call further subprograms or program
sections.
. Maximum nesting depth for subprograms: 8
Maximum nesting depth for calling main programs: 4

Subprogram in a subprogram
Program layout
0 BEGIN PGM 360069 MM

e.g. 17
: 9 1

CALL LBL 1 Call of subprogram at LBLI

5
: 4
e.g. 35 L Z+lOO RO FMAX M2 Last program block of main program (with M2)

I
36 LBL 1

: 42
Subprogram 1
e.g. 39 CALL LBL 2 with program call of
subprogram 2
i 44

e.g. 45 LBL 0 ...._...._......_.................................... End of subprogram 1

46 LBLZ

3
.: 4
e.g. 62 LBLO .. . . _. . ... _._... ...__.... ... ... .... .. ...*.. End of subprogram 2

63 END PGM 360069 MM End of main program

Sequence of program execution

Step 1: Main program 360069 is executed up to block 17.
Step 2: Subprogram 1 is called and executed up to block 39.
Step 3: Subprogram 2 is called and executed up to block 62.
End of subprogram 2 and return to subprogram from
which it was called.
Step 4: Subprogram 1 is executed from block 40 to block 45.
End of subprogram 1 and return to main program 360069.
Step 5: Main program 360069 is executed from block 18 to block 35.
Return jump to block 1 and program end.

TNC 370 6-9

6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats
d
6.4 Nesting

Example for exercise: Group of four holes at three positions (see page 6-4). but with three different tools
f \
Machining sequence:
Countersinking - Drilling -Tapping
L /

The drilling operation is programmed with oycte

1: PECKfNGtsee page 841 and cyczie2:
TAPPING (see page 8-12~.Tha groups of holes
are approach& in one subprogram, and the
machiningis perbrmed in a second subprogram.

Coordinates of the first hole in each group:

@ X = 15mm Y = IOmm
@ X = 45mm Y = 60mm
@ X = 75mm Y = IOmm
Spacing between
holes: IX = 20mm IY =20mm
Hole data:
Countersinking ZC= 3mm 0 = 7mm
Drilling ZD= 15mm 0 = 5mm
Tapping ZT= IOmm 0 = 6mm

Part program

BEGIN PGM 3600610 MM

BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-20
BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+lOO Z+O
TOOL DEF T25 L+O R+2.5
TOOL DEF T30 L+O R+3 Tool definition for countersinking (T35), pecking (T25) and
TOOL DEF T35 L+O R+3.5 I) tapping (T30)
CYCL DEF 1 .O PECKING
CYCL DEF 1.1 SETUP2
CYCL DEF 1.2 DEPTH-3
9
10
CYCL
CYCL
DEF
DEF
1.3 PECKG3
1.4 DWELL0 k Cycle definition PECKING for countersinking

12 TOOL CALL 1.535 FIOO

Z S 500 J
11 CYCL DEF
13 CALL LBL 1 ._.._____............................................... Call of subprogram 1
14 CYCL DEF 1 .O PECKING
15 CYCL DEF 1 .I SETUP2
16 CYCL DEF 1.2 DEPTH-25
17
18
CYCL
CYCL
DEF 1.3 DEPTH6
DEF 1.4 DWELL0 l- Cycle definition PECKING
19
20
21
CYCL
TOOL
CALL
DEF 1.5 F50
CALL 25 Z S 1000 J
LBL 1 .. .. ... . . . .. . . .. . . ... . .. .... .. ... .. ... . . Call of subprogram 1
22 CYCL DEF 2.0 TAPPING
23 CYCL DEF 2.1 SETUP2
24 CYCL DEF 2.2 DEPTH-l 5
25 CYCL DEF 2.3 DWELL0 Cycle definition TAPPING
26 CYCL DEF 2.4 FIOO
27 TOOL CALL 30 Z S 250 I
28 CALL LBL 1 _.._____.,...,..,......,.,.,..,..,...................... Call of subprogram 1
29 L Z+lOO RO FMAX M2 Last program block, return jump

Continued...

4
6-l 0 TNC 370
 6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats
6.4 Nesting

30 LBL 1
31 LX+15Y+lOROFMAXM3
32 LZ+2 FMAX
33 CALL LBL 2
34 L X+45 Y+60 FMAX Move to first hole in each group, then call subprogram 2
35 CALL LBL 2
36 L X+75 Y+lO FMAX
37 CALL LBL 2
38 LBLO
39 LBL2
40 L M99
41 L IX+20 F9999 M99 Machine first hole, then move to and machine the other holes
42 L IY+20 M99 using the same cycle
43 L IX-20 M99
44 LBLO -i
45 END PGM 3600610 MM

Repeating program section repeats

Program layout
0 BEGIN PGM 3600611 MM

Program section between this block and LBL 2 (block 20) is

repeated twice

Program section between this block and LBL 1 (block 15) is

repeated once

0 7

e.g. 50 END PGM 3600611 MM

Sequence of program execution

.-
Step 1: Main program 3600611 is executed up to block 27.
Step 2: Program section between block 27 and block 20 is repeated
twice.
x- Step 3: Main program 3600611 is executed from block 28 to block 35.
Step 4: Program section between block 35 and block 15 is repeated
once.
L Step 5: Repetition of step 2 within step 0.
Step 6: Repetition of step 3 within step@.
Step 7: Main program 3600611 is executed from block 36 to block 50.
i
End of program.

TNC 370 6-I 1

L
6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats
4
6.4 Nesting

Repeating subprograms
Program layout
0 BEGIN PGM 3600612 MM

e.g. 10 LEL f 11

CALL l&L 2 ...I.... <<.. .. ..2Xe3 ..ltlhII-l ... .- . .. .. Subprogram call

4 . ... . Program section repeat
:: CALL LBL 1 REP 2f2

04
+
e.g. 19 L Z+lOO RO FMAX M2 . ..__.__.___.._._._._____..... Last program block of main program with M2
20 LBL 2 .. .... .. ..... .. .... .. ..... ... .. . .... ... .. ... ... ... . Beginning of subprogram

2
4
e.g. 28 LBL 0 ..___.._._.._._.__._.___.__.______,____..................
End of subprogram
29 END PGM 3600612 MM End of main program

Sequence of program execution

Step 1: Main program 3600612 is executed to block 11.
Step 2: Subprogram 2 is called and executed.
Step 3: Program section between block 12 and block 10 is repeated d

twice: subprogram 2 is repeated twice.

Step 4: Main program 3600612 is executed from block 13 to block
19. End of program. -,

4
6-12 TNC 370

4
 7 Programming with Q Parameters
-
7.1 Part Families-Q Parameters Instead of Numerical Values.. ....... ..7- 4

7.2 Describing Contours Through Mathematical Functions ................ 7-6

Overview ................................................................................................................... 7-6

7.3 Trigonometric Functions ................................................................... 7-8

Overview .................................................................................................................. .7-8

7.4 If-Then Operations with Q Parameters ............................................ 7-9

Jumps.. ..................................................................................................................... .7-9
Overview .................................................................................................................. ,7-9

7.5 Checking and Changing 0 Parameters ......................................... 7-11

7.6 Output of Q Parameters and Messages ......................................... 7-12

Displaying error messages .................................................................................... ,7-l 2
Output through an external data interface.. ............................................................ 7-l 3
Assigning values for the PLC .................................................................................. 7-l 3

7.7 Reading from System Data .............................................................. 7-14

7.8 Examples for Exercise ..................................................................... 7-15

Rectangular pocket with corner rounding and tangential approach ..................... ..7- 15
Bolt hole circle ........................................................................................................ .7-l 6
Ellipse ..................................................................................................................... .7-18
Machining a hemisphere with an end mill.. ............................................................. 7-20

370
7 Programming with 0 Parameters
4

0 Parameters are used for:

l Programming families of parts
l Defining contours through mathematical functions

A family of parts can be programmed in the TNC 370 in a single part

program. You do this by entering variables - called 0 parameters -
instead of numerical values.

A Q parameter is designated by the letter Q and a number between 0

and 123.

lweanfrrg Range
Freely available parameters, locally effective
(depending on MP7251) QO to Q99
ig. 7.1: Q parameters as variables
Parameters for special functions on the TNC 0100 to 0199
Parameters that are primarily reserved for
cycles, globally effective Q200 to Q299

Q parameters can represent for example:

l Coordinate values
l Feed rates
l Spindle speeds
l Cycle data

Q parameters also enable you to program contours that are defined

through mathematical functions.

With 0 parameters you can make the execution of machining steps

dependent on logical conditions.

0 parameters and numerical values can also be mixed within a

program.

Q parameters can be assigned numerical values between -99999.9999

and +99999.9999.

The TNC 370 automaticatiy assigns data to

some Q parameters. For example,
current toot radius. You witi find a list of these parameters in Chapter 12.
parameter Q108 is assigned the
d

7-2 TNC 370

 7 Programming with Q Parameters
L-

Press the Q-DEF soft key to call the Q parameter functions. A soft-key
row appears with the following groups of functions:

-- Qroup Qf functians soft key

Fundamental operations

-
Trigonometric functions
1 NOMETRY /
.--
If-Then operations, jumps

Other functions

‘-

TNC 370 7-3

7 Programming with Q Parameters

7.1 Part Families - 0 Parameters Instead of Numerical Values

The Q parameter function FNO: ASSIGN is used for assigning numerical
values to Q parameters.
Example: QIO = 25

This enables you to enter variable Q parameters in the program instead

of numerical values.
Example: L X + 010 (corresponds to L X + 25)

For part families, the characteristic workpiece dimensions can be

programmed as Q parameters. Each of these parameters is then
assigned a different value when the parts are machined.

Example
Cylinder with Q parameters

Cylinder radius R = Ql
Cylinder height H = Q2

Cylinder Zl : Ql = +30
02 = +I0

Cylinder 22: 01 = +I0

Q2 = +50

Fig. 7.2: Workpiece dimensions as Q parameters

To assign numerical values to Q parameters:

Select BASIC ARITHMETIC.

Choose function FNO: ASSIGN.

/
PARAMETER NUEMBER lFY)R REiULT?
c
Enter Q parameter number.

Enter value or another Q parameter whose value is to be assigned

/ e.g.a m 1 to Q5. I

Resulting NC block: FNO: 05 = 6

The value to the right of the equal sign is assigned to the Q parameter
to the left.

7-4 TNC 370

 7 Programming with Q Parameters
-
7.1 Q Parameters Instead of Numerical Values

Example for exercise: Full circle

Circle center CC: X = 50mm

Y = 50mm
Beginning and end
of circular arc C: X = 50 mm
Y = Omm
Milling depth: Z = -5mm
Tool radius: R = 15mm

Part program without Q parameters

0 BEGIN 360074 MM .. .. .... .. .. .._.......................... Start of program

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-20 Blank form definition
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+1 00 Y+lOO Z+O
3 TOOL DEF 6 L+O R+15 ... .. ... ... .... ... ... .... .. .... ... .. Tool definition
4 TOOL CALL 6 Z S500 .. ... .... .. .. .... .. ... . .. .. . ... ... . Tool call
5 CC X+50 Y+50 . . .. ... . . ... .... ... .. .... .. ... . .. ... .... ... Coordinates of circle center CC
6 L Z+lOO RO FMAX M6 Insert tool
7 L X+30 Y-20 FMAX .. . .. ... . .. ...._.......................... Pre-position tool
8 L Z-5 FMAX M3
9 L X+50 Y+O RR FIOO .... ... ....._._..__....................... Move to first contour point with radius compensation
10 C X+50 Y+O DR+ __..........................._._..____________.. Mill circular arc C around circle center CC; coordinates of end
point: X = +50 mm and Y = 0; positive direction of rotation
11 L X+70 Y-20 RO FMAX
12 L Z+lOO FMAX M2
13 END PGM 360074 MM .. .... .. ... .... . . .... ... ... .... .. Retract tool and end program

Part program with Q parameters

0 BEGIN PGM 3600741 MM

1 FN 0: Ql = +I00 Clearance height
2 FN 0: Q2 = +30 ... ... .. . . .. ... ... ... ... .. .... . . ... .... ... . Start pos. X
3 FN 0: 03 = -20 . ... ... .. ...._.__................................. Start-End pos. Y
4 FN 0: Q4 = +70 .. ... .. ...._..._................................ End pos. X
5 FN 0: Q5 = -5 .. ... .. .. ... .. ... .. ... .. ... .. . . . . .... .. . Milling depth Blocks 1 to 12:
6 FN 0: Q6 = +50 ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .... ... .. .... ... . .. . . . Center point X Assign numerical values to the
7 FN 0: Q7 = +50 .. ... .. ... ... ... .. . . . .. ... ... . .. . .. . Center point Y Q parameters
8 FN 0: Q8 = +50 . ... .. ... ... ...__.___._.......................Circle starting point X
9 FN 0: 09 = +0 _................................................... Circle starting point Y
10 FN 0: 010 = +0 . ... . ... .. .. . . .. . . . .. .. . .. . .. . Tool length L
11 FN 0: Ql 1 = +I 5 .. . . ... . . . . .. .. . . ... .... . . . . . . . Tool radius R
12 FN 0: Q20 = +I 00 . ... .._.__....__............................. Milling feed rate F 1

13 BLK FORM 0.1 .Z X+0 Y+O Z-20

14 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+lOO Z+O
15 TOOL DEF 1 L+QlO R+Ql 1
16 TOOL CALL 1 Z S500
17 CC X+06 Y+Q7 Blocks 13 to 24:
18 L Z+Ql RO FMAX M6 Corresponding to blocks 1 to 12
19 L X+Q2 Y+Q3 F MAX from program 360074
.-
20 L Z+Q5 F MAX M3
21 L X+08 Y+Q9 RR FQ20
22 C X+Q8 Y+Q9 DR+
.-
23 L X+Q4 Y+Q3 RO FMAX
24 L Z+Ql FMAX M2
25 END PGM 3600741 MM
,
L

TNC 370 7-5

L
7 Programming with Q Parameters
d

7.2 Describing Contours Through Mathematical Functions

J
The mathematical functions assign the results of one of the following
operations to a Q parameter:

Functlufl soft key

FNO: ASSIGN FN0
e.g. FNO: Q5 = +60
H=Y >
Assigns a numerical value. /
FNI: ADDITION FNl
e.g. FNI: Ql = -Q2 + -5 x+Y ,f/
Calculates and assigns the sum of two values. /
FN2: SUBTRACTION
e.g. FN2: Ql = +I0 - +5
Calculates and assigns the difference of two values.
FN3: MULTIPLICATION
e.g. FN3: Q2 = +3 * +3
Calculates and assigns the product of two values.
FN4: DIVISION
FN4
e.g. FN4: 04 = +8 DIV +Q2 )
x / Y
Calculates and assigns the quotient of two values. /
Not permitted: division by 0
FN5: SQUARE ROOT
e.g. FN5: Q20 = SQRT 4
Calculates and assigns the square root of a number.
Not permitted: square root of a negative number

The “values” in the overview above can be:

l two numbers
l two Q parameters
l a number and a Q parameter
The Q parameters and numerical values in the equations can be entered
with positive or negative signs.

To select a mathematical operation

Select BASIC ARITHMETIC.

Choose function FN3: MULTIPLICATION.

-/
7-6 TNC 370
 7 Programming with Q Parameters
L
7.2 Describing Contours Through Mathematical Functions

Programming example for fundamental operations

Assign the value IO to parameter Q5, and assign the product of Q5 and
7 to parameter 012.

Select BASIC ARITHMETIC.

Choose Q parameter function FN 0: ASSIGN.

Assign numerical value to 05.

Select BASIC ARITHMETIC.

I I\ I Choose Q parameter function FN3: MULTIPLICATION.

l

Enter parameter number, for example Q12.

Resulting NC blocks: FNO: 05 = + 10

L
FN3: 012 = +Q5* +7

L
TNC 370 7-7
7 Programming with Q Parameters

7.3 Trigonometric Functions

Sine, cosine and tangent are the terms for the ratios of the sides of right
triangles. Trigonometric functions simplify many calculations.

For a right triangle,

Sine: sin a = a / c
Cosine: cos a = b I c
Tangent: tan a = a I b = sin a I cos a

Where
l c is the side opposite the right angle b
l a is the side opposite the angle a
l b is the third side

The angle can be derived from the tangent:

a = arctan a = arctan (a / b) = arctan (sin a / cos a) 1
Fig. 7.3: Sides and angles on a right triangle _,
Example: a = 10 mm
b = IOmm
a = arctan (a / b) = arctan 1 = 45”

Furthermore: a2 + b2 = c2 (a2 = a a)
c=l-xF-
-

Function ;; saft key

FN6: SINE
e.g. FN6: Q20 = SIN -Q5
Calculate the sine of an angle in degrees (“1 0

and assign it to a parameter

FN7: COSINE
e.g. FN7: 021 = COS -Q5 -

Calculate the cosine of an angle in degrees (“1

and assign it to a parameter
-
FN8: ROOT SUM OF SQUARES
e.g. FN8: QIO = +5 LEN +4
Take the square root of the sum of two squares
J
and assign it to a parameter
FN13: ANGLE
e.g. FN13: 020 = +I0 ANG -Ql
4
Calculate the angle from the arc tangent of two
sides or from the sine and cosine of the angle
(0 - angle - 360”) and assign it to a parameter
4

-/
7-8 TNC 370
 7 Programming with Q Parameters
L

7.4 If-Then Operations with 0 Parameters

If-Then conditional operations enable the TNC 370 to compare a

Q parameter with another Q parameter or with a numerical value.

-_
Jumps
The jump target is specified in the block through a label number. If the
i programmed condition is true, the TNC continues the program at the
specified label; if it is false, the next block is executed.
To jump to another program, you enter a PGM CALL after the block with
the target label (see page 6-8).

Abbreviations used:
IF If
EQU Equals
NE Not equal
GT Greater than
LT Less than
GOT0 Go to

FN9: IF EQUAL, JUMP

e.g. FN9: IF +Ql EQU +Q3 GOT0 LBL 5
If the two values or parameters are equal,
jump to the specified label.
FNIO: IF NOT EQUAL, JUMP
e.g. FNIO: IF +I0 NE -Q5 GOT0 LBL 10
If the two parameters or values are not equal,
jump to the specified label.
FNII: IF GREATER THAN, JUMP
e.g. FNI 1: IF +Ql GT+lO GOT0 LBL 5
If the first value or parameter is greater than the second
value or parameter, jump to the specified label.
FN12: IF LESS THAN, JUMP
e.g. FN12: IF +Q5 LT +0 GOT0 LBL 1
If the first value or parameter is less than the second
value or parameter, jump to the specified label.

TNC 370 7-9

L
7 Programming with Q Parameters
d
7.4 If-Then Operations with Q Parameters

Unconditional jumps
Unconditional jumps are jumps which are always executed, because the
condition is always true.
Example:
FN 9: IF +I0 EQU +I0 GOT0 LBLI

Since it is always true that 1O=lO, the jump will always be executed.

Program example
When Q5 becomes negative, a jump to program 100 will occur.

5 FNO: 05 = +I 0 ___.____...,.......................................Assign value (such as IO) to parameter 05

9 FN 2: 05 = +Q5 - +I2 ....................................... Reduce the value of Q5

10 FN 12: IF +Q5 LT +0 GOT0 LBL 5 ................... If +Q5 is less than 0, jump to label 5

15 LBL 5 .................................................................. Label 5

16 PGM CALL 100 .................................................. Jump to program 100

7-10 TNC370 -
 7 Programming with Q Parameters

7.5 Checking and Changing 0 Parameters

Q parameters can be checked during program run or during a test run,
and changed if necessary.

Preparation:
l A running program must be aborted (e.g. press machine STOP button
and STOP soft key).
) If you are doing a test run, you must interrupt it.

To call a 0 parameter table

TEST RUN 15
You can call a 0 parameter table by pressing the
Q0 =a
black Q-key (see Fig. 7.4) in which the currently = +2
active Q parameter values are filed. ;; = -15
q +25.36
Use the black arrow keys to select a Q parameter ii q +105
Q5 = -23
on a screen page. With the arrow soft keys you can = +111,3
move to the next or previous page of the table. K = +0
08 = +15
You can change a Q parameter value by overwrit- Q9 = +19
Ql0 = +22
ing the old value. Press END to exit the table and
save all changed values. RCX. x -25,500 T
+21,325 q 0
r +150,000 M5/9
C +90,000
L
Fig. 7.4: Q parameter table

\
TNC 370 7-11
7 Programming with Q Parameters
4

7.6 Output of Q Parameters and Messages

Displaying error messages

With the function FN14: ERROR you can call messages that were pre-
programmed by the machine tool builder.
If the TNC encounters a block with FN 14 during a program run or test
run, it interrupts the run and displays an error message. The program
must then be restarted.

Input example:
FN 14: ERROR = 254
The TNC will display the text of error code 254.

Error oode ta be *tiered Prepared dialog text

0 to 299 FN 14: ERROR CODE 0 to 299
300 to 399 PLC: ERROR 0 to 99
d
400 to 499 DIALOG 0 to 99
1000 to 1099 Internal error messages
(see table below)

Error code Error text

1000 SPINDLE MUST BE TURNING
1001 TOOL AXIS IS MISSING -
1002 SLOT WIDTH TOOL LARGE
1003 TOOL RADIUS TOO LARGE
1004 RANGE EXCEEDED
START POSITION INCORRECT
1006 ROTATION NOT PERMITI-ED
1007 SCALING FACTOR NOT PERMITTED
1008 MIRRORING NOT PERMITTED
1009 DATUM SHIFT NOT PERMITTED
1010 FEED RATE IS MISSING
1011 ENTRY VALUE INCORRECT

7-12 TNC370 -
 7 Programming with Q Parameters
\
7.6 Output of Q Parameters and Messages

ErrQr c&e Error text

1012 WRONG SIGN PROGRAMMED
1013 ENTERED ANGLE NOT PERMITTED
1014 TOUCH POINT INACCESSIBLE
L

1015 TOO MANY POINTS

1016 CONTRADICTORY ENTRY
. .
1017 CYCL INCOMPLETE
1018 PLANE WRONGLY DEFINED
1019 WRONG AXIS PROGRAMMED
1020 WRONG RPM
1021 RADIUS COMP. UNDEFINED
1022 ROUNDING-OFF UNDEFINED
1023 ROUNDING RADIUS TOO LARGE
1024 PROGRAM START UNDEFINED
1025 EXCESSIVE SUBPROGRAMMING
;-
1026 ANGLE REFERENCE MISSING

Output through an external data interface

The function FN 15: PRINT transmits the values of Q parameters and
error messages over the data interface. When FN 15 is used for trans-
ferring values to a PC, the TNC generates the file %FN15RUN.A in the
PC memory to store the transferred values.
l FN 15: PRINT with numerical values up to 200
Example: FN15: PRINT 20
Transmits the corresponding error message (see overview for FN14)
l FN 15: PRINT with Q parameter
Example: FN15: PRINT Q20
Transmits the value of the corresponding 0 parameter.
Up to six Q parameters and numerical values can be transmitted
simultaneously. The TNC separates them with slashes,
Example: FNI 5: PRINT l/Ql/2/Q2

Assigning values for the PLC

Function FN19: PLC transmits up to two numerical values or
Q parameters to the PLC.

Input increment and unit of measure: 1 mm or 0.001”

Example: FNI 9: PLC=+l O/+03

L

The number 10 corresponds to 10 mm or 0.01’.

TNC 370 7-l 3

7 Programming with Q Parameters

7.7 Reading from System Data

With the function FN18: SYSREAD you can read system data and store
them in Q parameters. A system address is selected with the associated
group and number, and, in some cases, with an index number:

Number af group Number Index @stem address

Data defined in the tool table 50 1 Tool length
Tool radius
Tool length oversize DL
Tool radius oversize DR
Tool locked (0 or 1)
Number of replacement tool
Maximum tool life TIME1
Maximum tool life TIME2
Current tool age CUR.TIME
PLC status
TT: Number of teeth CUT.
TT: Wear tolerance: length LTOL
TT: Wear tolerance: radius RTOL
-/
TT: Cutting direction DIRECT (3 or 4)
TT: Offset plane R-OFFS
lT: Offset length L-OFFS
TT: Breakage tolerance: length LBREAK
TT: Breakage tolerance: radius RBREAK
Active transformations 210 1 - Basic rotation in MANUAL OPERATION
- -
Programmed rotation with Cycle 10
- Active mirror axis
0: Mirroring inactive
1: Mirroring X active -
2: Mirroring Y active
3: Mirroring X/Y active
4: Mirroring Z active
5: Mirroring X/Z active
6: Mirroring Y/Z active
8: Mirroring IV axis active -
9: Mirroring X/IV axis active
10: Mirroring Y/IV axis active
12: Mirroring Z/IV axis active
4

Nominal position of REF system 240 1 1 X axis

2 Y axis
3 Z axis 4
4 Axis IV
Touch point of REF system 2 1 X axis
2 Y axis 4

3 Z axis
4 Axis IV
Pole of REF system 3 1 X axis
2 Y axis
3 Z axis
-
Example: Read a BASIC ROTATION defined in the
MANUAL OPERATION mode and store it in 025
FN18: SYSREAD Q25 = ID210 NO1

7-14 TNC 370

 7 Programming with Q Parameters

7.8 Examples for Exercise

Rectangular pocket with corner rounding and tangential approach

Pocket center coordinates:

X = 50mm(Ql)
Y = 50 mm (Q2)
Pocket length X = 90 mm (Q3)
Pocket width Y = 70 mm (Q4)
Working depth Z = (-) 15 mm (-05)
Corner radius R = 10 mm (Q6)
Milling feed F = 200 mm/min (07)

Note:

At the corners 21 and 31 the workpiece will be

machined slightly differently than shown in the
-.-. drawing!

L
Part program

0 BEGIN PGM 360077 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+1 00 Y+lOO Z+O 1) Program start and workpiece blank

3 FN 0: Ql = +50
4 FN 0: Q2 = +50
5 FN 0: Q3 = +90
6 FN 0: 04 = +70 Assign the rectangular pocket data to Q parameters
7 FNO:Q5=+15
8 FNO:Q6=+10
9 FN 0: Q7 = +200
10 TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+5
11 TOOL CALL 1 Z SIOOO Define and insert the tool
12 L Z+lOO RO FMAX M6 1
13 FN4: Q13 = +Q3 DIV+2 Enter half the pocket length and width for the paths of
14 FN4: Q14 = +Q4 DIV+2 1 traverse in blocks 20, 22, 30
15 FN4: Q16 = +Q6 DIV+4 Rounding radius for tangential approach
16 FN4: 017 = +Q7 DIV+2 Feed rate in corners is half the rate for linear movement
17 L X+Ql Y+Q2 RO FMAX M3 Pre-position in X and Y (pocket center), spindle ON
18 L Z+2 FMAX .. . .._............................................... Pre-position over workpiece
19 L Z-Q5 FQ7 .. . ..._............................................. Move to working depth Q5 (= -15 mm) with feed rate 07
(=I 00)
20 L IX+Q13 Y+Q2 RL
21 RND RQ16 FQ17 Approach the pocket in a tangential arc
1
22 L IY+Q14
23 RND RQ6 FQI 7
24 L IX-03
25 RND RQ6 FQI 7
26 L IY-Q4
27 RND RQ6 FQ17 Mill the frame of the rectangular pocket
28 L IX+Q3
29 RND RQ6 FQI 7
30 L IY+Q14
31 RND RQ16 FQ17
32 L X+01 Y+Q2 RO FMAX Depart to pocket center in a tangential arc
I
33 L Z+lOO FMAX M2 ... ......____.............................. Retract tool
34 END PGM 360077 MM
c J

TNC 370 7-15

7 Programming with 0 Parameters
1
7.8 Examples for Exercise

Bolt hole circle

Bore pattern 1 distributed over a full circle:

Entry values are listed below in program

blocks 1 - 8.

Movements in the plane are programmed

with polar coordinates.

Bore pattern 2 distributed over a circle sector:

Entry values are listed below in lines 20 - 24;

Q5, 07 and Q8 remain the same.

Part program

0 BEGIN PGM 3600715 MM .................................... Load data for bolt hole circle 1:
1 FN 0: 01 = + 30 ..................................................... Circle center X coordinate
2 FN 0: Q2 = +70 ...................................................... Circle center Y coordinate
3 FN 0: Q3 = +I 1 ...................................................... Number of holes
4 FN 0: Q4 = +25 ...................................................... Circle radius
5 FN 0: 05 = +90 ...................................................... Start angle
6 FN 0: 06 = +0 ........................................................ Hole angle increment (0: distribute holes over 360”)
7 FN 0: Q7 = +2 ........................................................ Setup clearance
8 FN 0: Q7 = +I5 ...................................................... Total hole depth
9 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-20
10 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+lOO Z+O
11 TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+4
12 TOOL CALL 1 Z S2500
13 CYCL DEF 1 .O PECKING .................................... Definition of the pecking cycle
14 CYCL DEF 1 .I SET UP Q7 ................................. Setup clearance
15 CYCL DEF 1.2 DEPTH -08 ................................ Total hole depth according to the load data
16 CYCL DEF 1.3 PECKG 5
17 CYCL DEF 1.4 DWELL 0
18 CYCL DEF 1.5 F250
19 CALL LBL 1 .......................................................... Call bolt hole circle 1, load data for bolt hole circle 2
(only re-enter changed data)
20 FN 0: Ql = +90 .................................................... New circle center X coordinate
21 FN 0: 02 = +25 .................................................... New circle center Y coordinate
22 FN 0: 03 = +5 ...................................................... New number of holes
23 FN 0: 04 = +35 .................................................... New circle radius
24 FN 0: 06 = +30 .................................................... New hole angle increment (not a full circle, 5
holes at 30” intervals)
25 CALL LBL 1 .......................................................... Call bolt hole circle 2
26 L Z+200 RO F MAX M2

Continued

7-16 TNC 370

 7 Programming with Q Parameters
L
7.8 Examples for Exercise

27 LBL 1 ..................................................................... Subprogram bolt hole circle

28 FN 0: 010 = +0 ..................................................... Set the counter for finished holes
29 FN 10: IF +Q6 NE +0 GOT0 LBL 10 .................... If the hole angle increment has been entered, jump to LBL 10
30 FN 4: 06 = +360 DIV +Q3 .................................... Calculate the hole angle increment, distribute holes over 360”
31 LBL 10
32 FN 1 : Ql 1 = +Q5 + +Q6.. ..................................... Calculate second hole position from the start angle and hole
angle increment
33 CC X+Ql Y+Q2 .................................................... Set pole at bolt hole circle center
34 LP PR+Q4 PA+QS RO F MAX M3 ........................ Move in the plane to 1 st hole
35 L Z+Q7 RO F MAX M99 ........................................ Move in Z to setup clearance, call cycle
36 FN 1 : 010 = +QlO + +I ....................................... Count finished holes
37 FN 9: IF +QlO EQU +Q3 GOT0 LBL 99.. ............. Finished?
38 LBL 2
39 LP PR+Q4 PA+Ql 1 RO F MAX M99 .................... Make a second and further holes
40 FN 1 : 010 = +QlO + +I ....................................... Count finished holes
41 FN 1: 01 1 = +Ql 1 + +Q6.. ................................... Calculate angle for next hole
(update)
42 FN 12: IF + 010 LT + Q3 GOT0 LBL 2 ................ Not finished?
43 LBL 99
44 L Z+200 RO F MAX ............................................... Retract in Z
45 LBL 0. .................................................................... End of subprogram
46 END PGM 3600715 MM

TNC 370 7-l 7

7 Programming with Q Parameters
7.8 Examples for Exercise

Ellipse

X coordinate calculation: X = a cos a

Y coordinate calculation: Y = b sin a

a, b : Semimajor and semiminor axes of the

ellipse
a : Angle between the leading axis and
the connecting line from P to the
center of the ellipse.

Process:
The points of the ellipse are calculated and
connected by many short lines. The more
points that are calculated and the shorter
the lines between them, the smoother the
curve.

The machining direction can be varied by

changing the entries for start and end angles,
The input parameters are listed below in blocks
1 to 12.

Part program

0 BEGIN PGM 360079 MM ....................................... Load data

1 FN 0: Ql = +50 ...................................................... .X coordinate for center of ellipse
2 FN 0: 02 = +50 ....................................................... Y coordinate for center of ellipse
3 FN 0: Q3 = +50 ....................................................... Semiaxis in X
4 FN 0: 04 = +20 ....................................................... Semiaxis in Y
5 FN 0: Q5 = +0 ......................................................... Start angle
6 FN 0: Q6 = +360 ..................................................... End angle
7 FN 0: Q7 = +40 ....................................................... Number of calculating steps
8 FN 0: 08 = +0 ......................................................... Rotational position
9 FN 0: 09 = +I0 ....................................................... Depth
10 FN 0: QIO = +I00 ................................................. Plunging feed rate
11 FN 0: Ql 1 = +350 ................................................. Milling feed rate
12 FN 0: Q12 = +2 ..................................................... Setup clearance Z
13 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-20
14 BLK FORM 0.2 X+1 00 Y+lOO Z+O ....................... Define workpiece blank
15 TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+2.5
16 TOOL CALL 1 Z S2800
17 L Z+2000 RO F MAX M ......................................... Retract in Z
18 CALL LBL IO REP ................................................. Call subprogram ellipse
19 L Z+200 RO F MAX MO2 ....................................... Retract in Z, end of main program

Continued

7-l 8 TNC 370

 7 Programming with C2 Parameters
i
7.8 Examples for Exercise

20LBLlO
21 CYCL DEF 7.0 DATUM SHIFT
22 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+01
23 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+Q2 .._.......................................... Shift datum to center of ellipse
24 CYCL DEF 10.0 ROTATION
25 CYCL DEF 10.1 ROT +Q8 Activate rotation, if 08 is loaded
26 FN2: Q35 = +Q6 - +Q5
27 FN4: 035 = +Q35 DIV +Q7 . .. ... ... . .. ..... . .. .. ... .. Calculate angle increment
28 FNO: 036 = +Q5 ...._............................................. Current angle for calculation = set start angle
29 FNO: 037 = +0 .... ... .. .... ... . ..... ... ... .... ..... ..... .. ... .. Set counter for milled steps
30 CALL LBL 11 REP .. .. .... ... ... ..... ... .. .... ..... ..... ... . . . Call subprogram for calculating the points of the ellipse
31 L X+Q21 Y+Q22 RO F MAX MO3 Move to start point in the plane
32 L Z+Q12 RO F MAX M .. ... ..... ... ... ... .. . . ..... ... .... Rapid traverse in Z to setup clearance
33 L Z-Q9 RO FQIO M ... ... ... .. .. ... ... . . .... .. ... . . .... Plunge to milling depth at plunging feed rate

34 LBL 1
35 FNI : Q36 = +Q36 + +Q35 Update the angle
36 FNI : Q37 = +Q37 + +I ... ..... .. . .. .... .... ..... ... .. . ... . Update the counter
37 CALL LBLI 1 REP . .._.__..................................._......_ Call subprogram for calculating the points of the ellipse
38 L X+021 Y+Q22 RO FQI 1 M .. . .. ..... ... ..... .... ... ... . Move to next point
39 FN 12: IF +Q37 LT +Q7 GOT0 LBL 1 Unfinished?

40 CYCL DEF 10.0 ROTATION

41 CYCL DEF 10.1 ROT+0 .. ... . . ..... ... . .. . . . . .. ... .. Reset rotation
42 CYCL DEF 7.0 DATUM SHIFT
43 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+0
44 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+O . . ... ... .... . .._.............................. Reset datum shift
45 L Z+Q12 RO F MAX M . . .. .. ... . ... ... ..... . . ... .... ... Move in Z to setup clearance
46 LBL 0 . ... ... ... ... ... .. .. . ... . . ... .. ... . ... ... ..... .. . .. .... .. End of subprogram for milling the ellipse

47 LBL 11
48 FN7: Q21 = COS + 036
49 FN3: Q21 = +Q21 * + 03 ._.____,__.___........................
Calculate X coordinate
50 FN6: Q22 = SIN + Q36
51 FN3: Q22 = +Q22 * +Q4 Calculate Y coordinate
52 LBL 0
53 END PGM 360079 MM

i
TNC 370 7-l 9
7 Programming with Q Parameters
I
7.8 Examples for Exercise

Machining a hemisphere with an end mill

Notes on the program:

l The tool moves upwards in the ZX plane.
* You can enter an oversize in block 12 (Ql2)
if you want to machine the contour in
several steps.
l The tool radius is automatically compensated
with parameter 0108.

The program works with the following values:

l Solid angle: Start angle 01
End angle Q2
Increment Q3
l Sphere radius Q4
l Setup clearance Q5
l Plane angle: Start angle Q6
End angle Q7
Increment Q8
l Center of sphere: X coordinate 09
Y coordinate 010
l Milling feed rate 011
l Oversize 012

The parameters additionally defined in the

program have the following meanings:
l 015: Setup clearance above the sphere
l Q21: Solid angle during machining
l 024: Distance from center of sphere
to center of tool
l Q26: Plane angle during machining
l 0108: Tool radius

Part program

0 BEGIN PGM 360712 MM

1 FNO: 01 = +90 Y
2 FN 0: Q2 = +0
3 FN 0: Q3 = + 5
4 FN 0: 04 = +45
5 FN 0: Q5 = +2
6 FN 0: 06 = +0 Assign the sphere data to the parameters
7 FN 0: 07 = +360
8 FN 0: Q8 = + 5
9 FN 0: Q9 = + 50
10 FNO: QIO = +50
11 FNO: Qll = +500
12 FNO: Q12 = +0 2
13 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-50
14 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+lOO Z+O
15 TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+5 Workpiece blank; define and insert tool
16 TOOL CALL 1 Z SIOOO
17 LZ+lOO RO FMAX M6 1
18 CALL LBL 10 .. ... .... . .. .. .. .. ... ... ... ... .. ... . . . .. ... . Subprogram call
19 L Z+lOO RO FMAX M2 .. .. .. .. ... . . ... .. ... . ... .. ... . Retract tool; return jump to beginning of program

Continued..

7-20 TNC 370

 7 Programming with 0 Parameters
L
7.8 Examples for Exercise

20 LBLIO
21 FNl:Q15=+05++Q4
22 FNO: 021 = + 01 Determine starting and calculation values
23 FNl:Q24=+04++Q108
24 FNO: Q26 = + 06
25 CYCL DEF 7.0 DATUM
26 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+09 Shift datum to center of sphere
27 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+QlO
28 CYCL DEF 7.3 Z-04 :
29 CYCL DEF 10.0 ROTATION Rotation for program start (starting plane angle)
30 CYCL DEF 10.1 ROT + Q6 >
31 cc x+0 Y+O
32 LP PR + Q24 PA + Q6 RO FQI 1 ... .... .. ... .. .... ... ... Pre-positioning before machining
33 LBL 1
34 cc z+o x+01 08
35 L Y+O Z+O FQI 1 . .. .. ... .. ... .. ... ... ... . .. ... .. ... . . .. ... Pre-positioning at beginning of each arc
36 LBL2
37 LP PR+Q4 PA+Q21 RO FQI 1
38 FN2: Q21 = + Q21 - + Q3 Mill the sphere upward until the highest point is reached
39 FNI 1: IF + Q21 GT + 02 GOT0 LBL2 I
40 LP PR+Q4 PA+Q2
41 L Z+Q15 RO FIOOO Mill the highest point and then retract the tool
42 L X+Q24 RO FMAX >
43 FNI : Q26 = + 026 + + 08 ... ... ...__._...___..............Prepare the next rotation increment
44 FNO: Q21 = + 01 . ... ... .. .... . .... ... .... .. ... .. . .. .. ... ... . Reset solid angle for machining to the starting value
45 CYCL DEF 10.0 ROTATION
46 CYCL DEF 10.1 ROT + Q26 Rotate the coordinate system about the Z axis until
plane end angle is reached
47 FN12: IF + Q26 LT + Q7 GOT0 LBLI
48 FN9: IF + 026 EQU + Q7 GOT0 LBLI I

49 CYCL DEF 10.0 ROTATION

50 CYCL DEF 10.1 ROT + 0
51 CYCL DEF 7.0 DATUM Reset rotation and datum shift
52 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+0
53 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+O 1
54 CYCL DEF 7.3 Z+O
55 LBL 0 ... .... ... ... .... .. .... .. .... .. .. ... ... .... ... ... .... .. ... ... .... . End of subprogram
56 END PGM 360712 MM

--

TNC 370 7-21

L
 Cycles

8.1 General Overview of Cycles ................................................................ 8-2

Programming a cycle ................................................................................................. 8-3

8.2 Drilling Cycles ...................................................................................... 8-5

PECKING (Cycle 1) .................................................................................................... 8-6

DRILLING (Cycle 200) ............................................................................................... 8-7
REAMING (Cycle 201) ............................................................................................... 8-8
BORING (Cycle 202) .................................................................................................. 8-9.
UNIVERSAL DRILLING CYCLE (Cycle 203). ............................................................ 8-l 0
TAPPING with a floating tap holder (Cycle 2) .......................................................... 8-l 2
RIGID TAPPING (Cycle 17) ...................................................................................... 8-13
Examples for exercise ............................................................................................. 8-l 4

8.3 Cycles for Milling Pockets, Studs and Slots ................................... 8-16

POCKET MILLING (Cycle 4) .................................................................................... 8-l 7

POCKET FINISHING (Cycle 212) ............................................................................. 8-l 8
STUD FINISHING (Cycle 213). ................................................................................. 8-20
L
CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING (Cycle 5) .................................................................. 8-22
CIRCULAR POCKET FINISHING (Cycle 214). .......................................................... 8-23
CIRCULAR STUD FlNlSHlNG (Cycle 215) ............................................................... 8-25
SLOT MILLING (Cycle 3) ......................................................................................... 8-27
SLOT with reciprocating plunge-cut (Cycle 210) ..................................................... 8-28
CIRCULAR SLOT with reciprocating plunge-cut (Cycle 210). .................................. 8-30
Examples for exercise ............................................................................................. 8-32
.-

8.4 Cycles for Machining Hole Patterns ................................................. 8-34

CIRCULAR PAlTERN (Cycle 220) ........................................................................... 8-35

LINEAR PATERN (Cycle 221) ................................................................................ 8-36
Examples for exercise ............................................................................................. 8-38

8.5 SL Cycles ............................................................................................ 8-40

CONTOUR GEOMETRY (Cycle 14) ......................................................................... 841

ROUGH-OUT (Cycle 6) ............................................................................................ 8-42
SL Cycles: Overlapping contours ............................................................................ 8-44
PILOT DRILLING (Cycle 15) .................................................................................... 8-50
CONTOUR MILLING (Cycle 16) ............................................................................. 8-51

8.6 Cycles for Multipass Milling ............................................................. 8-54

MULTIPASS MILLING (Cycle 230) .......................................................................... 8-55

RULED SURFACE (Cycle 231) ................................................................................. 8-57
Examples for exercise ............................................................................................. 8-59

8.7 Cycles for Coordinate Transformations .......................................... 8-60

DATUM SHIFT (Cycle 7). ......................................................................................... 8-61

MIRROR IMAGE (Cycle 8) ....................................................................................... 8-63
ROTATION (Cycle 10). ............................................................................................. 8-65
SCALING FACTOR (Cycle 11) ................................................................................. 8-66

8.8 Special Cycles .................................................................................... 8-68

DWELL TIME (Cycle 9) ............................................................................................ 8-68

PROGRAM CALL (Cycle 12) .................................................................................... 8-68
ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP (Cycle 13) .................................................................... 8-69
8 Cycles
4

8.1 General Overview of Cycles

Frequently recurring machining sequences that comprise several steps are
stored in the TNC as cycles. Coordinate transformations and other special
functions are also available as cycles.

The cycles are divided into several groups:

Cycles for pecking, reaming, boring and

tapping (Section 8.2)

Cycles for milling pockets, studs and slots

(Section 8.3)

Cycles for generating hole patterns, such as circular

or linear patterns (Section 8.4)

Cycles for multipass milling flat or twisted surfaces

(Section 8.5)

SL (Subcontour List) cycles, which allow machining

of relatively complex contours composed of several
overlapping subcontours (Section 8.6)
Coordinate transformation cycles which enable datum --.

shift, rotation, mirror image, enlarging and reducing TRANSF. 1

for various contours (Section 8.7)
Special cycles such as dwell time, program call and d

oriented spindle stop (Section 8.8)

Fixed cycles from cycle 200 on use Q parameters as transfer parameters.

Parameters that are required in several cycles always have the same
number. For instance, Q200 is always assigned the setup clearance, Q202
the pecking depth, etc. When a new cycle is defined the TNC offers the
last programmed values as the default value.

8-2 TNC 370

 8 Cycles
L
8.1 General Overview of Cycles

Programming a cycle
PROGRRMMING RND EDITING C?FIG
-_ To define a cycle
l Press the CYCL DEF soft key.
) Select the desired group of cycles with the
corresponding soft key.
) Select the desired cycle with the corresponding
soft key.
l Program the input values required for the
selected cycle in the dialog. The TNC at the
same time displays a graphics in the right screen
window, in which the parameter to be entered is
highlighted. Enter the requested parameter and
confirm with ENT.
l The TNC terminates the dialog automatically as
soon as you have entered the necessary data.

Fig. 8.1: TNC graphics show the input parameters for cycle definition
Resulting NC block: CYCL DEF 1.0 PECKING
CYCL DEF 1.1 SET UP 2
CYCL DEF 1.2 DEPTH -30
CYCL DEF 1.3 PECKG 5
CYCL DEF 1.4 DWELL 1
CYCL DEF 1.5 F 150

.- Ii!!! If you wish to use graphic support, you must first set the TMC screen to TEXT + FfGURE tsaes page I-41.

--

L-

.-

TNC 370 8-3

8 Cycles
8.1 General Overview of Cycles

Cycle call

The following data must be programmed before a cycle calt:

* BLK FQRM for graphic disptay
* Tooi calf
l Direction of rota&n of the spindffl (misceilansous functions M3/M4f
* Cycta definltkm K?KL DEF).

The following cycles become effective immediately upon being defined in

the part program. These cycles must not (and cannot) be called:
l The cycles for circular and linear hole patterns
l The SL cycle CONTOUR GEOMETRY
l Coordinate transformation cycles
l The DWELL TIME cycle.

All other cycles must be called separately.

If the cycle is to be executed once after the last programmed block,

program the cycle call
l with CYCL CALL

Cycle call with miscellaneous function M3

l or with the miscellaneous function M99.

If the cycle is to be run automatically after every positioning block, pro-

gram the cycle call with M89 (depending on machine parameter 7440).

M89 is cancelled by programming

l M99, or
l CYCL CALL, or
l CYCL DEF.

8-4 TNC 370

 8 Cycles
L

8.2 Drilling Cycles

The TNC offers 7 cycles for all types of drilling operations:

Cyde
1 PECKING
Without automatic pre-positioning

200 DRILLING
With automatic pre-positioning and 2nd setup
clearance
201 REAMING
With automatic pre-positioning and 2nd setup
.- clearance
202 BORING
With automatic pre-positioning and 2nd setup
clearance
203 UNIVERSAL DRILLING CYCLE
With automatic pre-positioning, 2nd setup clearance,
chip breaking, and decrement
2 TAPPING with a floating tap holder

17 RIGID TAPPING

TNC 370 8-5

 Process:
l From the current position, the tool drills at the
entered feed rate to the first pecking depth.
l The tool is then retracted at rapid traverse
(FMAX) and advances again to the first pecking
depth, minus the advanced stop distance t. The
advanced stop distance is calculated automati-
cally by the control:
- Total hole depth up to 30 mm: t = 0.6 mm
- Total hole depth over 30 mm:
t = Total hole depth/50
Maximum advanced stop distance: 7 mm
l The tool advances with another infeed at the
programmed feed rate.
l These steps are repeated until the programmed
total hole depth is reached.
l After a dwell time at the bottom of the hole, the
tool is retracted to the starting position at FMAX
for cutting free.

Fig. 8.2: PECKING cycle

input data
l SET-UP CLEARANCE (incremental value):
Distance between tool tip (starting position) and workpiece surface.
l TOTAL HOLE DEPTH (incremental value):
Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole (tip of drill
taper).
l PECKING DEPTH (incremental value):
lnfeed per cut. The TNC moves in one operation to the TOTAL HOLE
DEPTH if:
- PECKING DEPTH and TOTAL HOLE DEPTH are identical
- the PECKING DEPTH is greater than the TOTAL HOLE DEPTH.
The TOTAL HOLE DEPTH does not have to be a multiple of the PECK-
ING DEPTH.
l DWELL TIME IN SECONDS:
Length of time the tool remains at the total hole depth for cutting free.
. FEEDRATEF:
Traversing speed of the tool during drilling.

8-6 TNC 370

 8 Cycles
L-
8.2 Drilling Cycles

DRILLING (Cycle 200)

* Programa po&ioning block far the starting point @mle

center)in the w&&g planewith radiuI; compensation IW.
* The algetsraicsign fer cycle panmeter UPIll defines the working dirwtion.
* Cycle 200 is an abbrevi&ed version of the universal drilling Cycle 203 (sea pge 8-I 0). Internally, however, the
full range af functions of Cycle 203 is available, The corresponding paratieters can-if rsquir&- be wfoaded
after cycle definMm. FOFthis. usethe Q parameter function FNQ:ASSIGN.,
L-

Process:
.- l The TNC positions the tool in the 2 axis at rapid
traverse to the programmed setup clearance
above the workpiece surface.
l The tool drills at the programmed feed rate to
the first pecking depth.
l The TNC moves the tool at rapid traverse FMAX
back to the setup clearance, dwells there-if
this has been specified-and then moves, again
at rapid traverse, to 0.2 mm above the first
pecking depth.
l The tool subsequently drills at the programmed
feed rate by a further pecking depth.
l The TNC repeats this sequence until the pro-
grammed total hole depth is reached.
l From the bottom of the hole, the tool moves at
FMAX to the setup clearance or-if this has
been specified-to the second setup clearance. Fig. 8.3: DRILLING cycle

fnput data
l SET-UP CLEARANCE Q200 (incremental value):
Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface. Enter a positive
value.
l DEPTH Q201 (incremental value):
Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole (tip of the drill
taper).
l FEED RATE FOR PECKING 0206:
Traversing speed of the tool when drilling in mm/min.
l PECKING DEPTH 0202 (incremental value):
lnfeed per cut. The TNC moves in one operation to the DEPTH if:
- PECKING DEPTH and DEPTH are identical
- the PECKING DEPTH is greater than the DEPTH.
- PECKING DEPTH = 0
Enter a positive value.
l DWELL TIME AT TOP Q210:
Time in seconds which the tool spends at setup clearance, after the
TNC has withdrawn it from the hole for chip breaking.
l WORKPIECE SURFACE COORDINATE 0203 (absolute value):
Coordinate of the workpiece surface.
l 2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE 0204 (incremental value):
Z coordinate at which no collision between tool and workpiece (clamp-
ing devices) can occur. Enter a positive value.

TNC 370 8-7

L
8 Cycles
8.2 Drilling Cycles

REAMING (Cycle 201)

IWW: J
6 * Pmgrama positioningblock fof the starting paint [h&e center)inthe woting pbne 4th radiusctwnpensation
RO.
* The algebraicsign far cycle parameterl3EPTl-ldefines the working direction,

Process
l The TNC positions the tool in the Z axis at rapid traverse to the pro-
grammed setup clearance above the workpiece surface.
l The tool reams at the programmed reaming feed rate to the pro-
grammed depth.
l The tool dwells at the bottom of the hole, if this has been specified.
l The TNC subsequently moves the tool at the feed rate back to the
setup clearance and from there-if this has been specified-at FMAX
to the second setup clearance.

Input data
l SET-UP CLEARANCE Q200 (incremental value):
Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface. Enter a positive
value.
. DEPTH Q201 (incremental value):
Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole. Enter a
negative value.
l FEED RATE FOR PECKING 0206:
Traversing speed of the tool when reaming in mm/min.
l DWELL TIME AT DEPTH Q211:
Time in seconds which the tool spends at the bottom of the hole.
l RETRACTION FEED RATE 0208:
Traversing speed of the tool when withdrawing from the hole in mm/
min. If Q208=0 entered, then withdraw at REAMING FEED RATE.
L-
l WORKPIECE SURFACE COORDINATE Q203 (absolute value):
Fig. 8.4: Input parameters, HbAMING cycle
Coordinate of the workpiece surface.
l 2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE 0204 (incremental value):
Z coordinate at which no collision between tool and workpiece (clamp-
ing devices) can occur. Enter a positive value.
 8 Cycles
L..-
8.2 Drilling Cycles

.-
BORING (Cycle 202)

Machine and corttrot must be speciatly prepareziby the machinetaol builderto snnble Cycte 202.

Note:
l Programa pasitioningblock for the starting pa& {holecant&r)inthe WA&‘@p&3 with r&ius compensationRO.
* The algeb& sign for cy&i:leparameter DEPTHdeffinesthe warking dirstion:

Process
l The TNC positions the tool in the Z axis at rapid traverse to the pro-
grammed setup clearance above the workpiece surface.
l The tool drills at the programmed drilling feed rate to the programmed
depth.
l The tool dwells at the bottom of the hole-if this has been specified-
to allow the spindle to free run.
l The TNC subsequently stops the tool with Ml 9 at the 0” position
l If retraction is selected, the TNC retracts in the programmed direction
by 0.2 mm (fixed value).
l The TNC subsequently moves the tool at the retraction feed rate to the
setup clearance and from there-if this has been specified-at FM/W
to the 2nd setup clearance.

Input data
l SET-UP CLEARANCE Q200 (incremental value):
Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface. Enter a positive
L value.
l DEPTH Q201 (incremental value):
Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole. Enter a
negative value.
. FEED RATE FOR PECKING Q206:
Traversing speed of the tool boring in mm/min.
l DWELL TEVE AT DEPTH Q211:
Time in seconds which the tool spends at the bottom of the hole.
l RETRACTION FEED RATE 0208:
‘Y Traversing speed of the tool when withdrawing from the hole in mm/
min. If Q208=0 entered, then withdraw at BORING FEED RATE.
l WORKPIECE SURFACE COORDINATE 0203 (absolute value):
Coordinate of the workpiece surface. Fig. 8.5: Input parameters, BORING cycle
l 2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE Q204 (incremental value):
2 coordinate at which no collision between tool and workpiece (clamp-
ing devices) can occur. Enter a positive value.
l DISENGAGING DIRECTN (O/l/2/3/4) Q2 14:
Specify the direction in which the TNC retracts the tool at the bottom of
the hole (in accordance with spindle orientation).

Attanthtl Danger cyfcolliafon.

L Check the position of the ttrof tip if programming a spindle ori@%ation to O” (for example, in operatingmc4e PDSI-
TIONINE WtTH MANUAL DATA INPUT). Align the toot rip so that it is paraltel to a coordinate axis. Select the retrac-
tion direction so that the toot LOVESaway from the edge of th# hole.

0: Do not retract tool

1: Retract tool in negative main axis direction
2: Retract tool in negative secondary axis direction
3: Retract tool in positive main axis direction
4: Retract tool in positive secondary axis direction

TNC 370 8-9

 8 Cycles
8.2 Drilling Cycles

UNIVERSAL DRILLING CYCLE (Cycle 203)

NW?:

l Program a positioning block for the starting point thole center) in the working plane with radius compensation RO.
* The algebtraic sign for cycle parametw DEPTH defines the working dire&an.

Process:
l The TNC positions the tool in the Z axis at rapid
traverse to the programmed setup clearance
above the workpiece surface.
l The tool drills at the programmed feed rate to
the first pecking depth.
l If chip breaking is specified, the TNC moves the
tool back by 0.2 mm. If you are working without
chip breaking, the TNC moves the tool at the
retraction feed rate back to the setup clearance,
dwells there-if this has been specified-and
then moves, again at rapid traverse, to 0.2 mm
above the first pecking depth.
l The tool subsequently drills at the programmed
feed rate by a further pecking depth.
l The TNC repeats this sequence until the pro-
grammed total hole depth is reached. Fig. 8.6: Cycle sequence: UNIVERSAL DRILLING CYCLE
l The tool dwells at the bottom of the hole-if
this has been specified-to free run and is
withdrawn at the retraction feed rate to the
setup clearance after the dwell time. If a second
setup clearance has been programmed, the TNC
moves the tool there at FMAX.

8-l 0 TNC 370

 8 Cycles
L
8.2 Drilling Cycles

Input data
. SET-UP CLEARANCE Q200 (incremental value):
Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface. Enter a positive
value.
. DEPTH 0201 (incremental value):
Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole (tip of the drill
taper). Enter a negative value.
. FEED RATE FOR PECKING Q206:
L Traversing speed of the tool when drilling in mm/min.
. PECKING DEPTH 0202 (incremental value):
lnfeed per cut. The TNC moves in one operation to the DEPTH if:
- PECKING DEPTH and DEPTH are identical
- the PECKING DEPTH is greater than the DEPTH.
- PECKING DEPTH = 0
Enter a positive value.
. DWELL TIME AT TOP Q2 10:
Time in seconds which the tool spends at setup clearance, after the
TNC has withdrawn it from the hole for chip breaking.
. WORKPIECE SURFACE COORDINATE Q203 (absolute value):
Coordinate of the workpiece surface.
. 2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE Q204 (incremental value):
Z coordinate at which no collision between tool and workpiece (clamp-
ing devices) can occur. Enter a positive value.
. DECREMENT 0212 (incremental value):
i Value by which the TNC decreases the pecking depth after each
pecking depth. Enter a positive value for DECREMENT.
. NR OF BREAKS UNTIL RETRACTION Q2 13:
Number of chip breaks after which the TNC should withdraw the tool
from the hole for chip release.
. MINIMUM PECKING DEPTH Q205 (incremental value):
If you have programmed a decrement, the TNC limits the PECKING
DEPTH to the value entered with 0205. Enter a positive value.
. DWELL TIME AT DEPTH Q2 11:
L
Time in seconds which the tool spends at the bottom of the hole.
. RETRACTION FEED RATE Q208:
Traversing speed of the tool when withdrawing from the hole in mm/
min. If Q208=0 entered, then withdraw at FMAX.

TNC 370 8-11

 8 Cycles
d
8.2 Drilling Cycles

TAPPING with a floating tap holder (Cycle 2)

NOW
l Programa positioningblock far the starting point fhotecenteit inthevv&&g planewith radiuscomprx&ion RO.
* Programa positioningblock far the @tattingpaint in the tool axis {setup clearanceabdvfsthe ~&piece surffacet.
* The algebraicsignfor cycis parameterTAPPING DEPTHdefines the working dire&xx
* A floating tap hoi&r is required far tapping. The ffoitting tap holder compensatesths tototerances
for feed rate
and spindlespeed duringthe tapping process.
+ When a ~yclg is being run, the spin& swed override control is d&bled. The feed rats override contra1is only
active within a fimited range (preset by tha machinet#ol buitd&+
* for tapping right-handthreads activate the spindfev&h MS: for left-hancithreads use M4.

Process
l The thread is cut in one pass. 1.
l When the tool reaches the total hole depth, the
direction of spindle rotation is reversed. After the
programmed dwell time the tool is retracted to
the starting position.
l At the starting position, the direction of rotation
is reversed once again.

Input data
1
Fig. 8.7: TAPPING cycle
l SET-UP CLEARANCE @ (incremental value):
Distance between tool tip (starting position) and workpiece surface.
Standard value: 4x thread pitch.
l TOTAL HOLE DEPTH @ (thread length, incremental value):
Distance between workpiece surface and end of thread
l DWELL TIMI3 IN SECONDS:
Enter a dwell time between 0 and 0.5 seconds to prevent wedging of
the tool when retracted.
l FEEDRATEF:
Traversing speed of the tool during tapping.
The feed rate is calculated as follows: 4
F = S-p
F: Feed rate (mm/min)
s: Spindle speed (rpm) 4
P: Pitch (mm)

8-12 TNC 370 -

 8 Cycles
L
8.2 Drilling Cycles

RIGID TAPPING (Cycle 17)

Machine and conrral mw be sps~ialty prepared hy the machine wol builder to snabfe rigid tapping.

Note;
. Prqpm a positioningblock far the starting paint [Me center)in the ~3rking planewith radiuscompensationRO.
* ProgramBpositioningblack for the starting paint in the tobl axis lsetup clearanceztbom the workpiece surfacef+
* The algebraic-signfor ~+~y~le
paramsterTOTAL HQLE DEPTHdefines the working difemion.
* The control cafcutatasthe feed rate from ttte spindle speedand thread pitch. If the splndfespe@doverride is
used during tapping,the feed fate is automaticatty adjusted.
* The feed rate override knob is disabled. *

Process
The thread is cut without a floating tap holder in one or more passes.
Rigid tapping offers the following advantages over tapping with a floating
tap holder:
l Higher machining speeds possible
l Repeated tapping of the same thread; repetitions are enabled via
-.- spindle orientation to the 0” position during cycle call (depending on
machine parameter settings)
l Increased traverse range of the spindle axis due to absence of a
floating tap holder
L-

Input data
l SET-UP CLEARANCE @ (incremental value):
Distance between tool tip (starting position) and workpiece surface.
l TOTAL HOLE DEPTH @) (incremental value):
Distance between workpiece surface (beginning of thread) and end of
thread.
l PITCH 0:
The sign differentiates between right-hand and left-hand threads:
+ = right-hand thread
- = left-hand thread

Fig. 8.8: Input data for RIGID TAPPING

cycle

TNC 370 8-13

8 Cycles
8.2 Drilling Cycles

Examples for exercise

UNIVERSAL DRILLING CYCLE

Coordinates of the holes:

@ X = 20 mm Y = 30 mm, depth30mm

@ X = 80 mm Y = 50mm, depth20mm
Hole diameter: 6 mm

Input values:
Setup clearance: +2 mm (Q200)
Total hole depth: -3O/-20 mm (Q201)
Drilling feed rate: 80 mm/min (Q206)
Pecking depth: +4 mm (Q202)
Dwell time at top: 0 s (Q210)
Workpiece surface: +0 mm (0203)
2nd setup clearance: +50 mm (Q204)
Decrement: +0.5 mm (Q212)
Number of chip breaks: 312 (Q213)
Minimum pecking depth: +2 mm (Q205)
Dwell time at depth: 0.5 s (0211)
Retraction feed rate: 1000 mm/min (0208)

0 BEGIN PGM 3702732 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-40
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+1 00 Y+lOO Z+O
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+3
4 TOOL CALL 1 Z S3500
5 L Z+200 RO F MAX M3 .. .... ... ... .. .... .. .... .. ...._....._._...Retract tool, spindle ON

6 CYCL DEF 203 UNIVERSL DRILLING

Q200=2
Q20 I=-30
Q206=80
Q202=4
Q210=0
Q203=+0
Q204=50 ... .. ... .... ... .... ... ... .. .... .. ... ... .... .. ... ... .... ... .. Jump over the obstacle between the holes
Q212=0.5
Q213=3
Q205=2
Q211=0.5
Q208=1000 _..................___...__........................____.Define cycle

7 L X+20 Y+30 RO F MAX M99 . .. ... ... . .... .. ... .. ... ... Traverse to first hole, call cycle

8 FN 0: 0201 = -20 .... .. .. .. ... ... .... .. ... ... .. .... ... ... .. .... .... . Change depth for the second hole with parameter function FNO
9 FN 0: 0213 = +2 .. . . . .. ... .. . .. . ... ... . .... ... .. . . .. ... Change the number of chip breaks for the second hole

10 L X+80 Y+50 RO F MAX M99 Traverse to second hole, call cycle, changed parameters
come into effect
1 1 L Z+200 RO F MAX M2 _._..__................................. Retract tool
12 END PGM 3702732 MM

8-l 4 TNC 370 -

 8 Cycles
\-
8.2 Drilling Cycles

TAPPING with a floating tap holder

Cutting an M6 thread at 100 rpm

Coordinates of the hole:

X = 50mm Y = 20mm
Pitch P = 1 mm

L
F = Sop F = lOO* 1 = 100 mm/min

Setup clearance: 3 mm
Thread depth: 20 mm
Dwell time: 0.4 s
Feed rate: 100 mm/min

BEGIN PGM 360088 MM

BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-20
BLK FORM 0.2 X+1 00 Y+lOO Z+O
TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+3
TOOL CALL 1 Z SIOOO
L Z+lOO RO FMAX M6 ... .. .... .. ... . . . . . . .... ... .. .. . Approach tool change position

6 CYCL DEF 2.0 TAPPING

7 CYCL DEF 2.1 SET UP 3 ... .. .... . ... .. .... .. .... . . ... .. Setup clearance
8 CYCL DEF 2.2 DEPTH -20 .. ... .. .. .. . ... .... ... ... ... . . Thread depth
9 CYCL DEF 2.3 DWELL 0.4 .. ... .. .. . . .. .... ... ... ... . Dwell time
10 CYCL DEF 2.4 F 100 .. ... ... .. ... .. .. .... .. .... .. ... . . . . Feed rate

11 L X+50 Y+20 FMAX M3 .... . .... .. .. .. .... ... ... ... . . .. Approach center of hole, spindle on clockwise
12 L Z+3 FMAX M99 .. ... .. ... . .. .. .. .. ... ... ... ... . . .. Move to setup clearance above workpiece surface, cycle call
13 L Z+lOO FMAX M2
14 END PGM 360088 MM

TNC 370 8-15

8 Cycles

8.3 Cycles for Milling Pockets, Studs and Slots

Die TNC offers 9 cycles for milling pockets, studs and slots:

4 POCKET MILLING (rectangular)

Roughing cycle, without automatic pre-positioning

212 POCKET FINISHING (rectangular)

Finishing cycle, with automatic pre-positioning and
2nd setup clearance
213 STUD FINISHING (rectangular)
Finishing cycle, with automatic pre-positioning and
2nd setup clearance
5 CIRCULAR POCKET
Roughing cycle, without automatic pre-positioning

214 CIRCULAR POCKET FINISHING

cle, with automatic pre-positioning and -

215 CIRCULAR STUD FINISHING

Finishing cycle, with automatic pre-positioning and
2nd setup clearance
3 SLOT MILLING
Roughing/Finishing cycle, without automatic
pre-positioning, vertical downfeed
210 SLOT WITH RECIPROCATING PLUNGE-CUT
Roughing/Finishing cycle, with automatic
pre-positioning and reciprocating plunge-cut
211 CIRCULAR SLOT
Roughing/Finishing cycle, with automatic
pre-positioning and reciprocating plunge-cut

8-16 TNC 370 -

 8 Cycles
L
8.3 Cycles for Milling Pockets, Studs and Slots

POCKET MILLING (Cycle 4)

* Programa pasitiantngblock for rhs mming point (hole cenbd in the war&g plane with radius cwnpenserionRD.
* Progrm a positioningblock for the starting point h the tool axis Qwtup cleewnceabove workpiece surface),
* The algebfaicsignfar cycfe parameter DEPTH de%ws the working direction.
l This cycle requirese center-cut end miff (IS0 I&M j, or a separatepifat drillingoperationat the pocket csnbr.
l The radiusaf the packet c~rnaw is determined by the cutter radius.The toof does nat perform any circular

Process
l The tool penetrates the workpiece at the starting position (pocket
center) and advances to the first infeed depth.
l The tool subsequently follows the programmed path at the specified
feed rate (see Fig. 8.9). The cutter begins milling in the positive axis
direction of the longer side. With square pockets, the cutter begins in
the positive Y direction.
l This process is repeated until the programmed depth is reached.
l At the end of the cycle the tool returns to the starting position.

Fig. 8.9: Tool path for roughing-out

Input data
l SET-UP CLEARANCE @ (incremental value):
Distance between tool tip (starting position) and workpiece surface.
l MILLING DEPTH @: (incremental value):
Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole.
l PECKING DEPTH 0: (incremental value):
lnfeed per cut. The TNC moves in one operation to the DEPTH if:
- PECKING DEPTH and DEPTH are identical
L
- the PECKING DEPTH is greater than the DEPTH.
Enter a positive value.
l FEED RATE FOR PECKING:
Traversing speed of the tool during penetration.
l FIRST SIDE LENGTH @:
Length of the pocket, parallel to the first main axis of the working
plane.
Fig. 8.10: lnfeeds and distances for the
l SECOND SIDE LENGTH @ : POCKET MILLING cycle
Width of the pocket
The signs of the side lengths are always positive
l FEEDRATEF:
Traversing speed of the tool in the working plane
l ROTATION CLOCKWISE: DR- ?:
DR + : Climb milling with M3
DR - : Up-cut milling with M3

Calculations:
Stepover factor k:
k = KxR
K: Overlap factor (defined in MP7430, see page 12-8).)
R: Cutter radius

Fig. 8.11: Side lengths of the pocket

L

TNC 370 8-17

L
8 Cycles 4
8.3 Cycles for Milling Pockets, Studs and Slots

POCKET FINISHING (Cycle 212)

Process
l The TNC moves the tool in the Z axis to the setup clearance, or-if this
has been specified-to the 2nd setup clearance and subsequently to
the center of the pocket.
l From the center of the pocket the tool moves in the working plane to
the starting point for machining. For calculating the starting point, the
TNC takes into account the finishing allowance and the tool radius.
l If the tool is at the 2nd setup clearance, the TNC moves the tool in
rapid traverse to the setup clearance and from there at the positioning
feed rate to the first infeed depth.
l The tool subsequently moves tangentially to the contour of the finished
part and, using climb milling, machines one revolution.
l After this, the tool moves tangentially away from the contour, back to
the starting point in the working plane.

l
l This process is repeated until the programmed

setup clearance or- if this has been specified-to

depth is reached.
At the end of the cycle the TNC moves the tool at rapid traverse to the
the 2nd setup
1
Fig. 8.12: POCKET FINISHING cycle
clearance and subsequently to the center of the pocket (end position =
starting position).

8-l 8 TNC 370 -

 8 Cycles
L
8.3 Cycles for Milling Pockets, Studs and Slots

Input data r
l SET-UP CLEARANCE QZOO (incremental value):
Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface. Enter a positive
value.
l DEPTH Q201 (incremental value):
Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of pocket. Enter a
negative value.
. FEED RATE FOR PLUNGING Q206:
Traversing speed of the tool when moving to depths in mm/min. If
plunge-cutting into the material, enter a low value; if clearing has
already been carried out, enter a higher feed rate.
l PECKING DEPTH Q202 (incremental value):
lnfeed per cut. Enter a value greater than 0.
. FEED RATE FOR MILLING 0207:
Traversing speed of the tool when milling in mm/min.
Fig. 8.13: Input parameters, POCKET
l WORKPIECE SURFACE COORDINATE Q203 (absolute value): FINISHING cycle
Coordinate of the workpiece surface.
l 2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE 0204 (incremental value):
Z coordinate at which no collision between tool and workpiece
(clamping devices) can occur. Enter a positive value.
L l CENTER IN 1ST AXIS Q216 (absolute value):
Center of the pocket in the main axis of the working plane.
l CENTER IN 2ND AXIS Q217 (absolute value):
Center of the pocket in the secondary axis of the working plane.
l FIRST SIDE LENGTH 0218 (incremental value):
Length of the pocket, parallel to the main axis of the working plane.
L l SECOND SIDE LENGTH Q219 (incremental value):
Length of the pocket, parallel to the secondary axis of the working
plane.
l CORNER RADIUS 0220:
Radius of the pocket corner.
l ALLOWANCE JB 1ST AXIS 0221 (incremental value):
Finishing allowance in X, referenced to the length of the pocket. Fig. 8.14: Input parameters, POCKET
FINISHING cycle
Enter a positive value.

TNC 370 8-19

8 Cycles 4
8.3 Cycles for Milling Pockets, Studs and Slots

STUD FINISHING (Cycle 213)

Note: ,,,

* The algebraic sign for cycfs parameter DEPTH defines the working direction.
* if 2 is rxmssary to mitt a stud fmm scrlid,use a centerGut end milt ttSQ 1MT) and antef 1 low positioningfeed
r&e. ,,

Process r
Y
l The TNC moves the tool in the Z axis to the setup clearance, or - if t
this has been specified - to the 2nd setup clearance and subsequently
to the center of the stud.
l From the center of the stud the tool moves in the working plane to the
starting point for machining. For calculating the starting point, the TNC
takes into account the finishing allowance and the tool radius.
l If the tool is at the 2nd setup clearance, the TNC moves the tool in
rapid traverse to the setup clearance and from there at the positioning
feed rate to the first infeed depth.
l The tool subsequently moves tangentially to the contour of the finished
part and, using climb milling, machines one revolution.
l After this, the tool moves tangentially away from the contour, back to
the starting point in the working plane.
l This process is repeated until the programmed depth is reached.
l At the end of the cycle the TNC moves the tool at rapid traverse to the L
setup clearance or - if this has been specified -to the 2nd setup
Fig. 8.15: STUD FINISHING cycle
clearance and subsequently to the center of the stud (end position =
starting position).

8-20 TNC 370

 8 Cycles
L
8.3 Cycles for Milling Pockets, Studs and Slots

Input data
l SET-UP CLEARANCE 0200 (incremental value):
Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface. Enter a positive
value.
l DEPTH Q201 (incremental value):
Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of stud. Enter a
negative value.
l FEED RATE FOR PIUNGING 0206:
Traversing speed of the tool when moving to depths in mm/min. If
plunge-cutting into the material, enter a low value; if clearing has
already been carried out, enter a higher feed rate.
l PECKING DEPTH 0202 (incremental value):
lnfeed per cut. Enter a value greater than 0.
l FEED RATE FOR MILLING Q207:
Traversing speed of the tool when milling in mm/min.
l WORKPIECE SURFACE COORDINATE Q203 (absolute value): Fig. 8.16: Input parameters, STUD FINISH-
ING cycle
Coordinate of the workpiece surface.
l 2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE 0204 (incremental value):
Z coordinate at which no collision between tool and workpiece (clamp-
ing devices) can occur. Enter a positive value.
L l CENTER IN 1ST AXIS 0216 (absolute value):
Center of the stud in the main axis of the working plane.
l CENTER IN 2ND AXIS 0217 (absolute value):
Center of the stud in the secondary axis of the working plane.
l FIRST SIDE LENGTH Q218 (incremental value):
Length of the stud, parallel to the main axis of the working plane.
l SECOND SIDE LENGTH Q219 (incremental value):
Length of the stud, parallel to the secondary axis of the working plane.
l CORNER RADIUS Q220:
Radius of the stud corner.
l ALLOWANCE IN 1ST AXIS Q221 (incremental value):
Finishing allowance in the main axis of the working plane, referenced to
the length of the stud. Enter a positive value. Fig. 8.17: Input parameters, STUD FINISH-
ING cycle

TNC 370 8-21

L
8 Cycles
4
8.3 Cycles for Milling Pockets, Studs and Slots

CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING (Cycle 5)

4
Mote:
!& * Program a positioning block for the starting point (hate center) in the worl&g ptnne with radius compensation RO.
* Programa positioningblock far the stming pOint in the Wtoolaxis fsetup clfearanceabove vvofkpkm? surface].
* The algsbraicsignfor c-y&4parsmeterDEFTHdefinas the warking directian.
* This cycle requiresa centm-cut end mill {CXl 16411,or a sepmtfs pitot drillingopera&maf:the pock& centm,

Process
l The tool penetrates the workpiece at the starting position (pocket
center) and advances to the first infeed depth.
l The tool subsequently follows a spiral path at the specified feed rate
(see Fig. 8.18). The stepover factor is determined by the value of k (see
Cycle 4 PECKING).
l This process is repeated until the programmed depth is reached.
l At the end of the cycle the tool returns to the starting position.

I
Fig. 8.18: Cutter path for roughing-out
Input data
l SET-UP CLEARANCE @ (incremental value):
Distance between tool tip (starting position) and workpiece surface
l MILLING DEPTH @I: (incremental value):
Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole.
l PECKING DEPTH 0: (incremental value):
lnfeed per cut. The TNC moves in one operation to the DEPTH if:
- PECKING DEPTH and DEPTH are identical
- the PECKING DEPTH is greater than the DEPTH.
Enter a positive value.
l FEED RATE FOR PECKING:
Traversing speed of the tool during penetration.
l CIRCLE RADIUS @:
Radius of the circular pocket.
l FEED RATE F: I
Traversing speed of the tool in the working plane. Fig. 8.19: Distances and infeeds with
CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING
l ROTATION CLOCKWISE: DR- ?
DR + : Climb milling with M3
DR - : Up-cut milling with M3

Fig. 8.20: Direction of the cutter path

 8 Cycles
L
8.3 Cycles for Milling Pockets, Studs and Slots

CIRCULAR POCKET FINISHING (Cycle 214)

l The algebraic sign for cycles parameter DEPTH defines the working direction.
* tf it is necessary to finish the pachet from solid, use3 8. center-cut end mill W3 1641 f ark-4 eZtter a low positioning
feed rate.

Process
l The TNC moves the tool in the Z axis to the setup clearance, or-if this
has been specified-to the 2nd setup clearance and subsequently to
the center of the pocket.
l From the center of the pocket the tool moves in the working plane to
the starting point for machining. For calculating the starting point, the
TNC takes into account the diameter of the finished part and the tool
radius.
l If the tool is at the 2nd setup clearance, the TNC moves the tool in
rapid traverse to the setup clearance and from there at the positioning
feed rate to the first infeed depth.
l The tool subsequently moves tangentiatly to the contour of the finished
part and, using climb milling, machines one revolution.
l After this, the toot moves tangentially away from the contour, back to
L
the starting point in the working plane.
l This process is repeated until the programmed depth is reached.
l At the end of the cycle the TNC moves the tool at rapid traverse to the Fig. 8.21: CIRCULAR POCKET FINISHING
setup clearance or-if this has been specified-to the 2nd setup cycle
clearance and subsequently to the center of the pocket (end position =
starting position).

\
TNC 370 8-23

L
8 Cycles 4
8.3 Cycles for Milling Pockets, Studs and Slots

Input data
l SET-UP CLEARANCE Q200 (incremental value):
Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface. Enter a positive
value.
l DEPTH 0201 (incremental value):
Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of pocket. Enter a
negative value.
l FEED RATE FOR PLUNGING 0206:
Traversing speed of the tool when moving to depths in mm/min. If
plunge-cutting into the material, enter a low value; if clearing has
already been carried out, enter a higher feed rate.
l PECKING DEPTH Q202 (incremental value):
lnfeed per cut. Enter a value greater than 0.
l FEED RATE FOR MILLING Q207:
Traversing speed of the tool when milling in mm/min.
Fig. 8.22: Input parameters, CIRCULAR
l WORKPIECE SURFACE COORDINATE Q203 (absolute value): POCKET FINISHING cycle
Coordinate of the workpiece surface.
l 2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE 0204 (incremental value):
Z coordinate at which no collision between tool and workpiece (clamp-
ing devices) can occur. Enter a positive value.
l CENTER IN 1ST AXIS Q216 (absolute value):
Center of the pocket in the main axis of the working plane.
l CENTER IN 2ND AXIS Q217 (absolute value):
Center of the pocket in the secondary axis of the working plane.
l WORKPIECE BLANK DIAMETER 0222:
Diameter of the premachined pocket. Enter the workpiece blank
diameter to be less than the diameter of the finished part.
l FINISHEDPART DIAMETER Q223:
Diameter of the finished pocket. Enter the diameter of the finished part
to be greater than the workpiece blank diameter.

Fig. 8.23: Input parameters, CIRCULAR

POCKET FINISHING cycle

8-24 TNC 370

 8 Cycles
i.
8.3 Cycles for Milling Pockets, Studs and Slots

CIRCULAR STUD FINISHING (Cycle 215)

l The aiqebraicsign $w cycle parameter DEPTHdefines the working direction.

l If it is necessary to rnifl a stud from s&id, use a center-cut end mill (IS0 1 B4lf and enter a low positioning feed
ws~.

Process
l The TNC moves the tool in the Z axis to the setup clearance, or-if this
has been specified-to the 2nd setup clearance and subsequently to
the center of the stud.
l From the center of the stud the tool moves in the working plane to the
starting point for machining. For calculating the starting point, the TNC
takes into account the diameter of the finished part and the tool radius.
l If the tool is at the 2nd setup clearance, the TNC moves the tool in
rapid traverse to the setup clearance and from there at the positioning
feed rate to the first infeed depth.
l The tool subsequently moves tangentially to the contour of the finished
part and, using climb milling, machines one revolution.
l After this, the tool moves tangentially away from the contour, back to
the starting point in the working plane.
l This process is repeated until the programmed depth is reached.
l At the end of the cycle the TNC moves the tool at rapid traverse to the
setup clearance or-if this has been specified-to the 2nd setup Fig. 8.24: CIRCULAR STUD FINISHING cycle
clearance and subsequently to the center of the stud (end position =
starting position).

TNC 370 8-25

L
8 Cycles 4
8.3 Cycles for Milling Pockets, Studs and Slots

Input data
l SET-UP CLEARANCE Q200 (incremental value):
Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface. Enter a positive
value.
l DEPTH Q201 (incremental value):
Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of stud. Enter a
negative value.
l FEED RATE FOR PLUNGING Q206:
Traversing speed of the tool when moving to depths in mm/min. If
plunge-cutting into the material, enter a low value; if clearing has
already been carried out, enter a higher feed rate.
l PECKING DEPTH Q202 (incremental value):
lnfeed per cut. Enter a value greater than 0.
l FEED RATE FOR MILLING Q207:
Traversing speed of the tool when milling in mm/min.
Fig. 8.25: Input parameters, CIRCULAR
l WORKPIECE SURFACE COORDINATE Q203 (absolute value): STUD FINISHING cycle
Coordinate of the workpiece surface.
l 2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE 0204 (incremental value):
Z coordinate at which no collision between tool and workpiece (clamp-
ing devices) can occur. Enter a positive value.
l CENTER IN 1ST AXIS Q216 (absolute value):
Center of the stud in the main axis of the working plane.
l CENTER IN 2ND AXIS Q217 (absolute value):
Center of the stud in the secondary axis of the working plane.
l WORKPIECE BLANK DIAMETER Q222:
Diameter of the premachined stud. Enter the workpiece blank diameter
to be greater than the diameter of the finished part.
l FINISHED PART DIAMETER Q223:
Diameter of the finished stud. Enter the diameter of the finished part to
be less than the workpiece blank diameter.

Fig. 8.26: Input parameters, CIRCULAR

STUD FINISHING cycle

-
8-26 TNC 370
 8 Cycles

8.3 Cycles for Milling Pockets, Studs and Slots

SLOT MILLING (Cycle 3)

Process
Roughing process:
l The tool penetrates the workpiece from the
starting position and mills in the longitudinal
direction of the slot.
l After downfeed at the end of the slot, milling is
performed in the opposite direction.
These steps are repeated until the programmed
milling depth is reached.

L Finishing process:
l The control advances the tool in a quarter circle
at the bottom of the slot by the remaining
finishing cut. The tool subsequently climb mills
the contour (with M3).
l At the end of the cycle, the tool is retracted at
Fig. 8.27: SLOT MILLING cycle
rapid traverse to the setup clearance.
If the number of infeeds was odd, the tool
returns to the starting position at the level of the
setup clearance.

Input data
l SET-UP CLEARANCE @ (incremental value):
Distance between tool tip (starting position) and workpiece surface.
l MILLING DEPTH @I: (incremental value):
L
Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole.
l PECKING DEPTH 0: (incremental value):
lnfeed per cut. The TNC moves in one operation to the DEPTH if:
- PECKING DEPTH and DEPTH are identical
- the PECKING DEPTH is greater than the DEPTH.
Enter a positive value.
l FEED RATE FOR PECKING:
Fig. 8.28: lnfeeds and distances for the
Traversing speed of the tool during penetration. SLOT MILLING cycle
l FIRST SIDE LENGTH @l :
Length of the slot, parallel to the first main axis of the working plane.
l SECOND SIDE LENGTH @:
Width of the slot.
l FEED RATE F:
Traversing speed of the tool in the working plane.

Fig. 8.29: Side lengths of the slot

TNC 370 8-27

8 Cycles
4
8.3 Cycles for Milling Pockets, Studs and Slots

4
SLOT WITH RECIPROCATING PLUNGE-CUT (Cycle 210)
4
Note:
l The algebraicsign far cycle paramerterDEPTHd&ines the working direction,
l The milting cut&x diameter must not be gfeatef than d+m sfot width and mt lessthan a third of the slot width, i
* The niling cukm diameter shoufd be lessthm hatf the stat tength. Ths TNC &wwise cannut zwcu~e this
cycle.

Process
Roughing process: Fl
l The TNC positions the tool in the Z axis to the
second setup clearance and subsequently in the
center of the left circle. From there, the TNC
positions the tool to the programmed setup
clearance above the workpiece surface.
l The tool moves at the roughing feed rate to the
workpiece surface. From there, the milling cutter
moves in the longitudinal direction of the slot-
plunge-cutting obliquely into the material-to
the center of the right circle.
l The tool subsequently moves back to the center
of the left circle, once again with oblique plunge-
cutting. These steps are repeated until the
programmed milling depth is reached.
l At the programmed milling depth the TNC Fig. 8.30: Cycle sequence: SLOT WITH RECIPROCATING PLUNGE-
moves the tool for the purpose of face milling to CUT
the other end of the slot and then once again to
the center of the slot.

Finishing process:
l From the center of the slot the TNC moves the
tool tangentially to the contour of the finished
part. After this, the contour is machined using
climb milling (with M3).
l At the end of the contour, the tool moves
tangentially away from the contour, to the center
of the slot.
l Finally, the tool moves in rapid traverse back to
the setup clearance and-if this has been
specified-to the second setup clearance.

8-28 TNC 370

 8 Cycles
L
8.3 Cycles for Milling Pockets, Studs and Slots

Input data
l SET-UP CLEARANCE WOO (incremental value)
Distance between tool tip and workpiece
surface. Enter a positive value.
l DEPTH 0201 (incremental value):
.- Distance between workpiece surface and
bottom of slot. Enter a negative value.
l FEED RATE FOR MILLING Q207:
Traversing speed of the tool when milling in
mm/min.
l PECKING DEPTH Q202 (incremental value):
Total extent by which the tool is fed in during a
reciprocating movement in the tool axis. Enter a
positive value.
l MACHINING OPERATION (01112) 0215:
Specify extent of machining: Fig. 8.31: Input parameters, SLOT cycle
0: Roughing and finishing
1: Roughing only
2: Finishing only
l WORKPIECE SURFACE COORDINATE Q203
(absolute value):
Coordinate of the workpiece surface.
. 2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE Q204
(incremental value):
L Z coordinate at which no collision between tool
and workpiece (clamping devices) can occur.
Enter a positive value.
l CENTER IN 1ST AXIS Q216 (absolute value): Q21;
Center of the slot in the main axis of the working
plane.
l CENTER IN 2ND AXIS Q217 (absolute value):
Center of the slot in the secondary axis of the
working plane.
Fig. 8.32: Input parameters, SLOT cycle
l FIRST SIDE LENGTH Q218 (value parallel to
the main axis of the working plane):
Enter the length of the slot.
l SECOND SIDE LENGTH Q219 (value parallel to the secondary axis of
the working plane):
Enter the width of the slot. If you enter a slot width that equals the tool
diameter, the TNC will only carry out the roughing process (slot rough-
ing).
l ANGiE OF ROTATION 0224 (absolute value):
Angle about which the entire slot is rotated. The center of rotation lies
in the center of the slot.

TNC 370 8-29

8 Cycles
-
8.3 Cycles for Milling Pockets, Studs and Slots

CIRCULAR SLOT WITH RECIPROCATING PLUNGE-CUT (Cycle 210)

d
Nott3:
* The elgebralc sign for cycle paramfrter i2EPTf-l defines the working direction,
* The mitling cutter diameter must not be greater than the slot width and nut less than a third of the slot width. 4’
* The milling cutter diameter shouldbe kss ttlan half the slot fangth. The TMC otherwise cannot execute this
C&C?.
* The TNC cannat show the CIRCULAR SLOT cycle in test run graphics, Use the programming graphics for
checking the part program.

Process
Roughing process:
l The TNC positions the tool in the Z axis to the
second setup clearance and subsequently in the
starting point. The starting point is calculated
from the entered cycle parameters. From there,
the TNC positions the tool to the programmed
setup clearance above the workpiece surface.
l The tool moves at the roughing feed rate to the
workpiece surface. From there, the milling cutter
moves - plunge-cutting obliquely into the
material -to the other end of the slot.
l The tool subsequently moves back to the
starting point, once again with oblique plunge-
cutting. These steps are repeated until the
programmed milling depth is reached.
l At the programmed milling depth the TNC
Fig. 8.33: Cycle sequence: CIRCULAR SLOT WITH RECIPROCATING
moves the tool for the purpose of face milling to PLUNGE-CUT
the other end of the slot.

Finishing process:
l For finising the slot, the TNC moves the tool
tangentially to the contour of the finished part.
After this, the contour is machined using climb
milling (with M3).
l At the end of the contour, the tool moves
tangentially away from the contour.
l Finally, the tool moves in rapid traverse back to
the setup clearance and - if this has been
specified - to the second setup clearance.

8-30 TNC 370

 8 Cycles
L
8.3 Cycles for Milling Pockets, Studs and Slots

Input data
l SET-UP CLEARANCE 0200 (incremental value):
Distance between tool tip and workpiece
surface. Enter a positive value.
l , DEPTH 0201 (incremental value):
L Distance between workpiece surface and
bottom of slot. Enter a negative value.
l FEED RATE FOR MILLING 0207:
Traversing speed of the tool when milling in
mm/min.
l PECKING DEPTH 0202 (incremental value):
Total extent by which the tool is fed in during a
reciprocating movement in the tool axis. Enter a
positive value.
l MACHINING OPERATION (O/1/2) 02 15:
Specify extent of machining: Fig. 8.34: Input parameters, CIRCULAR SLOT cycle
0: Roughing and finishing
1: Roughing only
2: Finishing only
l WORKPIECE SURFACE COORDINATE 0203
(absolute value):
L- Coordinate of the workpiece surface.
l 2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE Q204
(incremental value):
Z coordinate at which no collision between tool
and workpiece (clamping devices) can occur.
Enter a positive value.
l CENTER IN 1ST AXIS Q216 (absolute value):
Center of the slot in the main axis of the working
plane.
l CENTER IN 2ND AXIS Q217 (absolute value):
Center of the slot in the secondary axis of the
working plane. Fig. 8.35: Input parameters, CIRCULAR SLOT
l PITCH CIRCLE DIAMETER Q244: cycle
-
Enter the diameter of the pitch circle.
l SECOND
- SIDE LENGTH Q2 19:
Enter the width of the slot. If you enter a slot width
L-
that equals the tool diameter, the TNC will only carry
out the roughing process (slot roughing).
l STARTING ANGLE 0245 (absolute value):
Enter the polar angle of the starting point,
l ANGULAR LENGTH Q248 (incremental value):
Enter the angular length of the slot.

TNC 370 8-31

8 Cycles
4
8.3 Cycles for Milling Pockets, Studs and Slots

Examples for exercise

Roughing and finishing a pocket from solid

Input values:

Setup clearance: +2 mm (0200)

Milling depth: -20 mm (Q201)
Positioning feed rate: 1500 mm/min (Q206)
Pecking depth: +6 mm (0202)
Feed rate for milling: 350 mm/min (0207)
Workpiece surface: +O mm (Q203)
2nd setup clearance: +I00 mm (Q204)
Center of pocket in X: +50 mm (Q216)
Center of pocket in Y: +50 mm (Q217)
Length of pocket in X: +80 mm (0218)
Width of pocket in Y: +60 mm (0219)
Corner radius: +7 mm (Q220)
Allowance in X: +2 mm (Q221)

Workpiece blank length X: 76 mm

Workpiece blank length Y: 56 mm

0 BEGIN PGM 370275 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-30
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+1 00 Y+lOO Z+O
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+6
4 TOOL CALL 1 Z S2500

5 L Z+200 RO F MAX M3 ... . . . ... ... .... .. ... . . ... .. ... .. ... Retract tool, spindle ON
6 L X+50 Y+50 RO F MAX .. . .. .. ... .. . . .. ... ... ... .. . . .. ... Preposition in the center of the pocket (only necessary for
Cycle 4)

7 CYCL DEF 4.0 POCKET MILLING

8 CYCL DEF 4.1 DIST. 2
9 CYCL DEF 4.2 DEPTH -20
IO CYCL DEF 4.3 PECKING DEPTH IO F150
11 CYCL DEF 4.4 X+76 . ... .. .. ... ... ... .. ... .. ... .... ... .. .._Workpiece blank length X
12 CYCL DEF 4.5 Y+56 . .. .... .. ... ... .. .. ... ... .. .. . .._._...___Workpiece blank length Y
13 CYCL DEF 4.6 F350 DR+ .. ... . . .. .. . . ... . .. . .. .. ... . Define standard cycle for pocket roughing

14 L Z+2 RO F MAX M99 . .. ... .. ... ... ... . . .. . . . .. ... .. Preposition to setup clearance, call cycle
15 CYCL DEF 212 POCKET FINISHING
Q200=2
Q201=-20
Q206= 1500
Q202=6
Q207=350
Q203=+0
Q204=100
Q216=+50
Q217=+50
Q218=80
Q219=60
Q220=7
Q221 =+2 .. .... ..... .. ... ... .... ... ... .. .... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .... . Define cycle for pocket finishing
16 CYCL CALL . .. .. ... ... . ..._....................................... Call cycle

22 L Z+200 RO F MAX M2 ... . .... .. . . . .. .. ... ... ... ... .. . . Retract tool
23 END PGM 370275 MM

8-32 TNC 370

 8 Cycles
L,
8.3 Cycles for Milling Pockets, Studs and Slots

Slot roughing/finishing

Milling two horizontal slots, each with a length of

50 mm and a width of 10 mm, and a vertical slot
with a length of 80 mm and a width of 10 mm.
Input values slots @ and @:
Setup clearance: +2 mm (0200)
Total slot depth: -20 mm (0201)
Roughing feed rate: 150 mm/min (0206)
Pecking depth: +6 mm (Q202)
Extent of machining: 0 (full) (Q207)
Workpiece surface: +0 mm (0203)
-_
2nd setup clearance: +I50 mm (Q204)
Slot center X: +55 mm (0216)
Slot center Y: +I5 mm (Q217)
.- Slot length X: +50 mm (Q218)
Slot width Y: +I0 mm (Q2 19)
Angle of rotation: +o o (Q220)

Changed parameters for slot @:

Slot center X: +I5 mm (Q216)
Slot center Y: +50 mm (Q217)
-- Slot length ,,X” +55 mm (Q216)
Rotation angle: +90 o (Q220)

I 20 30 55 80 100

0 BEGIN PGM 3702210 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-30
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+lOO Z+O
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+4
4 TOOL CALL 1 Z S3500
5 L Z+200 RO F MAX M3 ... ... ... ... ... ..._.................._____Retract tool, spindle ON
6 CYCL DEF 210 SLOT RECIP. PLNG
Q200=2
Q201=-20
Q207=250
L Q202=6
Q215=0
Q203=+0
Q204=100
Q216=+55
Q217=+15
Q218=50
Q219=10
Q224=+0 .. ... ... .. .... . .... ... .... ... .. ... .... ... ... .... ... .. ... .... Define cycle for slot @
7 CYCL CALL ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .... ... ..._....._.__..........______.._.. Call cycle

8 FN 0: Q217 = +50 . ... ... .. .... ... ... ... .. .... ... ... .... ... ... .. .... Reload new Y positions for slot @
9 CYCL CALL ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... .. .... Call cycle, changed parameter comes into effect
10 CYCL DEF 210 SLOT RECIP. PLNG
Q200=2
Q20 I=-20
Q207=250
Q202=6
Q215=0
Q203=+0
Q204=100
Q216=+15
Q217=+50
02 18=80
Q219=10
Q224=+90 . .... ... .. ... ... ... .... .. .... .. ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... .. Define cycle for slot @
11 CYCL CALL .. .... ... .. ... ... ... .... .. .... .. ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... .. Call cycle
12 L Z+200 RO F MAX M2 .. ... ... ... ... .. .... ... ... ..._.._....... Retract tool
13 END PGM 370275 MM
-
TNC 370
 8 Cycles
.d

8.4 Cycles for Machining Hole Patterns

The TNC provides two cycles for machining hole patterns:

J
Gycls soft key
220 CIRCULAR PATTERN
./

221 LINEAR PAlTERN

Cycles 220 and 221 can be combined with the following cycles:

CYCL 1 PECKING
CYCL 2 TAPPING with a floating tap holder
CYCL 3 SLOT MILLING
CYCL 4 POCKET MILLING
CYCL 5 CIRCULAR POCKET
CYCL 17 RIGID TAPPING
CYCL 70 DRILLING
CYCL 71 REAMING
CYCL 72 BORING
.-
CYCL 73 UNIVERSAL DRILLING CYCLE
CYCL 75 POCKET FINISHING
CYCL 76 RECTANGULAR STUD FINISHING
CYCL 77 CIRCULAR POCKET FINISHING .-
CYCL 78 CIRCULAR STUD FINISHING

8-34 TNC 370

 8 Cycles
L
8.4 Cycles for Machining Hole Patterns

CIRCULAR PATTERN (Cycle 220)

NOW
l Cycle 220 is DEF-atiive, that iata say that Cycls 226 auromaticallycallsthe kWdefined fixed qfz%%
* ff one af the fixed Cycles 200 to 215 is combinti w&h Cycle 220, the serupciearance,the workpiece surface
and Theaseconds&up ctearancefunction from Cycle 220 ars in affect.

.- Process
l From the current position, the TNC positions the tool automatically at
the starting point of the first machining operation.
.- Sequence: - Traverse 2nd setup clearance (tool axis).
- Traverse starting point in the working plane.
- Move to setup clearance above workpiece surface
(tool axis).
l Here, the TNC carries out the last-defined fixed cycle.
l The TNC subsequently positions the tool with a straight-line movement
at the starting point of the next machining operation after the tool is
retracted to the setup clearance (or to the 2nd setup clearance).
l This process is repeated until all machining operations have been
carried out.
-

input data
l CENTER IN 1ST AXIS Q216 (absolute value):
Center of the pitch circle on the main axis of the working plane.
l CENTER IN 2ND AXIS 0217 (absolute value):
Center of the pitch circle on the secondary axis of the working plane.
l PITCH CIRCLE DIAMETER Q244 (absolute value):
Diameter of the pitch circle.
l STARTING ANGLE Q245 (absolute value):
Angle from the main axis of the working plane to the starting point of
the first machining operation on the pitch circle.
l STOPPING ANGLE Q246 (absolute value):
Angle from the main axis of the working plane to the starting point of
the last machining operation on the pitch circle. Enter the stopping
angle to be not equal to the starting angle.
If the stopping angle is entered to be greater than the starting angle,
machining will be carried out counterclockwise, otherwise machining Fig. 8.36: Input parameters, CIRCULAR
PATTERN cycle
will be carried out clockwise.
l ANGULAR STEP 0247 (incremental value):
Angle between two machining operations on the pitch circle. If you
enter an angular step of 0, the TNC calculates the angular step from the
starting angle and the stopping angle. If you enter an angular step that
is not equal to 0, the TNC does not take the stopping angle into ac-
count. The sign for angular step defines the machining direction
- (- = clockwise).
. NUMBER OF REPETITIONS Q241:
Number of machining operations on the pitch circle.
l SET-UP CLEARANCE Q200 (incremental value):
Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface. Enter a positive
value.
-- l WORKPIECE SURFACE COORDINATE Q203 (absolute value):
Coordinate of the workpiece surface.
l 2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE Q204 (incremental value):
Z coordinate at which no- collision between tool and workpiece (clamp-
ing devices) can occur. Enter a positive value.

TNC 370 8-35

8 Cycles
4
8.4 Cycles for Machining Hole Patterns

LINEAR PAITERN (Cycle 221)

Process
l From the current position, the TNC positions the
tool automatically at the starting point of the first
machining operation.
Sequence: - Traverse 2nd setup clearance
(tool axis).
- Traverse starting point in the
working plane.
- Move to setup clearance above
workpiece surface (tool axis).
l Here, the TNC carries out the last-defined fixed
cycle.
l The TNC subsequently positions the tool in the
positive main axis direction at the starting point
of the next machining operation after the tool is
retracted to the setup clearance (or to the 2nd
setup clearance).
l This process is repeated until all machining Fig. 8.37: Sequence of LINEAR PAlTERN cycle
operations on the first pass have been carried
out. The tool is positioned at the last point of the
first pass.
l After this, the TNC moves the tool to the last point of the second pass
and carries out the machining operation there.
l From there, the TNC positions the tool in the negative main axis
direction at the starting point of the next machining operation.
l This process is repeated until all machining operations of the second
pass have been carried out. The tool is positioned at the first point of
the second pass.
l The TNC subsequently moves the tool to the starting point of the next
pass.
l All subsequent passes are processed in a reciprocating movement.

8-36 TNC 370

 8 Cycles
L
8.4 Cycles for Machining Hole Patterns

Input data I

l STARTING POINT 1ST AXIS Q225 (absolute value):

Coordinate of the starting point in the main axis of the working plane.
l STARTING POINT 2ND AXIS 0226 (absolute value):
Coordinate of the starting point in the secondary axis of the working
plane.
l SPACING IN 1ST AXIS 0237 (incremental value):
Distance between the individual points on the pass.
l SPACING IN 2ND AXIS Q238 (incremental value):
Distance between the individual passes,
l NUMBER OF COLUMNS Q242:
Number of machining operations on the pass.
l NUMBER OF LINES Q243:
Number of passes. I

l ANGLE OF ROTATION Q224 (absolute value): Fig. 8.38: Input parameters, LINEAR
Angle about which the entire coordinate system is rotated. The center PATTERN cycle
of rotation lies in the starting point.
l SET-UP CLEARANCE Q200 (incremental value):
Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface. Enter a positive
value.
l WORKPIECE SURFACE COORDINATE 0203 (absolute value):
Coordinate of the workpiece surface.
l 2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE Q204 (incremental value):
Z coordinate at which no collision between tool and workpiece (clamp-
ing devices) can occur. Enter a positive value.

TNC 370 8-37

8 Cycles
4
8.4 Cycles for Machining Hole Patterns

Examples for exercise

Roughing and finishing rectangular pockets on a pitch circle

Input values for CYCL 220:

Center X axis: +50 mm (Q216)
Center Y axis: +50 mm (Q217)
Pitch circle diameter: +70 mm (Q244)
Starting angle: +o o (Q245)
Stopping angle: +360 ’ (0246)
Angular step: +O” (Q247)
No. of math. operations: 8 (Q241)
Setup clearance: +2 (Q200)
Workpiece surface: +0 mm (Q203)
2nd setup clearance: +I 00 mm (0204)
Input values for CYCL 4 (pocket roughing)
Length of pocket in X: 22 mm
Width of pocket in Y: 12 mm
Input values for CYCL 212 (pocket finishing)
Length of pocket in X: 24 mm
Width of pocket in Y: 14 mm
Allowance in X: +I mm

0 BEGIN PGM 3702802 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-30
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+1 00 Y+lOO Z+O
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+3
4 TOOL CALL 1 Z S2500
5 L Z+200 RO F MAX M3 .. . . .. . ... .... .. .. ... .. ... .. . ... ... .. . Retract tool, spindle ON
6 CYCL DEF 4.0 POCKET MILLING
7 CYCL DEF4.1 SETUP2
8 CYCL DEF 4.2 DEPTH -20
9 CYCL DEF 4.3 PECKG 5 F150
10 CYCL DEF 4.4 X+22 ... .. .... .. ... .... ... .. ... . . ... .. ... ... . Length for roughing in X
11 CYCL DEF 4.5 Y+12 ... .. .... .. ... .... .. . ... ... ... .. ... ... .. Width for roughing in Y
12 CYCL DEF 4.6 F250 DR+ . .. ... .... ... . ... . . .. . .. ... .... . . Define cycle for pocket roughing
13 CALL LBL 1 . .. ... ..._._.._........................................ Call subprogram in which the coordinate system is defined
14 CYCL DEF 212 POCKET FINISHING
Q200=0 ... ..... .. .... ... ... ... .... .. .... ... ... ... .. .... ... .. ... .... .. Not to be entered, in effect from cycle 220
Q201=-20
Q206=250
Q202=5
Q207=350
Q203=+0 .. . .. ... .. .. . .. . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . . . ... ... ... .. Not to be entered, in effect from cycle 220
Q204=0 ... ..... .. .... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... .. .... ... ... ... ... .. Not to be entered, in effect from cycle 220
Q216=+0
Q217=+0
Q218=24
Q219=14
Q220=4
Q221 =+I ._._........................................................ Define cycle for pocket finishing, 1 mm finishing allowance
15 CALL LBL 1 . ... .... ... ... .. .... ... ... .... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .... .. .. Call subprogram in which the coordinate system is defined
16 L Z+200 RO F MAX M2 Retract tool, end of main program
Continued... u

8-38 TNC 370

 8 Cycles
L
8.4 Cycles for Machining Hole Patterns

17 LBL 1 . Start of subprogram

18 CYCL DEF 220 POLAR PATTERN

0216=+50
Q217=+50
Q244=70
Q245=+0
Q246=+360
Q247=+0
Q241=8
Q200=2
Q203=+0
Q204=100 .. ... ... .. ... ... .. ... ... .. .... .. .. ... . .. .... .... .. Define polar pattern; no cycle call, Cycle 220 automatically
calls the last-defined fixed cycle (Cycle 4 in the first subpro-
gram call, Cycle 212 in the second call)
19 LBL 0 ..__..._.._._._......,.............................,.........,.,.... End of subprogram

20 END PGM 3702802 MM

i
TNC 370 8-39
8 Cycles
4

SL Cycles
J
Subcontour List (SL) cycles are very powerful cycles that enable you to
mill any plane contour. They are characterized by the following features:
l A contour can consist of superimposed subcontours. Pockets and -I
islands compose the subcontours.
l The subcontours are entered as subprograms.
l The control automatically superimposes the subcontours and calcu-
lates the points at which they intersect. -

Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY contains the subcontour list and is a

purely geometric cycle, with no cutting data or infeed values.

Programming the parallel axes

Pockets and islands can also be machined in planes formed by parallel
axes.

-
Prerequisite:
The plane has to be perpendicular to the tool axis in TOOL CALL.

Example:
Tool axis Z or W; possible planes X/Y, U/Y, X/V, U/V

The coordinates of the desired machining plane must be programmed in

the first coordinate block (positioning block or CC block) of the first
subprogram named in Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY.

.-/
Example:
Tool axis Z, machining plane X/V -
.

TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+3

TOOL CALL 1 Z S 1000
CYCL DEF 14.0 CONTOUR GEOM. 4
CYCL DEF 14.1 CONTOUR LABEL l/2/3
.
.
4
L.:..M2
LBL 1
cc x+20 V+lO 4

All other coordinates are then ignored.

8-40 TNC 370 -

 8 Cycles
L
8.5 SL Cycles

The machining data are defined in the following cycles:

Cycle
15 PILOT DRILLING

6 ROUGH-OUT

16 CONTOUR MILLING

Each subprogram defines whether RL or RR radius compensation

applies. The sequence of points determines the direction of rotation in
which the contour is to be machined. The control deduces from these
data whether the specific subprogram describes a pocket or an island:
l For a pocket the tool path is inside the contour
l For an island the tool path is outside the contour

l Alt coordinate transformatians are altowed in the subprograms for the subcontours.
* F and M words are ignored in the subprogramsfor the subcantoura.

The following examples will at first use only the ROUGH-OUT cycle.
Later, as the examples become more complex, the full range of possi-
bilities of this group of cycles will be illustrated.

CONTOUR GEOMETRY (Cycle 14)

* Cycle 14 is DEF-atWe, that is $0say Cycfe 14 becomeseffective as won as it is defined.

* You can fist a maximum of 12 subcontours Isubprograms) with Cycle 14.

Application
Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY contains the
list of subcontours that make up the complete
contour.

Fig. 8.39: Example of an SL contour: A, B = pockets; C, D = islands

TNC 370 8-41

8 Cycles
8.5 SL Cycles

ROUGH-OUT (Cycle 6)

Mow
* Ragram a pas&ioning black far the starting point in,,the toot axis fsetup clearanceabove the Yvorkpiecs
surface).
l Yhe algebraicsign for cycle parameter DEPTH defines the w&&g dire?iction.
l This cycts txquires a centler-cut end mifl @3QVW 1,or pikt drilfingv&h Cycls 15.
l Machine parameter 7420 Fseapage 12-Q) dstsrmines whether
- the contour is first milked@ndrhen surface machineded, ar vice-versa
- the cantour is mifled ccknventionallyor by ctirirb milfing
- all pmkefets are first rou@%dout ta the full m#ing depths and then conttau~ miltad, c?rvice-versa
- contour miffing and roughing out are performed U%y$r+her for each pecking depth.

Process
Cycle 6 specifies the cutting path and partitioning.
l The tool is positioned in the working plane above the first infeed point,
taking the finishing allowance into account.
l Then the tool penetrates into the workpiece at the programmed feed
rate for pecking.

Milling the contour:

l The tool mills the first subcontour at the specified feed rate, taking the
finishing allowance into account.
l When the tool returns to the infeed point, it is advanced to the next
pecking depth.
l This process is repeated until the programmed milling depth is
reached.
l Further contours are milled in the same manner.
Fig. 8.40: Tool path for rough-out
Roughing out pockets:
l After milling the contour the pocket is roughed out. The stepover is
defined by the tool radius. Islands are jumped over.
l If necessary, pockets can be cleared out with several downfeeds.
l At the end of the cycle the tool returns to the setup clearance.

Input data
l SET-UP CLEARANCE @ (incremental value):
Distance between tool tip (starting position) and workpiece surface.
l MILLING DEPTH @: (incremental value):
Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole.
l PECKING DEPTH 0: (incremental value):
lnfeed per cut. The TNC moves in one operation to theDEPTH if:
- PECKING DEPTH and DEPTH are identical
- the PECKING DEPTH is greater than the DEPTH.
Enter a positive value.
l FEED RATE FOR PECKING:
Traversing speed of the tool during penetration.
l FINISHING ALLOWANCE 0:
Allowance in the working plane. Enter a positive value.
. DIRECTION ANGLE FOR ROUGH-OUT @:
Feed direction for roughing out. The direction angle for rough-out is
referenced to the main axis of the working plane. Enter the angle Fig. 8.41: lnfeeds and distances for the
such that the resulting cuts are as long as possible. ROUGH-OUT cycle
. FEEDRATEF:
Traversing speed of the tool when milling.

8-42 TNC 370 -

 8 Cycles
L
8.5 SL Cycles

Example: Roughing out a rectangular pocket

Rectangular pocket with rounded corners

Tool: center-cut end mill (IS0 1641),
radius 5 mm.
Coordinates of the island corners:
X Y
0 70 mm 60 mm
0 15 mm 60 mm
15 mm 20 mm
g 70 mm 20 mm
Coordinates of the auxiliary pocket:
X Y
8 -5 mm -5 mm
0 105 mm -5 mm
105 mm 105 mm
g -5 mm 105 mm
Starting point for machining:
@ X=40 mm Y=60 mm
Setup clearance: 2 mm
Milling depth: 15 mm
Pecking depth: 8 mm
Feed rate for pecking: 100 mm/min
Finishing allowance: 0
Direction angle for rough-out: O”
Milling feed rate: 500 mm/min

Cycle in a part program

0 BEGIN PGM 360819 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+lOO Z+O
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+3
4 TOOL CALL 1 Z SIOOO
5 CYCL DEF 14.0 CONTOUR GEOM.
6 CYCL DEF 14.1 CONTOUR LABEL 2/l
7 CYCL DEF 6.0 ROUGH-OUT .... ... . ... . ... .... ... .. Cycle definition ROUGH-OUT
8 CYCL DEF 6.1 SET UP 2 DEPTH -15
9 CYCL DEF 6.2 PECKG 8 FIOO ALLOW +0
10 CYCL DEF 6.3 ANGLE +0 F500
11 L Z+lOO RO FMAX M6
12 L X+40 Y+50 FMAX M3 ... .. .. ... . ... ... . .... .. .. . .. . Pre-positioning in X, Y, spindle on
13 L Z+2 FMAX M99 .. ... .... . . .. . ... . . ... .. . . .. .. ... .. . Pre-positioning in Z, cycle call
14 L Z+lOO FMAX M2
15 LBL 1
16 L X+40 Y+60 RR
17 L x+15
18 RND RI2
19 L Y+20 Subprogram 1:
20 RND RI2 Geometry of the island
21 L x+70 (From radius compensation RR and counterclockwise
22 RND RI2 machining, the control concludes that contour element
23 L Y+60 1 is an island)
24 RND RI2
25 L x+40
26 LBL 0
27 LBL 2 Subprogram 2:
28 L X-5 Y-5 RL Geometry of the auxiliary pocket
29 L x+105 External limitation of the machined surface
30 L Y+105 (From radius compensation RL and counterclock-
31 L x-5 wise machining, the control concludes that contour
32 L Y-5 element 2 is a pocket)
33 LBL 0
34 END PGM 360819 MM

TNC 370 8-43

8 Cycles
8.5 SL Cycles

SL Cycles: Overlapping contours

Pockets and islands can be overlapped to form a new contour. The area
of a pocket can thus be enlarged by another pocket or reduced by an
island.

Starting position
Machining begins at the starting position of the first pocket in Cycle 14
CONTOUR GEOMETRY. The starting position should be located as far
as possible from the overlapping contours.

F g. 8.42: Example of overlapping contours

Example: Overlapping pockets

Machining begins with the first contour label defined in block 6. The first
pocket must begin outside the second pocket.

Inside machining with a center-cut end mill

(IS.0 1641). tool radius 3 mm.

Coordinates of the circle centers:

@ X = 35mm Y = 50mm
@ X = 65mm Y = 50mm

Circle radii
R = ‘25mm

Setup clearance: 2 mm
Milling depth: 10 mm
Pecking depth: 5 mm
Feed rate for pecking:
Finishing allowance:
500
0
mm/min
IX 35 65
Direction angle for rough-out: 0
Milling feed rate: 500 mm/min

Continued... 4

8-44 TNC 370

 8 Cvcles

8.5 SL Cycles

Cycle in a part program

0 BEGIN PGM 360821 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+lOO Z+O
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+3
4 TOOL CALL 1 Z SIOOO
5 CYCL DEF 14.0 CONTOUR GEOM.
6 CYCL DEF 14.1 CONTOUR LABEL l/2 .. ... ... ...“List” of contour subprograms
.- 7 CYCL DEF 6.0 ROUGH-OUT ... ... .... .... ..... .. ... ... Cycle definition ROUGH-OUT
8 CYCL DEF 6.1 SET UP 2 DEPTH -10
9 CYCL DEF 6.2 PECKG 5 F500 ALLOW +0
10 CYCL DEF 6.3 ANGLE +0 F500
11 LZ+lOOROFMAXM6
12 L X+50 Y+50 FMAX M3 .. ... .... .. ... ...____................Pre-positioning X, Y, spindle on
13 L 2+2 FMAX MS9 .. ...__.._......................._.__._____.... Setup clearance 2, cycle call
14 L Z+lOO FMAX M2 .. ..... .... ... .. ... .... ... ..... .... ... ... ... Retract, return jump to start of program
15 LBLI
.
.

19 LBLO
20 LBL 2
.
.

24 LBL 0
25 END PGM 360821 MM

Subprograms: Overlapping pockets

The pocket elements A and B overlap.
The control automatically calculates the points of intersection Sl and
S2, so these points do not have to be programmed.
The pockets are programmed as full circles.

15
16
LBL 7
L X+10 Y+50 RL 1
$1
17 cc x+35 Y+50
} A Left pocket
A B
18 C X+1 0 Y+50 DR+
19 LBL 0 J s,
20 LBL 2 a
21 L X+90 Y+50 RL
22
23
CC X+65 Y+50
C Xi90 Y+50 DR+ B Right pocket
24 LBL 0
25 END PGM 360821 MM -
r-’ 8.43:
rig. Points of intersection S, and S, of
Depending on the control setup (machine parameters), machining starts pockets A and B
either with the outline or the surface:

I-lg. 8.44: OutlIne IS machined first Fig. 8.45: Surface is machined first

TNC 370 8-45

8 Cycles
J
8.5 SL Cycles

Area of inclusion
Both areas (element A and element B) are to be
machined - including the area of overlap.
l A and B must be pockets.
l The first pocket (in Cycle 14) must start outside
the second.

15 LBLI
16 L X+10 Y+50 RL
17 cc x+35 Y+50
18 C X+1 0 Y+50 DR+
19 LBLO

20 LBL 2
21
22
23
L x+90 Y+50 RL
CC X+65 Y+50
C X+90 Y+50 DR+
1 Fig. 8.46: Overlapping pockets: area of inclusion
24 LBL 0

Area of exclusion
Surface A is to be machined without the portion
overlapped by B:
l A must be a pocket and B an island.
l A must start outside of B.

15 LBLI
16 L X+10 Y+50 RL
17 cc x+35 Y+50
18 C X+10 Y+50 DR+
19 LBLO

20 LBL 2
21 L X+90 Y+50 RR
22 CC X+65 Y+50
23 C X+90 Y+50 DR+
24 LBL 0 ig. 8.47: Overlapping pockets: area of exclusion

Area of intersection
Only the area of intersection of A and B is to be
machined. (All of surfaces A and B are to be left
unmachined except the portion overlapped by
both.)
l A and B must be pockets.
l A must start inside B.

15 LBLI
16 L X+60 Y+50 RL
17 cc x+35 Y+50
18 C X+60 Y+50 DR+
19 LBLO

20 LBL 2
21 L X+90 Y+50 RL I-
22 CC X+65 Y+50 Fig. 8.48: Overlapping pockets: area of intersection
23 C X+90 Y+50 DR+
24 LBL 0

The subprtlgrams are used in the main program on page B-45.

@

8-46 TNC 370

-
8 Cycles

8.5 SL Cycles

Subprograms: Overlapping islands

An island alwavs reauires a Docket as an additional boundary (here,
LBL 1). ’

0 BEGIN PGM 360823 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+lOO Z+O
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+2.5
4 TOOL CALL 1 Z SIOOO
5 CYCL DEF 14.0 CONTOUR GEOM.
6 CYCL DEF 14.1 CONTOUR LABEL 2/3/l
7 CYCL DEF 6.0 ROUGH-OUT
8 CYCL DEF 6.1 SET UP 2 DEPTH -10
9 CYCL DEF 6.2 PECKG 5 F500 ALLOW +0
10 CYCL DEF 6.3 ANGLE +0 F500
11 L Z+lOO RO FMAX M6
12 L X+50 Y+50 FMAX M3
13 L Z+2 FMAX M99
14 LZ+lOO FMAX M2
15 LBLI
16 LX+5Y+5 RL
17 LX+95
18 LY+95
19 LX+5
20 LY+5
21 LBLO
22 LBL 2
.
.

26 LBL 0
27 LBL 3
.
.
.
31 LBLO
32 END PGM 360823 MM

Area of inclusion
Elements A and B are to be left unmachined
including the mutually overlapped surface:
l A and B must be islands.
l The first island must start outside the second
island.

22 LBL 2
23 L X+10 Y+50 RR
24 CC X+35 Y+50
25 C X+10 Y+50 DR+
26 LBL 0
27 LBL 3
28 L X+90 Y+50 RR
29 CC X+65 Y+50
30 C X+90 Y+50 DR+
31 LBLO Fig. 8.49: Overlapping islands: area of inclusion
32 END PGM 360823 MM

The supplements and subprograms are entered in the main program on page 8-47’.
@
8 Cycles
-
8.5 SL Cycles

Area of exclusion
All of surface A is to be left unmachined except
the portion overlapped by B:
l A must be an island and B a pocket.
l B must start inside A.

22 LBL 2
23 L X+10 Y+50 RR
24 cc x+35 Y+50
25 C X+10 Y+50 DR+
26 LBL 0
27 LBL 3
28 L x+40 Y+50 RL
29 CC X+65 Y+50
30 C X+40 Y+50 DR+
31 LBL 0
32 END PGM 360823 MM Fig. 8.50: Overlapping islands: area of exclusion

Area of intersection
Only the area of intersection of A and B is to
remain unmachined.

l A and B must be islands.

l A must start inside B.

22 LBL 2
23 L X+60 Y+50 RR
24 cc x+35 Y+50
25 C X+60 Y+50 DR+
26 LBL 0
27 LBL 3
28 L X+90 Y+50 RR
29 CC X+65 Y+50
30 C X+90 Y+50 DR+
31 LBL 0 Fig. 8.51: Overlapping islands: area of intersection
32 END PGM 360823 MM

8-48 TNC 370

 8 Cycles
8.5 SL Cycles

Example: Overlapping pockets and islands

PGM 360825 is an expansion of PGM 360821

for the inside islands C and D.

\- Tool: Center-cut end mill (IS0 1641).

radius 3 mm.

The SL contour is composed of the elements

-- A and B (two overlapping pockets) as well as
C and D (two islands within these pockets).

Cycle in a part program

0 BEGIN PGM 360825 MM
1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+lOO Z+O
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+3
4 CYCL DEF 14.0 CONTOUR GEOM.
5 CYCL DEF 14.1 CONTOUR LABEL l/2/3/4
6 CYCL DEF 6.0 ROUGH-OUT
7 CYCL DEF 6.1 SET UP 2 DEPTH -10
8 CYCL DEF 6.2 PECKG 5 FIOO ALLOW +2
9 CYCL DEF 6.3 ANGLE +0 FIOO
10 TOOL CALL 1 Z SIOOO
I

11 L Z+2 RO FMAX M3 Fig. 8.52: Millingtheoutlines

12 CYCL CALL
13 L Z+lOO RO FMAX M2
14 LBL 1
15 L X+10 Y+50 RL
16 CC X+35 Y+50
17 C X+10 Y+50 DR+
18 LBLO
19 LBL2
20 L X+90 Y+50 RL
21 CC X+65 Y+50
22 C X+90 Y+50 DR+
23 LBL 0
24 LBL 3
25 L X+27 Y+42 RL
26 L Y+58 Fig. 8.53: Milling completed
27 L X+43
28 LYi42
29 L X+27
30 LBL 0
L
31 LBL4
32 L X+57 Y+42 RR
33 L x+73
L 34 L X+65 Y+58
35 L X+57 Y+42
36 LBL 0
37 END PGM 360825 MM

TNC 370 8-49

L
8 Cycles
8.5 SL Cycles

PILOT DRILLING (Cycle 15)

Process
Pilot drilling of holes for cutter infeed at the starting points of the subcon-
tours. With SL contours that consist of several overlapping surfaces, the Y
cutter infeed point is the starting point of the first subcontour:
l The tool is positioned above the first infeed point.
l The subsequent drilling sequence is identical to that of Cycle 1
PECKING.
l The tool is then positioned above the next infeed point, and the
drilling process is repeated.

Input data
l SET-UP CLEARANCE (incremental value): -4 -x
Distance between tool tip (starting position) and workpiece surface.
l TOTAL HOLE DEPTH (incremental value):
Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole (tip of drill Fig. 8.54: Example of cutter infeed points for
taper). PECKING

l PECKING DEPTH (incremental value):

lnfeed per cut. The TNC moves in one operation to the TOTAL HOLE
DEPTH if: .-
YA
- PECKING DEPTH and TOTAL HOLE DEPTH are identical
- the PECKING DEPTH is greater than the TOTAL HOLE DEPTH.
The TOTAL HOLE DEPTH does not have to be a multiple of the
PECKING DEPTH.
l FEED RATE F:
Traversing speed of the tool during drilling.
l FINISHING ALLOWANCE
Allowed material for the drilling operation (see Fig. 8.55).
The sum of the tool radius and finishing allowance should be the
same for pilot drilling and roughing out.

I 4
Fig. 8.55: Finishing allowance

_
8-50 TNC 370
 8 Cycles
i.
8.5 SL Cycles

CONTOUR MILLING (Cycle 16)

4 Program a positictningblrxk -IOFthe starting point in the tool axis (setup cfearance above the wrJrkpiece
surQBxd.
l The algebraicsign for cycle parameter DEPTHdefines the working direction.
* This cycle requires a can&r-cut and mill fish 1641).

Cycle 16 CONTOUR MILLING is used to finish-mill the contour pocket.

This cycle can also be used generally for milling contours.

Process
l The TNC positions the tool above the first infeed point.
l The tool then penetrates at the programmed feed rate to the first
pecking depth.
l On reaching the first pecking depth, the tool mills the first contour at
the programmed feed rate and in the specified direction of rotation.
l At the infeed point, the tool is advanced to the next pecking depth.
l This process is repeated until the programmed milling depth is
reached. The remaining subcontours are milled in the same manner.
)X
Input data
L l SET-UP CLEARANCE @ (incremental value): Fig. 8.56: Finishing allowance
Distance between tool tip (starting position) and workpiece surface.
l MILLING DEPTH 0,: (incremental value):
Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole.
l PECKING DEPTH 0: (incremental value):
lnfeed per cut. The TNC moves in one operation to the DEPTH if:
- PECKING DEPTH and DEPTH are identical
- the PECKING DEPTH is greater than the DEPTH.
Enter a positive value.
l FEED RATE FOR PECKING:
Traversing speed of the tool during penetration.
l ROTATION CLOCKWISE: DR- ?
The following is valid for M3:
L
DR+: Climb milling for pocket and
island
DR-: Up-cut milling for pocket and
island
l FEED RATE F: Fig. 8.57: lnfeeds and distances for
CONTOUR MILLING
Traversing speed of the tool in the working plane.

TNC 370 8-51

8 Cycles
d
8.5 SL Cycles

The following scheme illustrates the application of the cycles Pilot

Drilling, Rough-Out and Contour Milling in part programming:

1. List of contour subprograms

CYCL DEF 14.0 CONTOUR GEOM.
Cycle call not required.

2. Drilling
Define and call drilling tool
CYCL DEF 15.0 PILOT DRILLING
Pre-positioning
Cycle call required!

Fig. 8.58: PILOT DRILLING cycle

3. Rough-out
Define and call tool for rough milling
CYCL DEF 6.0 ROUGH-OUT
Pre-positioning
Cycle call required!

ig. 8.59: ROUGH-OUT cycle

4. Finishing
Define and call finish milling tool
CYCL DEF 16.0 CONTOUR MILLING
Pre-positioning
Cycle call required!

Fig. 8.60: CONTOUR MILLING cycle

5. Contour subprograms
STOP MO2
Subprograms for the subcontours.

8-52 TNC 370

 8 Cycles
L
8.5 SL Cycles

Example: Overlapping pockets with islands

Inside machining with pilot drilling, roughing out

and finishing.

PGM 360830 is based on 360825:

The main program has been expanded by the

cycle definitions and cycle calls for pilot drilling
and finishing.

The contour subprograms 1 to 4 are identical to

those in PGM 360825 (see page 8-49) and are
to be added after block 39.

0 BEGIN PGM 360830 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+lOO Z+O
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+2.2 _.............____._.__.,...........Drill
4 TOOL DEF 2 L+O R+3 ... .... .. .... ... . .. . . .... . ... . . Rough mill
5 TOOL DEF 3 L+O R+2.5 .... ... .... ... ... .... ... .... ... .. .. . Finish mill
6 CYCL DEF 14.0 CONTOUR GEOM.
7 CYCL DEF 14.1 CONTOUR LABEL l/2/3/4
8 CALL LBL IO
9 STOP M6
10 TOOL CALL 1 Z S 2000
11 CYCL DEF 15.0 PILOT DRILL
12 CYCL DEF 15.1 SET UP 2 DEPTH -10 Pilot drilling
13 CYCL DEF 15.2 PECKG 5 F500 ALLOW +2.8
14 L Z+2 RO FMAX
15 CYCL CALL M3
16 CALL LBL 10
17 STOP M6
18 TOOL CALL 2 Z S 1750
19 CYCL DEF 6.0 ROUGH-OUT
20 CYCL DEF 6.1 SET UP 2 DEPTH -10
21 CYCL DEF 6.2 PECKG 5 FIOO ALLOW +2 Rough-out
22 CYCL DEF 6.3 ANGLE +0 F500
23 L Z+2 RO FMAX
24 CYCL CALL M3
25 CALL LBL 10
26 STOP M6
27 TOOL CALL 3 Z S 2500
28 CYCL DEF 16.0 CONTOUR MILLING
29 CYCL DEF 16.1 SET UP 2 DEPTH -10 Finishing
30 CYCL DEF 16.2 PECKG 5 FIOO DR- F500
31 L Z+2 RO FMAX
32 CYCL CALL M3
33 CALL LBL 10
34 L Z+20 RO FMAX M2 . .. .... ... ...____...................... Retract and return jump
35 LBL 10
36 TOOL CALL 0 Z . ... ... ... ... .... .... .. ..... .. .... ... ... ... ... .. . Tool change
37 L Z+lOO RO FMAX
38 L X-20 Y-20 RO FMAX
39 LBL 0
From block 40: add the subprograms listed on page 8-49
63 END PGM 360830 MM

TNC 370 8-53

8 Cycles 4

8.6 Cycles for Multipass Milling

The TNC features two cycles for machining the following surface types:

Flat, rectangular surfaces

Flat, oblique-angled surfaces
Surfaces that are inclined in any way
Twisted surfaces

,,
Cy& Soft key
230 MULTIPASS MILLING
for flat, rectangular surfaces

231 RULED SURFACE

for oblique, inclined, or twisted surfaces

8-54 TNC 370

 8 Cycles
L
8.6 Cycles for Multipass Milling

\
MULTIPASS MILLING (Cycle 230)

* from the cutrent position,the TNC positions the tooI autm-mticallyat the starting p&t af the first machining
opsrMm, first in the working planet end then in the bol axis. Pm-p&ion the &ml in such a way that there is
no danger of collisionwith the wcirkpiece or fixtures.

-- Process
l From the current position, the TNC positions
the tool at rapid traverse in the working plane to
starting point 0. In the process, the TNC
offsets the tool by the tool radius to the left and
to the top.
l The tool subsequently moves at rapid traverse
in the tool axis to the setup clearance and after
this at the positioning feed rate to the pro-
grammed starting position in the tool axis.
l The tool moves at the programmed milling feed
rate to stopping point 0. The TNC calculates
the stopping point from the programmed
starting point, the programmed length and the
tool radius.
l The TNC offsets the tool at the stepover feed
rate to the starting point of the next pass. The
TNC calculates the offset from the programmed Fig. 8.61: MULTIPASS MILLING cycle
width and the number of cuts.
l After this, the tool moves in the negative
X direction back to the starting point 0.
l Multipass milling is repeated until the pro-
grammed surface has been completely ma-
chined.
l At the end the TNC moves the tool in rapid
traverse back to the setup clearance.

TNC 370 8-55

8 Cycles
. J
8.6 Cycles for Multipass Milling

input data
l STARTING POINT IN 1ST AXIS Q225 Y 0218
(absolute value):
Min. point coordinate of the surface to be tt
multipass milled in the main axis of the working A
Elm+
plane.
$ BP0
l STARTING POINT IN 2ND AXIS Q226 03
(absolute value): Em+
Min. point coordinate of the surface to be :
X=0225
multipass milled in the secondary axis of the + ono
Y=Q226
working plane. Z=Q227 Q207noo+
-g
l STARTING POINT IN 3RD AXIS Q227 c
(absolute value):
Height in the tool axis to which multipass milling
is carried out.
l FIRST SIDE LENGTH 0218
Fig. 8.62: Input parameters, MULTIPASS MILLING cycle
(incremental value):
Length of the surface to be multipass milled in
the main axis of the working plane, referenced
to the STARTING POINT IN IST AXIS.
l SECOND SIDE LENGTH Q219 (incremental
value):
Width of the surface to be multipass milled in
the secondary axis of the working plane,
referenced to the STARTING POINT IN 2ND
AXIS.
l NUMBER OF CUTS Q240:
Number of passes made over width Y.
l FEED RATE FOR PECKING Q206:
Traversing speed of the tool when moving from
the setup clearance to the milling depth in mm/
min.
l FEED RATE FOR MILLING Q207:
Traversing speed of the tool when milling in
mm/min. Fig. 8.63: Input parameters, MULTIPASS MILLING cycle
l STEPOVER FEED RATE Q209:
Traversing speed of the tool when moving to
the next pass in mm/min.
If you are moving transversely in the material,
enter Q209 to be less than Q207; if you are
moving transversely in the open, Q209 may be
greater than Q207.
l SET-UP CLEARANCE Q200
(incremental value):
Distance between tool tip and milling depth
during prepositioning at the start of the cycle
and at the end of the cycle.

8-56 TNC 3’9

 8 Cycles
L-
8.6 Cycles for Multipass Milling

\
RULED SURFACE (Cycle 231)

* From the cufrenr position, the fbdC positions the tool with a 30 stFa$$lt tine mawnent to the starting paint of
the first machining operation. Pre-position the tool in such a way that there is no danger of collision wirh the
urorkpiece or fixtures.
* T’h? TNC positians the t~bl with radius compensation RQ to the programmed positions.
* f f necessary, use a center-cut end mill (ISO 1641 f.

Process
l From the current position, the TNC positions
the tool with a 3D straight line movement to
starting point 0.
l The tool subsequently moves at the pro-
grammed feed rate for milling to stopping point
0.
l Here, the TNC moves the tool at rapid traverse
by the tool diameter in the positive tool axis
direction and afterwards back to starting point
0
l At starting point 0 the TNC moves the tool
back to the Z value last used.
l The TNC subsequently offsets the tool in all
three axes from point @ in the direction of point
@ to the next pass.
l After this, the TNC moves the tool to the end of
this pass. The TNC calculates the stopping Fig. 8.64: Sequence of RULED SURFACE cycle
point from point @ and an offset in the direction
of point 0.
l Multipass milling is repeated until the pro-
grammed surface has been completely ma-
chined.
l At the end the TNC positions the tool above the
highest programmed point in the tool axis,
offset by the tool diameter.

Cutting motion
You can freely choose the starting point and thus the milling direction
since the TNC always performs the individual cuts from point @I to point
0. The process sequence is executed from points a/@ to points @/@.
You can position point @ at any corner of the surface to be machined.

If you are using an end mill for the machining operation, you can opti-
mize the surface finish by programming: Fig. 8.65: Cutting motion of an end mill with
steep surfaces
l a shaping cut (tool axis coordinate of point 0 greater than tool axis
coordinate of point 0) for slightly inclined surfaces, or
l a drawing cut (tool axis coordinate of point @I less than tool axis
coordinate of point 0) for steep surfaces.
l When milling skew surfaces, program the main cutting direction (from
point @ to point 0) parallel to the direction of the steepest inclination
(Fig. 8.65).

If you are using a spherical cutter for the machining operation, you can
optimize the surface finish by programming:

l When milling skew surfaces, program the main cutting direction (from
point 0 to point 0) perpendicular to the direction of the steepest
inclination (Fig. 8.66).

Fig. 8.66: Cutting motion of a sphencal cutter

with steep surfaces

TNC 370 8-57

8 Cycles
41/
8.6 Cycles for Multipass Milling

input data
l STARTING POINT IN 1ST AXIS Q225 y,i X=Q231
(absolute value): Y=Q232
Z=Q233 + QQQ
Starting point coordinate of the surface to be
QUO@@
4J X=Q234

108 ;:g;g
multipass milled in the main axis of the working
plane. 4+$
l STARTING POINT IN 2ND AXIS 0226 4+l0u
(absolute value):
Starting point coordinate of the surface to be 69
100
multipass milled in the secondary axis of the
working plane.
+000 X=Q225
l STARTING POINT IN 3RD AXIS Q227 Q207+~ 0, ;rz;;,”
(absolute value): 4
Starting point coordinate of the surface to be
multipass milled in the tool axis.
X
l 2ND POINT IN 1ST AXIS Q228 Fig. 8.67: Input parameters, RULED SURFACE cycle
(absolute value):
Stopping point coordinate of the surface to be
multipass milled in the main axis of the working 1

plane.
l 2ND POINT IN 2ND AXIS Q229 (absolute value):
Stopping point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the -

secondary axis of the working plane.

l 2ND POINT IN 3RD AXIS Q230 (absolute value):
Stopping point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the .d

tool axis.
l 3RD POINT IN 1ST AXIS Q231 (absolute value):
Coordinate of point @ in the main axis of the working plane. --

l 3RD POINT IN 2ND AXIS Q232 (absolute value):

Coordinate of point @ in the secondary axis of the working plane.
l 3RD POINT IN 3RD AXIS Q233 (absolute value):
Coordinate of point @I in the tool axis.
l 4TH POINT IN 1ST AXIS Q234 (absolute value):
Coordinate of point @ in the main axis of the working plane.
l 4TH POINT IN 2ND AXIS 0235 (absolute value):
Coordinate of point @I in the secondary axis of the working plane.
l 4TH POINT IN 3RD AXIS Q236 (absolute value):
Coordinate of point @ in the tool axis.
l NUMBER OF CUTS Q240:
Number of passes which are to be made between point @I and
point @, or between point @ and point 0.

l FEED RATE FOR MILLING Q207:

Traversing speed of the tool when milling the first pass in mm/min.
The TNC calculates the feed rate for all subsequent passes depend-
ent on the stepover factor of the tool (offset less than tool diameter =
higher feed rate, high stepover factor = lower feed rate).

8-58 TNC 370

 8 Cycles
L-
8.6 Cycles for Multipass Milling

Examples for exercise

Milling a twisted surface

Input values for CYCL 231:

X coordinate point 1: +I20 mm (Q225)

Y coordinate point 1: +0 mm (Q226)
Z coordinate point 1: -10 mm (0227)
X coordinate point 2: +0 mm (0228)
Y coordinate point 2: +0 mm (0229)
Z coordinate point 2: +0 mm (Q230)
X coordinate point 3: +30 mm (Q231)
Y coordinate point 3: +60 mm (Q232)
Z coordinate point 3: -5 mm (0233)
X coordinate point 4: +I20 mm (Q234)
Y coordinate point 4: +85 mm (Q235)
Z coordinate point 4: -10 mm (Q236)
Feed rate: 250 mm/min (Q207)
Number of cuts: 17 (0240)

RULED SURFACE cycle in a pat-t program

0 BEGIN PGM 3702792 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+120 Y+85 Z+lO
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+5
4 TOOL CALL 1 Z S2500

5 L Z+200 RO F MAX M3 .. . .. . .. ... ... ... . . .. .. .... .. ... . Retract tool

6 L X+140 Y-20 RO F MAX . ... . ... ... ... . .. .... ... . . . . Pre-position tool in the vicinity of the starting point (plane)
7 L Z-5 RO F2000 .... .. ..___.......................................... Pre-position tool in Z axis

8 CYCL DEF 231 RULED SURFACE

Q225=+120
Q226=+0
Q227=-10
Q228=+0
Q229=+0
Q230=+0
Q231=+30
Q232=+60
Q233=-5
Q234=+120
Q235=+85
Q236=-10
Q240=17
Q207=250

9 CYCL CALL M3 . .. ... . .. . .. .. .. . . .... .. .. . ... . . ... . Cycle call, spindle ON

L
10 L Z+200 RO F MAX M2 .. .... ... ... .. ... ... ... .... ... .... ... .. Retract tool
11 END PGM 3702792 MM

L-

TNC 370 8-59

8 Cycles
4

8.7 Cycles for Coordinate Transformations

Coordinate transformations enable a programmed contour to be changed

in its position, orientation or size. The following coordinate transforma-
tion cycles are available:

7 DATUM SHIFT
Shift contours

8 MIRROR IMAGE
Mirror contours

10 ROTATION .^ \
Rotate contours in the working plane

11 SCALING FACTOR
Increase or reduce the size of contours

The original contour must be identified as a subprogram or program

section.

Activation of coordinate transformations

Immediate activation: A coordinate transformation becomes effective as
soon as it is defined (it does not have to be called). The transformation
remains effective until it is changed or cancelled.

To cancel a coordinate transformation:

l Define cycle for basic behavior with new values, such as scaling factor
1 .o
l Execute miscellaneous function M02, M30 or END PGM block
(depending on machine parameter 7300)
l Select a new program

-
8-60 TNC 370

4
 8 Cycles
8.7 Cycles for Coordinate Transformations

DATUM SHIFT (Cycle 7)

Application
With the aid of a datum shift, machining operations can be repeated at
various locations on the workpiece. If the datum shift is referenced to
the machine datum, you can clamp as many workpieces as desired on
the machine table, calculate the distance from the machine datum to the
datum of each workpiece and enter these values directly into the part
program with cycle 7.

Activation
When the DATUM SHIFT cycle has been defined, all coordinate data are
based on the new datum. Shifted axes are identified in the status.

input data Fig. 8.68: Activation of the datum shift

Only the coordinates of the new datum need to be entered. Absolute

values are based on the workpiece datum. If the coordinates of the new
datum are to be referenced to the machine datum, press the REF soft
key on the second soft-key row at the beginning of the cycle definition.
The TNC then identifies the first block of the cycle with REF.

Incremental values are based on the last valid datum: this datum can
itself be shifted
-

Fig. 8.69: Datum shift, absolute Fig. 8.70: Datum shift, incremental

.~ Cancellation
To cancel a datum shift, enter the datum shift coordinates X = 0, Y = 0
and Z = 0.

When combining transformations, program the &rum shift first.

@

TNC 370 8-61

8 Cycles

8.7 Cycles for Coordinate Transformations

Example: Datum shift

A machining sequence in the form of a

subprogram is to be executed twice:
a) once, referenced to the specified datum @
X+O/Y+O and
b) a second time, referenced to the shifted
datum @ X+4O/Y+60.

Cycle in a part program

3 BEGIN PGM 360833 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+1 00 Y+lOO Z+O
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+4
4 TOOL CALL 1 Z SIOOO
5 L Z+lOO RO FMAX
3 CALL LBL 1 _..,......................,............................. Without a datum shift
7 CYCL DEF 7.0 DATUM SHIFT
3 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+40
3 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+60
10 CALL LBL 1 _...................................................,... With a datum shift
11 CYCL DEF 7.0 DATUM SHIFT . .... ... .... ... ...___.._..Cancellation of datum shift
12 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+0
13 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+O
14 L Z+lOO RO FMAX M2
15 LBLI
16 LX-IO Y-IO RO FMAX M3
17 LZ+2FMAX
18 L Z-5 F200
19 LX+OY+O RL
20 LY+20
21 LX+25 Subprogram for the geometry of the original contour
22 L x+30 Y+15
23 LY+O
24 LX+0
25 LX-IO Y-IO RO
26 L Z+2 FMAX
27 LBL 0
28 END PGM 360833 MM

The location of the subprogram (NC block) depends on the transfor-

mation cycle:

LBL 1 LBL 0
Datum shift Block 15 Block 27
Mirror image, rotation, scaling Block 19 Block 31

8-62 TNC 370 -

 8 Cycles
8.7 Cycles for Coordinate Transformations

\
MIRROR IMAGE (Cycle 8)
Application
This cycle makes it possible to machine the mirror
image of a contour in the working plane.

Fig. 8.71: MIRROR IMAGE cycle

Activation
L
The MIRROR IMAGE cycle becomes active as
soon as it is defined:
Mirrored axes are identified in the status display by
L
the letter S.
l If one axis is mirrored, the machining direction
of the tool is reversed. This does not apply with
fixed cycles.
l If two axes are mirrored, the machining direc- :7
tion remains the same.

The mirror image depends on the location of the

datum:
l If the datum is located on the mirrored contour,
the part is mirrored directly at the datum.
l If the datum is located outside the mirrored Fig. 8.72: Multiple mirroring and milling direction
contour, the part is mirrored and also jumps to
another location.

Input data
Enter the axis that you wish to mirror. The tool axis
cannot be mirrored.

Cancellation
To cancel a mirror image, answer the dialog query
with NO ENT.

Fig. 8.73: Datum lies outside the mirrored contour

TNC 370 8-63

8 Cycles
J
8.7 Cycles for Coordinate Transformations

Example: Mirror image

r
A machining sequence (subprogram 1) is to be
executed once - as originally programmed -
referenced to the datum X+O/Y+O @ and then
again referenced to X+7O/Y+60 @ mirrored @
in X.

MIRROR IMAGE cycle in a part program

0 BEGIN PGM 360836 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+lOO Z+O
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+4
4 TOOL CALL 1 Z SIOOO
5 L Z+lOO RO FMAX
6 CALL LBL 1 . ... .... ... .... ... ... .. .... .. .... .... ... .... ..... ..... .. Not mirrored 0; mirrored execution sequence:
7 CYCL DEF 7.0 DATUM ... .. .... ... ... .... ... ..... .... ...... . 1. Datum shift @
8 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+70
9 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+60
10 CYCL DEF 8.0 MIRROR IMAGE ... . .... . . ..... ... . . 2. Mirror image @
11 CYCL DEF 8.1 X
12 CALL LBL 1 ... .. ... ... .... ... ... ...._._.....................___._..3. Subprogram call
13 CYCL DEF 8.0 MIRROR IMAGE . ... . .. .. ... . ..... . Cancel mirror image
14 CYCL DEF 8.1
15 CYCL DEF 7.0 DATUM ._.____._....._...._..........,,....,.Cancel datum shift
16 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+0
17 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+O
18 L Z+lOO RO FMAX M2
19 LBL 1
20 L X-IO Y-IO RO FMAX M3
21 L Z+2 FMAX
22 L Z-5 F200
23 L X+0 Y+O RL
24 L Y+20 This subprogram is identical to the subpro-
25 L X+25 gram on page 8-62
26 L x+30 Y+15
27 L Y+O
28 L x+0
29 LX-IO Y-IO RO
30 L Z+2 FMAX
31 LBL 0
32 END PGM 360836 MM

8-64 TNC 370 -

 8 Cycles
\
8.7 Cycles for Coordinate Transformations

\
ROTATION (Cycle 10)
Application
Within a program the coordinate system can be rotated about the active
datum in the working plane.

Activation
A rotation becomes active as soon as the cycle is defined. This cycle is
also effective in the POSITIONING WITH MANUAL INPUT mode.

Reference axis for the rotation angle:

l X/Y plane X axis
l VIZ plane Y axis
l Z/x plane Z axis
The active rotation angle is indicated in the status display with ROT.

Input data
The angle of rotation is entered in degrees (“).
Entry range: -360” to +360” (absolute or incremental)

Cancellation
L To cancel a rotation, enter a rotation angle of 0”.

Example: Rotation

A contour (subprogram 1) is to be executed

once - as originally programmed - referenced z
to the datum X+O/‘f+O and then executed again
referenced to X+70 Y+60 and rotated by 35”.
4

TNC 370 8-65

8 Cycles
4
8.7 Cycles for Coordinate Transformations

Cycle in a part program

0 BEGIN PGM 360838 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+1 00 Y+lOO Z+O
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+5
4 TOOL CALL 1 Z SIOOO
5 L Z+lOO RO FMAX
6 CALL LBL 1 . . ... .. . ... .. ... ... .. .... ... .. ... .. ... ... .... .... .. Non-rotated execution@
7 CYCL DEF 7.0 DATUM . ....._............................... Rotated execution. Sequence:
8 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+70
9 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+60 ._............._._._....................... 1. Datum shift @
10 CYCL DEF 10.0 ROTATION ,.....,........__._..,...,..... 2. Rotation @
11 CYCL DEF 10.1 ROT +35
12 CALL LBL 1 .... ... ... .._........................................... 3. Subprogram call
13 CYCL DEF 10.0 ROTATION . ..__...............__...... Cancel rotation
14 CYCL DEF 10.1 ROT0
15 CYCL DEF 7.0 DATUM . .... ... ... ... .. ... .. ... .... ... .... .. Cancel datum shift
16 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+0
17 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+O
18 L Z+lOO RO FMAX M2
19 LBL 1
.
.
.
LBL 0
END PGM 360838 MM

The corresponding subprogram (see page 8-62) is programmed after

M02.

SCALING FACTOR (Cycle 11)

Application
This cycle allows you to increase or reduce the size of contours within a -
program, such as for shrinkage or finishing allowances.

Activation
A scaling factor becomes effective as soon as the cycle is defined
Scaling factors can be applied
4
l in the working plane, or to all three coordinate axes at the same time
(depending on MP7410)
l to the dimensions in cycles
l also in the parallel axes U, V, W d
The scaling factor is indicated in the status display with SCL.

Input data
The cycle is defined by entering the scaling factor SCL. The TNC multi-
plies the coordinates and radii by the SCL factor (as described under
“Activation” above).
To increase the size: enter SCL greater than 1 (max. 99.999 999)
To reduce the size: enter SCL less than 1 (down to 0.000 001)

Cancellation
To cancel a scaling factor, enter a scaling factor of 1.

Prerequisite
Before entering a scaling factor it is advisable to set the datum to an
edge or corner of the contour.
d
8-66 TNC 370
 8 Cycles
\
8.7 Cycles for Coordinate Transformations

Example: Scaling factor

A contour (subprogram 1) is to be executed

once - as originally programmed - at the
manually set datum X+O/Y+O and then executed
again referenced to the position X+6OJY+70 and
with a scaling factor of 0.8.

SCALING FACTOR cycle in a part program

0 BEGIN PGM 360839 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+O Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+lOO Z+O
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+O R+5
4 TOOL CALL 1 Z SIOOO
5 L Z+lOO RO FMAX
6 CALL LBL 1 .. . . . ..._............................................. Execution at original size @
7 CYCL DEF 7.0 DATUM . .. ... ... .... ... .... .. ... ... .. ... .... . Execution with scaling factor. Sequence:
8 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+60
9 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+70 . .. ... .. ... ... ..... .. .... .. ... ... ... .. .... . 1. Datum shift @
L
10 CYCL DEF 11 .O SCALING .. .. ...___.__....................2. Define scaling factor @
11 CYCL DEF 11 .I SCL 0.8
12 CALL LBL 1 .. ... ..... .... .. ... ... ... .. ..... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... . 3. Call subprogram (scaling factor active)
13 CYCL DEF 11 .O SCALING ... .. .._......................... Cancel transformations
14 CYCLDEF 11.1 SCL 1
15 CYCL DEF 7.0 DATUM
16 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+0
17 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+O
18 L Z+lOO RO FMAX M2
19 LBLI
20 L X-l 0 Y-l 0 RO FMAX M3
21 L Z+2 FMAX
22 L Z-5 F200
23 L X+0 Y+O RL
24 L Y+20
25 LX+25
26 L X+30 Y+15
27 LY+O
28 LX+0
29 LX-IO Y-IO RO
30 L Z+2 FMAX
31 LBLO
32 END PGM 360839 MM

TNC 370 8-67

8 Cvcles
4

8.8 Special Cycles

4
DWELL TIME (Cycle 9)
Application
-/
Within a running program, the execution of the next block is delayed by
the programmed dwell time.

The dwell time cycle can be used, for example, for chip breaking.

Activation
This cycle becomes effective as soon as it is defined. Modal conditions
(such as a spindle rotation) are not affected.

Input data
A dwell time is entered in seconds.
Entry range: 0 to 30 000 s (approx. 8.3 hours) in increments of 0.001 s.

PROGRAM CALL (Cycle 12)

Application and activation
Part programs such as special drilling cycles, curve milling or geometric
modules, can be written as main programs and then called for use just
like fixed cycles.

Input data
Enter the file name of the program to be called.

The program is called with

l CYCL CALL (separate block) or
l M99 (blockwise) or
l M89 (modally)

Example: Program call

A callable program (program 50) is to be called into a program with a
cycle call. d

I Part program
.
.
4

.
CYCL DEF 12.0 PGM CALL ....................................... Definition:
CYCL DEF 12.1 PGM 50 ............................................ “Program 50 is a cycle”
L X+20 Y+50 FMAX M99 .......................................... Call of program 50
.
.
.

8-68 TNC 370

 8 Cycles
L
8.8 Special Cycles

ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP (Cycle 13)

Application
The control can address the machine tool spindle as a 5th axis and turn
it to a certain angular position. Oriented spindle stops are required for:
l Tool changing systems with a defined tool change position
l Orientation of the transmitter/receiver window of the TS 630 Touch
i Probe System from HEIDENHAIN

Activation
L The angle of orientation defined in the cycle is positioned to with M19. If
Ml 9 is executed without a cycle definition, the machine tool spindle will
be oriented to the angle set in the machine parameters.
Fig. 8.74: Oriented spindle stop

& Oriented spindle stops can alto be programmed in machine parameters.

‘-

Prerequisite

L
The machine must be set up for this cycle.

Input data
Angle of orientation (based on the angle reference axis of the working
plane)
Input range: 0 to 360”
Input resolution: 0.1’

TNC 370 &69

\
9 3D Touch Probes

9.1 General Information on Touch Probes ............................... ............. 9-2

TS 120 Triggering touch probe ................................................................................ 9-2
TS 630 Triggering touch probe ................................................................................ 9-2
lT 120 Touch probe for tool measurement ............................................................. 9-3

‘.

9.2 Touch Probe Cycles in the MANUAL and

ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL Operating Modes ............................... 9-4
L 9-4
To select the touch probe functions.. .......................................................................
Calibrating a triggering 3D touch probe ................................................................... 9-5
Compensating workpiece misalignment .................................................................. 9-7
Setting the datum with the 3D touch probe system ................................................ 9-9

.- 9.3 Measuring Workpieces with a 3D Touch Probe ............................ 9-14

Finding the coordinate of a position on an aligned workpiece .............................. 9-l 4
Finding the coordinates of a corner in the working plane ..................................... 9-14
L
Measuring workpiece dimensions .......................................................................... 9-l 5
Measuring angles ................................................................................................... 9-l 6
Measuring with the 3D touch probe during program run ...................................... 9-l 8
L

9.4 Digitizing with a Triggering 3D Touch Probe (Optional) .............. 9-21

Defining the digitizing range ................................................................................... 9-22
Input data ................................................................................................................ 9-22
Setting the scanning range ................................................................................... .9-22
Line-by-line digitizing with Cycle 6 MEANDER ...................................................... 9-24
Contour line digitizing with Cycle 7 CONTOUR LINES.. ....................................... 9-26
Input data ................................................................................................................ 9-27

9.5 Using Digitized Data in a Part Program .............. . .......................... 9-29

Executing a part program from digitized data ....................................................... 9-30

9.7 Measuring Tools with the lT 120 Touch Probe ............................ 9-31
Calibrating the lT 120 ............................................................................................ 9-33
Measuring the tool length ....................................................................................... 9-34
Measuring the tool radius ....................................................................................... 9-36
9 3D Touch Probes

9.1 General Information on Touch Probes

J

The TNC supports the use of a HEIDENHAIN touch probe system.

Typical applications for touch probe systems are automatic datum
setting, fully automatic tool measurement and digitizing 3D surfaces.
The following 3D touch probe systems are available:

l TS 120 triggering touch probe for cost-effective digitizing

l TS 630 triggering touch probe for machines with automatic tool
changers
l lT 120 tool touch probe for measurement and inspection of tools

TS 120 Triggering touch probe

The TS 120 is a cost-effective alternative for applications where digitiz-

ing is not frequently required. The TS 120 touch probe provides digitizing
speeds up to 300 millimeters per minute (at a probe point interval of 0.5
mm).

The triggering touch probe design utilizes an electrical triggering signal

that is generated as soon as the stylus is deflected. The touch probe
transmits the signal to the TNC through the connecting cable. Within J

fractions of a second the TNC calculates the actual position of the touch
probe from the machine’s position encoders and stores the position
data. It then generates a program containing straight line blocks in .-
HEIDENHAIN format from the measured data. This program is output
through the data interface and stored in a PC. You can subsequently
use the HEIDENHAIN SUSA evaluation software for processing the
digitized data, such as to calculate male/female transformations, tool
paths for tool radii and tool shapes that differ from the shape of the
Fig. 9.1 TS 120 triggering touch probe
probe stylus tip.

You can also use the TS 120 touch probe in conjunction with the TNC’s
touch probe cycles for easy datum setting or workpiece measurement.

TS 630 Triggering touch probe

The TS 630 features infrared transmission of the triggering signal to the

TNC. This makes it highly convenient for use on machines with automat- .-

ic tool changers. Functioning of the TS 630 touch probe is based on the

same principle as the TS 120 touch probe.
4
You can also use the TS 630 in conjunction with the TNC’s touch probe
cycles for easy datum setting or workpiece measurement.

Fig. 9.2 TS 630 triggering touch probe

9-2 TNC 370

 9 3D Touch Probes
i-
9.1 General Information on Touch Probes

lT 120 Touch probe for tool measurement

The lT 120 is a triggering 3D touch probe for tool measurement and Format Converter.
inspection. The measured data can be stored in the central tool file 7:35:02 1994
(depending on machine parameter MP 6507).

As with the TS 120 and TS 630, the triggering signal is generated by a

friction-free optoelectronic switch.

The lT 120 is generally mounted on the machine table. The exact

position within the REF system is defined in the TNC with machine
parameters. Thanks to its rugged design and high protection class
(IP 67). the probe is not affected by coolants or swarf.

Your TNC provides three cycles for this touch probe with which you can
measure the tool length and radius automatically - either with the
spindle rotating or stopped. Fig. 9.3 TT 120 tool touch probe

TNC 370 9-3

-
9 3D Touch Probes
4

9.2 Touch Probe Cycles in the MANUAL and ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL

Operating Modes d

73 The TNC must be specially prepared by the ma&km Tooi buildw for the use of e 3D touch probe. d

After you press the NC start key, the touch probe begins executing the
selected probe function. The machine tool builder sets the feed rate F at
which the probe approaches the workpiece (MP 6120). When the 3D
touch probe contacts the workpiece, it
l transmits a signal to the TNC:
The coordinates of the probed position are stored
l stops moving
l returns to its starting position in rapid traverse.

If the stylus in not deflected within the distance defined in MP6130, the
TNC displays an error message.

Fig. 9.4: Feed rates during probing

To select the touch probe functions

Select the touch probe functions.

FWltiiCMl
Compensating workpiece misalignment

Datum setting in any axis

Setting a corner as datum

Setting the datum at a circle center ( .-PROBING/

Calibrating the effective length )jcnL\\

Calibrating the effective radius

J
9-4 TNC 370
 9 3D Touch Probes
L/-
9.2 Touch Probe Cycles in the MANUAL and ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL Operating Modes

Calibrating a triggering 3D touch probe

The touch probe system must be calibrated
l for commissioning
l after a stylus breaks
l when the stylus is changed
l when the probe feed rate is changed
l in case of irregularities, such as those resulting from machine
heating.

During calibration, the control finds the “effective” length of the stylus
and the “effective” radius of the ball tip. To calibrate the 3D touch probe,
clamp a ring gauge with known height and known internal radius to the
machine table.

To calibrate the effective length Fig. 9.5: Calibrating the touch probe length
Set the datum in the tool axis such that for the machine tool table, Z=O.

Select the calibration function for the touch probe length.

e.g.1 2 ) If necessary, enter the tool axis, for example Z.

Move the highlight to DATUM.

0
e.g. Enter the height of the ring gauge, for example 5 mm
0

Move the touch probe to a position just above the ring gauge. I

0-o or If necessary, change the displayed traverse direction.

\
The 3D touch probe contacts the upper surface of the ring gauge.

TNC 370 9-5

9 3D Touch Probes
9.2 Touch Probe Cycles in the MANUAL and ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL Operating Modes

To calibrate the effective radius

Position the ball tip in the bore hole of the ring gauge.

Fig. 9.6: Calibrating the touch probe radius

Select the calibration function for the ball-tip radius.

Select RADIUS RING GAUGE.

Enter the radius of the ring gauge, for example 5 mm

,
The 3D touch probe contacts one position on the bore for each axis
direction. -
J

Displaying calibration values

4
The TNC 370 stores the effective length and radius of the 3D touch
probe for use whenever the touch probe is needed again. The stored
values are displayed the next time the calibration function is called.
4

-/
9-6 TNC 370

4
9 3D Touch Probes
9.2 Touch Probe Cycles in the MANUAL and ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL Operating Modes

Compensating workpiece misalignment

The TNC 370 electronically compensates work-
piece misalignment by computing a “basic rota-
tion”.

Set the ROTATION ANGLE to the angle at which

a workpiece surface should be oriented with
respect to the angle reference axis (see page
l-21).

I
Fig. 9.7: Basic rotation of a workpiece, probing procedure for
compensation (right). The dashed line is the nominal
position; the angle PA is being compensated.

3
Select the probe function for compensating workpiece misalignment.

Enter the nominal value of the ROTATION ANGLE.

Move the ball tip to a starting position @ near the first touch point 0.
J

x+ x- Y+ Y-
Select the probe direction.
ooro I
Probe the workpiece

I J

Move the ball tip to a starting position @ near the second touch point 0.

Probe the workpiece.

A basic rotation is kept in nonvolatile storage and is effective for all

subsequent program runs and graphic test runs.

TNC 370 s-7

9 3D Touch Probes
V
9.2 Touch Probe Cycles in the MANUAL and ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL Operating Modes

Displaying basic rotation

BRSIC ROTATION a
The angle of the basic rotation is shown in the
rotation angle display. When a basic rotation is EJ[3 x- Y+ Y-
active the abbreviation ROT is highlighted in the : )
status display.

ACTL. )( -25,500 T
+21,325 q 0 Emi
; +150,000 M5/9
C +90,000

Fig. 9.8: Displaying the angle of an active basic rotation

To cancel a basic rotation

-
I
J
Set the ROTATION ANGLE to 0.
J

-
Terminate the probing function.

9-8 TNC 370

 9 3D Touch Probes
9.2 Touch Probe Cycles in the MANUAL and ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL Operating Modes

Setting the datum with the 3D touch probe system

The following functions for setting the datum on an aligned workpiece
.
are listed in the TCH PROBE menu and are selected with the appropri-
ate soft keys:

To set the datum in a specific axis

Fig. 9.9: Probing for the datum in the Z axis

Select the probe function for datum setting in any axis.

Move the touch probe to a starting position near the touch point.

I 0 Or0 Select the probing direction and the axis in which you wish to set the
datum, for example Z in the Z- direction. J

Probe the workpiece.

Enter the nominal coordinate of the DATUM and confirm with ENT.

.-

TNC 370 9-9

9 3D Touch Probes
9.2 Touch Probe Cycles in the MANUAL and ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL Operating Modes

Setting a corner as datum

-/

-/

Fig. 9.10: Probing procedure for finding the coordinates of the

corner P

Select the probe function for setting a corner as datum. 7

To use the points that were just probed for a basic rotation

Transfer the touch point coordinates to memory.

c I -

Move the touch probe to a starting position near the first touch point on the side that was not probed for basic
._I
rotation.

\
CORNEB. = DATUM -

x+ x- Y* Y-
i
Select the probing direction.
g -

, -
Probe the workpiece.

Move the touch probe to a starting position near the second touch point on the same side.
d
/ \
Probe the workpiece.

Enter the first coordinate of the datum point, for example in the X
axis. Confirm with ENT.

9-l 0 TNC 370

 9 3D Touch Probes
L
9.2 Touch Probe Cycles in the MANUAL and ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL Operating Modes

Select the second coordinate.

r -3

DATUM Y=
i ,,, J
Enter the second coordinate of the datum, for example in the Y axis.
Confirm with ENT.

Terminate the probe function.

If you do not wish to use points that were just probed for a basic rotation
/ \
TOUCH I%M.NTSOF BASIC ROTATIOW!
J
Ignore the dialog prompt.
j

Probe both workpiece sides twice.

1

I Enter the datum coordinates. I

TNC 370 9-l 1

9 3D Touch Probes
e
9.2 Touch Probe Cycles in the MANUAL and ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL Operating Modes

Setting the datum at a circle center

With this function you can set the datum at the center of bore holes,
d
circular pockets, cylinders, journals, circular islands etc.

Inside circle
The TNC 370 automatically probes the inside wall in all four coordinate
Y
axis directions.
1

I@
For incomplete circles (circular arcs) you can choose the appropriate
probing direction.
Y+
,c) .. x- 1.c x+
0
Y-

8 X
Fig. 9.11: Probing an inside cylindrical
surface to find the center

Move the touch probe to a position approximately in the center of the circle

J
The probe touches four points on the inside of the circle.

Enter the first coordinate of the circle center, for example in the
X axis. Confirm with ENT.

Select the second coordinate. 4

Enter the second coordinate of the circle center for example in the
Y axis. Confirm with ENT. --
,

e.g. Terminate the probe function.

B .’

9-12 TNC 370

 9 3D Touch Probes
\-
9.2 Touch Probe Cycles in the MANUAL and ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL Operating Modes

Outside circle

I
Fig. 9.12: Probing an outside cylindrical
surface to find the center

Select the probe function for datum setting at a circle center.

Move the touch probe to a starting position near the first touch point @ outside of the circle.

Select the probing direction.

Probe the workpiece.

Repeat the probing process for points 0, @ and @ (see Fig. 9.12).
I

Enter the coordinates of the circle center. I

After the probing procedure is completed, the TNC displays the current
coordinates of the circle center and the circle radius PR.

TNC 370 9-13

9 3D Touch Probes
4

--/

9.3 Measuring Workpieces with a 3D Touch Probe

d
With the 3D touch probe system you can determine
l Position coordinates, and from them,
l dimensions and angles on the workpiece.
--

Finding the coordinate of a position on an aligned workpiece

Select the probe function for datum setting in any axis.

1 Move the touch probe to a starting position near the touch point.

Select the probing direction and the axis in which you wish to find
the coordinate. I

Probe the workpiece.

The TNC displays the coordinates of the touch point as DATUM.

Finding the coordinates of a corner in the working plane

Find the coordinates of the corner point as described under “Setting a
corner as datum.”
The TNC displays the coordinates of the probed corner as DATUM

9-14 TNC 370 -

9 3D Touch Probes
9.3 Measuring Workpieces with a 3D Touch Probe

Measuring workpiece dimensions

Fig. 9.13: Measuring lengthswith the

3D touch probe

1 Select the probe function for setting the datum in any axis. I

Select the probing direction with the arrow keys

Probe the workpiece

If you will need the current datum later, write down the value that appears in the DATUM display.

Set the DATUM to 0 and confirm with ENT.

Terminate the dialog.

I

Re-select the probe function for datum setting in any axis.

Move the touch probe to a starting position @ near the second touch point.
I
.

TNC 370 9-15

9 3D Touch Probes
-
9.3 Measuring Workpieces with a 3D Touch Probe

Select the probing direction with the arrow keys -

same axis as for 0,

Probe the workpiece.

The value displayed as DATUM is the distance between the two points
on the coordinate axis.

To return to the datum that was active before the length measurement:

Select the probe function for datum setting in any axis.

Probe the first touch point again. 7

[ Set the DATUM to the value that you wrote down previously. I

-
Terminate the dialog.

Measuring angles
You can also use the 3D touch probe system to measure angles in the
working plane. You can measure
l the angle between the angle reference axis and a workpiece side, or
l the angle between two sides.
The measured angle is displayed as a value of maximum 90”.

To find the angle between the angle reference axis and a side of the workpiece:

If you will need the current basic rotation later, write down the value that appears under ROTATION ANGLE. I

9-16 TNC 370 -

 9 3D Touch Probes
L
9.3 Measuring Workpieces with a 3D Touch Probe

The angle between the angle reference axis and the side of the workpiece appears as the ROTATION ANGLE in
the BASIC ROTATION function. I

I --------------------------------
Cancel the basic rotation.

Restore the previous basic rotation by setting the ROTATION ANGLE to the value that you wrote down
1

To measure the angle between two sides of a workpiece:

Fig. 9.14: Measuring the angle between two

sides of a workpiece

Select the probe function for compensating workpiece misalignment.

L
If you will need the current basic rotation later, write down the value that appears under ROTATION ANGLE.
I

L
Make a basic rotation for the first side (see “Compensating workpiece misalignment”).

Probe the second side as for a basic rotation, but do not set the ROTATION ANGLE to zero! i

I The angle PA between

tion.
the workpiece sides appears as the ROTATION ANGLE in the BASIC ROTATION func-

I Cancel the basic rotation. ~~~~~ -~--

Restore the previous basic rotation by setting the ROTATION ANGLE to the value that you wrote down
previously. J

TNC 370 9-17

9 3D Touch Probes
d
9.3 Measuring Workpieces with a 3D Touch Probe

Measuring with the 3D touch probe during program run

The 3D touch probe can measure positions on a workpiece during J
program run.

Applications:
l Measuring differences in the height of cast surfaces
l Checking tolerances during machining
To activate the touch probe, press the TOUCH PROBE key. You pre-
position the probe, which then automatically probes the specified
position. The coordinate measured for the probe point is stored in a Q
parameter.

The control interrupts the probing process if the probe is not deflected
within a certain range (range selected with MP 6130). Upon contact, the
position coordinates of the probe are stored in the parameter 0115 to
0119. The values in these parameters do not include the stylus length Fig. 9.15: Dimensions to be measured
or radius.

To program the use of a touch probe -

-l
Select the touch probe function.
pEgbf E)
L J

t 1

PARAm= NUMBER FURRESULT?

i i

Enter the number of the Q parameter to which the coordinate is to

e.g.0 EIy
be assigned, for example 05.
L J
,
PRoBIlyG AxH.@ROBING IDIRECmON?
i

Enter the probing axis for the coordinate, for example X.

e.g.
i-’
X > Select and confirm the probing direction. 4

e.g. 0 Ey
4

9-18 TNC 370 -

 9 3D Touch Probes
L
9.3 Measuring Workpieces with a 3D Touch Probe

Enter all coordinates of the pre-positioning point values, for example

X=5mm,Y=O,Z=-5mm.
ix)P

Conclude input.

Resulting NC blocks:
TCH PROBE 0.0 REF. PLANE 05 X-
TCH PROBE 0.1 x+5 Y+O z-5

TNC 370 S-l 9

9 30 Touch Probes
4
9.3 Measuring Workpieces with a 3D Touch Probe

Example for exercise: Measuring the height of an island on a workpiece

Coordinates for pre-positioning the 3D touch

probe
Touch point 1: X = +20 mm (all)
Y = 50 mm(Q12)
2 = 10 mm (Q13)
Touch point 2: X = +50 mm (021)
Y = 10 mm(Q22)
z = 0 mm (Q23)

Part program:

3 BEGIN PGM 3600717 MM

1 FNO:Qll =+20 7
2 FNO: Q12 = + 50
3 FNO: 013 = + 10 Begin the program; assign the coordinates for pre-
4 FNO: Q21 = + 50 positioning the touch probe to Q parameters
5 FNO: 022 = + 10
3 FNO: Q23 = + 0 i
7 TOOL CALL 0 Z
3 L Z+lOO RO FMAX M6 ..___.......................... Insert touch probe
3 TCH PROBE 0.0 REF.PLANE QIO Z-
10 TCH PROBE 0.1 X+Qll Y+Q12 Z+Q13 . ... .... ..The Z coordinate probed in the negative direction is stored in
QIO (1 st point)
11 L X+021 Y+Q22 Auxiliary point for second pre-positioning
12 TCH PROBE 0.0 REF.PLANE Q20 Z-
13 TCH PROBE 0.1 X+Q21 Y+Q22 Z+Q23 .... .... ..The Z coordinate probed in the negative direction is stored in
020 (2nd point)
14 FN2: 01 = Q20-QIO . .. . . ... . . .. ... ... .. . .. . . . . .. . .. Measure the height of the island and assign to 01
15 STOP . .. .. .._._............__.........___..........__._.........___..01 can be checked after the program run has been stopped
(see page 7-11)
16 L Z+lOO RO FMAX M2
17 END PGM 3600717 MM . ...__._........._................ Retract the tool and end the program

9-20 TNC 370

 9 3D Touch Probes
L

9.4 Digitizing with a Triggering 3D Touch Probe (Optional)

The digitizing option enables you to reduce a three dimensional part
model into discrete digital information by scanning it with a triggering 3D
touch probe.

The following components are required for digitizing:

l Triggering 3D touch probe
l The “Digitizing option” software module in the TNC
l External data storage, such as:
The HEIDENHAIN FE 401 floppy disk unit
or
L- PC (IBM or compatible) with HEIDENHAIN TNC.EXE data transfer
software

The surface data resulting from digitizing can be evaluated with the
l SUSA evaluation software from HEIDENHAIN for IBM-compatible PCs.

* The TNC and the machine ~QQI must be prepared by the machinetool builderfor the use of a triggering 3D
touch probe.

Principle
The touch probe scans a 3D surface point for point in a selectable grid.
L The scanning speeds vary from 200 to 600 mm/min.

The TNC transmits the digitized positions as straight-line blocks in

HEIDENHAIN format. The MOD function (see page 1 I-5) determines
where the blocks are stored.

Generating programs with digitized data

The TNC automatically converts the digitized data into an NC part
program. Such a program can be run without further processing, provid-
L ed that the cutter has the same radius as the probe stylus tip.

The HEIDENHAIN evaluation software SUSA calculates male/female

transformations and tool paths for tool radii and tool shapes that differ
L
from the shape of the probe stylus tip.

\ Digitizing cycles
The following digitizing cycles are available:
l TCH PROBE 5 RANGE For fixing the scanning range
. TCH PROBE 6 MEANDER For digitizing line by line
l TCH PROBE 7 CONTOUR LINES For digitizing level by level

L
Transferring digitized data
The digitized data are stored in a file which you name in Cycle 5: RANGE.

* The digitizing cycles operate in HEIDENHAIN conversational dialog.

* Digitizing cycfes are programmedonly for the main axes X, Y and 2.
L l Coordinate transformations or a basic r&Won must not be active during digitizing.

TNC 370 9-21

9 3D Touch Probes
9.4 Digitizing with a Triggering 30 Touch Probe (Optional)

Defining the digitizing range

The digitizing range is defined in the RANGE cycle. The model to be
scanned must lie within this range. In this cycle you also enter the name
of the file for the digitized data, as well as a clearance height for pre-
positioning the touch probe.

1 MiN
Fig. 9.16: Clearance height and digitizing
range

Input data
l PGM NAME OF DIGITIZED DATA
Name of the file in which the digitized data is to be stored
. MIN POINT OF RANGE
Lowest coordinates in the range to be digitized
l MAX POINT OF RANGE
Highest coordinates in the range to be digitized
. CLEARANCE HEIGHT
Position in probe axis at which the stylus cannot collide with the model

,-
Setting the scanning range

Select probing functions.

Select RANGE digitizing cycle.

Enter the name of the file in which the digitizing data should be stored and confirm with ENT. I4

TCH PROBEAXIS ?

Enter the touch probe axis and confirm with ENT.

9-22 TNC 370

 9 3D Touch Probes
L
9.4 Digitizing with a Triggering 3D Touch Probe (Optional)

.
.
.

fMmpomoF-GE? 1
c e4.a
Iy1 Enter in sequence the X, Y and Z coordinates of the range MIN point.
,

Enter in sequence the X, Y and Z coordinates of the range MAX

point.

Enter the clearance height for the touch probe.

Resulting NC blocks:

TCH PROBE 5.0 RANGE

TCH PROBE 5.1 PGM NAME: DATA
TCH PROBE 5.2 Z X+0 Y+OZ+O
TCH PROBE 5.3 x+10 Y+lOZ+20
TCH PROBE 5.4 HEIGHT: + 100

TNC 370 9-23

9 3D Touch Probes
4
9.4 Digitizing with a Triggering 3D Touch Probe (Optional)

Line-by-line digitizing with Cycle 6 MEANDER

The MEANDER cycle scans and digitizes a 3D
contour in a back-and-forth series of parallel lines.
This method is best suited for digitizing relatively
flat surfaces. If you want to use the SUSA evalua-
tion software to further process the data, you must
use the MEANDER cycle.

Starting at the MIN point of the working plane, the

touch probe moves in the positive direction of the
selected axis of the working plane. When it reaches
the range limit, it moves by the line spacing in the
positive direction of the other axis and then travels
back along this line. This process is repeated until
the entire range has been scanned.

Once the entire range has been scanned, the Fig. 9.17: Digitizing with the MEANDER cycle
touch probe returns to the CLEARANCE HEIGHT.

Starting position
l Coordinates from the RANGE cycle:
X and Y coordinates of the MIN point
Z coordinate = CLEARANCE HEIGHT
l Automatically move to the starting position:
first in Z to CLEARANCE HEIGHT, then in X and Y

Contour approach
The touch probe moves in the negative Z direction toward the model.
When it makes contact, the TNC stores position coordinates.

Input data
l LINE DIRECTION
Coordinate axis in whose positive direction the touch probe moves
from the first contour point.
. LIMIT IN NORMAL LINES DIRECTION
Distance by which the touch probe lifts off the model surface after
each deflection of the stylus during scanning.
Input range: 0 to 5 mm
Recommended input value: Enter an input value between half the
PROBE POINT INTERVAL and the PROBE POINT INTERVAL. The
smaller the ball tip radius, the larger the LIMIT IN NORMAL LINES
DIRECTION should be programmed.
l LINE SPACING
The offset by which the probe moves at the end of each line before
scanning the next line.
Input range: 0 to 5 mm
. MAX. PROBE POINT INTERVAL
Maximum spacing between consecutive digitized positions.
Input range: 0.02 to 5 mm

9-24 TNC 370

 9 3D Touch Probes
L
9.4 Digitizing with a Triggering 3D Touch Probe (Optional)

To program TCH PROBE 6.0:

1 m---Ey Select the probing functions.

Select the MEANDER digitizing cycle.

cLImDlRECTIQM
2 J
Enter the line direction, for example X.

Enter the distance of travel by which the probe lifts off the surface
during scanning, for example 0.5 mm. I

L
Enter the maximum probe point interval, for example 0.8 mm.

Resulting NC blocks:
TCH PROBE 6.0 MEANDER
L
TCH PROBE 6.1 DIRECTN: X
TCH PROBE 6.2 TRAVEL: 0.5 L.SPAC: 0.2
PP.INT: 0.8

t!!i Before you enter Cycle 6: MEANDER, the program must have a range defined in digitizing Cycle 5: RANGE.

TNC 370 9-25

9 3D Touch Probes
4
9.4 Digitizing with a Triggering 3D Touch Probe (Optional)

Contour line digitizing with Cycle 7 CONTOUR LINES

The CONTOUR LINES cycle scans a 3D contour 4
by circling around the model in a series of upwardly
successive levels. This cycle is particularly useful
for digitizing steep contours, such as the gating of
injection molding dies, or for digitizing a single J
contour line, such as the contour of a cam disk.

The touch probe starts scanning in the direction

that you entered as STARTING PROBE AXIS AND
DIRECTION at a constant height. When the touch
probe has orbited the form and returned to the first
probe point, it moves in the positive or negative
direction of the probe axis by the value of the LINE
SPACING. The process is repeated for the rest of
the range.

Once the entire range has been scanned, the

touch probe returns to the CLEARANCE HEIGHT Fig. 9.18: Digitizing with the CONTOUR LINES cycle
and the programmed starting position. 1 : LSPAC -

Limits of the scanning range

-
l In the touch probe axis:
The defined RANGE must be lower than the highest point of the 3D
model by at least the radius of the probe tip.
l In the plane perpendicular to the touch probe:
The defined RANGE must be larger than the 3D model by at least the
radius of the probe tip.
-,

Starting position
l Z coordinate of the MIN point from the RANGE cycle, if the LINE
SPACING is entered as a positive value, or Z coordinate of the MAX
POINT if the LINE SPACING was entered as a negative value.
l Define X and Y coordinates in the CONTOUR LINES cycle
0 Automatically approach the starting point:
first in Z to the CLEARANCE HEIGHT, then in X and Y
-

Contour approach
The touch probe moves toward the surface in the programmed direction
d
When it makes contact, the TNC stores position coordinates.

9-26 TNC 370

 9 3D Touch Probes
L
9.4 Digitizing with a Triggering 3D Touch Probe (Optional)

--
Input data
. TIME LIMIT
Time within which the touch probe must orbit the model and reach the
first touch point to within on quarter of the programmed probe point
interval. If the entered time limit is exceeded, the TNC interrupts the
digitizing cycle.
Input range: 0 to 7200 seconds
An input value of 0 means there is no time limit.
STARTING POINT
Coordinates of the starting position in the plane perpendicular to the
probe axis.
AXIS AND DIRECTION OF APPROACH
Coordinate axis and direction in which the probe approaches the
model.
STARTING PROBE AXIS AND DIRECTION
Coordinate axis and direction in which the probe begins scanning the
model. Defining the direction at the same time determines whether the
subsequent machining operation is performed by up-cut or climb
milling.
. LIMIT IN NORMAL LINES DIRECTION
Distance by which the touch probe moves away from the model
surface after each deflection of the stylus during scanning.
Input range: 0 to 5 mm
Recommended input value: Enter an input value between half the
PROBE POINT INTERVAL and the PROBE POINT INTERVAL. The
smaller the ball tip radius, the larger the LIMIT IN NORMAL LINES
DIRECTION should be programmed.
LINE SPACING AND DIRECTION
The offset by which the probe moves to start a new contour line after
completing the previous one. The algebraic sign sets the direction.
Input range: -5 to +5 mm
MAX. PROBE POINT INTERVAL
Maximum distance between digitized positions.
Input range: 0.02 to 5 mm

To program TCH PROBE 7.0:

,
Select the probing functions.

Select the CONTOUR LINES digitizing cycle.

Enter the time limit within which one contour line must be scanned,
1
for example 200 seconds.

TNC 370 9-27

9 3D Touch Probes
u,
9.4 Digitizing with a Triggering 3D Touch Probe (Optional)

.
J

STARrnG mm P
Enter the coordinates of the starting position, e.g., X = 50 mm 4

Y = 0, and confirm your entry.

Enter the approach direction, for example Y-.

Enter the starting direction, for example X+.

e.g.

Enter the distance of travel by which the probe moves away from the
surface during scanning, for example 0.5 mm.

Enter the line spacing, e.g. 1 mm. The algebraic sign determines the
direction in which the probe moves to start the next contour line.

e.g.~O~ Enter the maximum probe point interval, for example 0.2 mm.

Resulting NC blocks:
TCH PROBE 7.0 CONTOUR LINES
TCH PROBE 7.1 TIME: 200 X+50 Y+O
TCH PROBE 7.2 ORDER Y-/x+
TCH PROBE 7.3 TRAVEL: 0.5 L.SPAC: -1 PP.INT: 0.2

!I!!4 Before Cycte 7 CONTUUR LINES, the program must have a range definad in digitizing Cycle 5: RANGE.
 9 3D Touch Probes
L
9.4 Digitizing with a Triggering 3D Touch Probe (Optional)

The TNC generates an NC part program from the digitized data. The
program name is entered in the scanning cycle RANGE.

During program execution, the tool radius determines the shape of the
machined contour.

When the tool radius equals the effective probe tip radius
The program can be run without any changes. The model that has been
scanned is reproduced.

When the tool radius does not equal the effective probe tip radius
The machined part is either smaller or larger than the model. With the
SUSA evaluation software from HEIDENHAIN, you can restore the
original size if the model has been scanned in the MEANDER scanning
cycle.

9.5 Using Digitized Data in a Part Program

Program example with digitized data from the CONTOUR LINES cycle

0 BEGIN PGM DATA MM ..................................... Program name DATA.H is entered in the RANGE cycle.
1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y-25 Z-14.976
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+125 Y+57.5 Z+O.254 ............ Blank form definition for graphic test run
3 L Z+40 FMAX ..................................................... Starting point in Z
4 L X+0 Y-25 FMAX ............................................. Starting point in X, Y
5 L X+0 Y-l 2.561 ................................................. 1 st digitized position
6 L X+2.025 Y-l 2.375 .......................................... 2nd digitized position

L X+2.005 Y-l 2.560 .. ... .... ....____.__......................Contour line is completely digitized: Probe has reached the
1 st digitized position

L Z+O.5 X+0 Y-l 0.423 1 st digitized position on the new contour line

L X+0 Y-l 2.560 _._______.____,___.,,.,...,......................

Last digitized position

L X+0 Y-25 FMAX ............................................. Back to starting point X, Y

L Z+40 FMAX ..................................................... Back to clearance height
END PGM DATA MM ......................................... Program end

Note:
l The feed rate of the touch probe system for approaching the starting
-.-- point and departing the end point is set in machine parameters for the
touch probe.
l Program length is limited only by the capacity of the external storage
device. After blocks 65535 the TNC begins numbering the blocks from
0 again.
l The touch probe scans the contour up to the next contour line.
l The TNC automatically marks the program beginning and end for data
. transfer.

TNC 370 9-29

9 3D Touch Probes
4
9.5 Using Digitized Data in a Part Program

Executing a part program from digitized data

Before the digitized data program can be transferred blockwise (see
page 3-6). it must be called into another program containing the following
data:
l Tool radius and length
l Feed rate of tool
l Radius compensation
l Spindle axis and rpm
l Miscellaneous function for spindle ON

Program example:
r
0 BEGIN PGM 444 MM .. ... .. ... ... ... .. ... .. .... .. ... .... .. Any number
1 TOOL DEF 1 L+30 R+4 ._.__................................ Tool data
2 TOOL CALL 1 Z SIOOO . . . Tool axis and spindle speed in rpm
3 L RO F500 M3 . ... ... ... .. . . .. ... .... ... .. ... .. .. . . . ... ... .. No tool radius compensation
4 CALL PGM EXT:34891 .H .... . . .. ....__.._______...... Call the file in which the digitized data are stored.
5 END PGM 444 MM

W +&e end of the surface data program from the CONTOUR LINEG q&Ye the ‘cool is returned to the programmed
starting point.

9-30 TNC 370

 9 3D Touch Probes

-._
9.7 Measuring Tools with the lT 120 Touch Probe

The TNC and the machine toaf must be set up by the machinetool buElderfor use of the TT 120. Tool measurement
with the 37’120 is ctnly availableon machinesw&h spindle control {oriented spindle stop).

In conjunction with the TNC’s tool measurement cycles, the TT 120

enables you to measure tools automatically. The compensation values
for tool length and radius are stored in the central tool file TO0L.T and
accounted for in the next tool call. The following types of tool measure-
ment are provided:

l Tool measurement while the tool is at standstill

l Tool measurement while the tool is rotating
l Measurement of the individual cutting edges

The tool measurement cycles are defined in the PROGRAMMING AND

EDITING mode of operation and are executed in a program run mode of
operation. The following cycles are available:

l TCH PROBE 30.0 l-i- CALIBRATE

l TCH PROBE 31.0 TOOL LENGTH
l TCH PROBE 32.0 TOOL RADIUS

Setting the machine parameters

The TNC measures a stationary tool with the probe feed rate defined in
MP6520 (see page 12-5).

When a rotating tool is to be measured, the TNC automatically calculates

L
the spindle speed and the probe feed rate.
The spindle speed is calculated as follows:
MP6570
L
n= 2 l R l r l 0.001

where n= Spindle speed [rpml

MP6570 = Max. permissible rotational speed
.
[m/min]
r= Active tool radius [mm]

The probe feed rate is derived from:

v = Measuring tolerance 9n

where v= Probe feed rate [mm/mini

Measuring tolerance = Measuring tolerance [mm],
depending on MP6507
n= Spindle speed [l/mini

MP6507 enables you to set the calculation of the probe feed rate (also
see page 12-5):

MP6507=0: The measuring tolerance remains constant regardless of

the tool radius. With very large tools, however, the probe
feed rate is decreased to zero. The smaller the maximum
rotational speed (MP6570) and the smaller the permissible
tolerance (MP6510). the sooner the feed rate will be
decreased.

TNC 370 9-31

9 3D Touch Probes
-
9.6 Measuring Tools with the lT 120 Touch Probe

MP6507=1: The measuring tolerance depends on the size of the tool

radius. This prevents the probe feed rate from being
decreased to zero when a tool with a large radius is being 4
measured. The TNC adjusts the measuring tolerance as
follows:

d
Tooi radius Messurlng taler8knce
Up to 30 mm MP6510
30 to 60 mm 2 . MP6510
60 to 90 mm 3 l MP6510
90to120mm 4 l MP6510

MP6507=2: The probe feed rate remains constant while the error of
measurement is increased linearly with the size of the tool
radius:

Measuring tolerance = l
r 5yL6P6; ’

where r= Tool radius [mm]

MP6510 = Maximum permissible error of measurement

Displaying the results of tool measurement

In the program run modes of operation, you can select the TEXT / TOOL
PROBE STATUS screen layout. The TNC then displays the program text
in the left and the measuring results in the right screen window (see page -
I-4). The measuring results that exceed the permissible wear tolerance
are marked with an asterisk (*I, and those that exceed the permissible
breakage tolerance are identified with the letter B.
-,

9-32 TNC 370

9 3D Touch Probes

9.6 Measuring Tools with the lT 120 Touch Probe

Calibrating the lT 120

* Before calibrating tha touch prrab;e,yau must enter the exact length and radius of the calibrating tmt into the
tcml table TOQC.1”.
* The posttim of thle ‘ITT120 within the machinework@ space must be defined by setting th@machine
parmtjtsrs 658O.Qto 6580.2 {.WB page ‘t2-5).

The lT 120 is calibrated automatically with the measuring cycle TCH

PROBE 30. The TNC also determines the center misalignment of the
calibrating tool. For this operation, the spindle is rotated by 180” when
the first half of the calibration cycle has been executed. The calibrating
tool must be a perfectly cylindrical part, such as a cylindrical pin. The
resulting calibration values are stored in the TNC memory and are
accounted for during subsequent tool measurement.

To program TCH PROBE 30.0:

Select the probing functions.

1 W) / Select the calibration cycle.

Enter the position in the tool axis at which there is no danger of

collision with the workpiece or fixtures.

Resulting NC blocks:

TOOL CALL 1 Z
TCH PROBE 30.0 CALIBRATE 77
TCH PROBE 30.1 HEIGHT +90

TNC 370 9-33

9 3D Touch Probes
-
9.6 Measuring Tools with the ll’ 120 Touch Probe

Measuring the tool length

Before me~stsuringa tool fbr the fir&t time, yaw must enter the fatlowing data m the tool into toot table T0QL.T {see
page 44 1f: the appraximm radius,the approximate fangth, the number al cutting edges, and the cutting direc&m.

The tool length is measured with the cycle TCH PROBE 31 TOOL
LENGTH. Depending on the selected input parameters you can deter-
mine the length of a tool by one of the following methods: -
l Measurement while the tool is rotating:
This method can be used if the tool diameter is larger than the
diameter of the measuring surface of the ll 120.
l Measurement while the tool is at standstill:
This method can be used if the tool diameter is smaller than the
diameter of the measuring surface of the TT 120. Used for drills or
spherical cutters.
l Measurement of the individual cutting edges of the tool while it is at
standstill:
This method can be used if the tool diameter is larger than the
diameter of the measuring surface of the TT 120.

Measuring cycle for measuring a tool during rotation

The TNC determines the longest cutting edge of a rotating tool by
positioning the tool to be measured at an offset to the center of the touch
probe system and then moving it towards the measuring surface until it
contacts the surface. The offset is programmed separately for each tool
in the tool table (1T:R-OFFS).

Measuring cycle for measuring a tool during standstill (e.g. for drills)
The TNC positions the tool to be measured over the center of the meas-
uring surface. It then moves the tool towards the measuring surface of
the lT 120 (without rotation of the spindle) until the tool contacts the
surface. To activate this function enter 0 for TOOL OFFSET: RADIUS
(TTz R-OFFS) in the tool table.

Measuring cycle for measuring single cutting edges

The TNC pre-positions the tool to be measured to a position at the side of
the touch probe head. The distance from the tool tip to the upper edge of
the touch probe head is defined in MP 6530. You can enter an additional
offset under TOOL OFFSET: LENGTH (TT: L-OFFS) in the tool table.
The tool is then probed radially during rotation to determine the starting
angle for measuring the single cutting edges.

With the aid of oriented spindle stops, the TNC then measures the length
of each cutting edge. To activate this function program TCH PROBE 31 =
1 for CUTTER MEASUREMENT.

9-34 TNC 370

 9 3D Touch Probes
L
9.6 Measuring Tools with the lT 120 Touch Probe

Input data
l MEASURE TOOL=0 / CHECK TOOL=1
Select whether a tool is to be measured for the first time or whether a
tool that has already been measured is to be inspected. If the tool is
being measured for the first time, the tool length L in the central tool
file TO0L.T is overwritten by the delta value DL = 0. If you wish to
inspect a tool, the TNC compares the measured length with the tool
length L that is stored in TO0L.T. It then calculates the positive or
negative deviation from the stored value and enters it into TO0L.T as
the delta value DL. The deviation can also be used for Q parameter
Q115 (see page 12-13). If the delta value is greater than the permissi-
ble tolerance for wear or breakage in the tool length, the TNC will lock
the tool (status L in TO0L.T).
l CLEARANCE HEIGHT
Position in the tool axis in which there is no danger of collision with the
workpiece or fixtures.
l CUTTER MEASUREMENT O=NO / l=YES
Here you can choose measurement of single cutting edges.

NC program blocks for measuring a rotating tool for the first time:

TOOL CALL 12 Z
TCH PROBE 31.0 TOOL LENGTH
TCH PROBE 31.1 CHECK: 0
TCH PROBE 31.2 HEIGHT: +I20
TCH PROBE 31.3
CUTTER MEASUREMENT: 0

NC program blocks for inspecting single cutting edges:

TOOL CALL 12 Z
TCH PROBE 31.0 TOOL LENGTH
TCH PROBE 31. I CHECK: 1
TCH PROBE 31.2 HEIGHT: +I20
TCH PROBE 31.3
CUTTER MEASUREMENT: 1

TNC 370 9-35

L
9 3D Touch Probes
e
9.6 Measuring Tools with the lT 120 Touch Probe

Measuring the tool radius

Befofore
measuringa tool far the first time, pu must srkterthe following data on the tool into toaf table TO0L.f {see
page 4-11 f: the approximets radius,rhe approximate lengrh, tine number of cu?$ngedges,and the cutting direction.

The tool radius is measured with the cycle TCH PROBE 32 TOOL
RADIUS. Depending on the selected input parameters you can determine
the radius of a tool by:

l Measuring the tool while it is rotating

l Measuring the tool while it is rotating and subsequently measuring the
individual cutting edges.

Measuring cycle
The TNC pre-positions the tool to be measured to a position at the side of
the touch probe head. The distance from the tool tip to the upper edge of
the touch probe head is defined in MP 6530. You can enter an additional
offset under TOOL OFFSET: LENGTH (TT: L-OFFS) in the tool table, for
example, for measuring the radius of a spherical cutter. The tool is then
probed radially during rotation.
-

If you have programmed a subsequent measurement of individual cutting

edges, the TNC measures the radius of each cutting edge with the aid of
oriented spindle stops.
d

Input data
. MEASURE TOOL=0 / CHECKTOOL=1 -
Select whether a tool is to be measured for the first time or whether a
tool that has already been measured is to be inspected. If the tool is
being measured for the first time, the tool radius R in the central tool
file TO0L.T is overwritten by the delta value DR = 0. If you wish to
inspect a tool, the TNC compares the measured radius with the tool
radius R that is stored in TO0L.T. It then calculates the positive or
negative deviation from the stored value and enters it into TO0L.T as
the delta value DR. The deviation can also be used for Q parameter
Q116 (see page 12-13). If the delta value is greater than the permissi-
ble tolerance for wear or breakage in the tool radius, the TNC will lock
the tool (status L in TO0L.T). -

l CLEARANCE HEIGHT
Position in the tool axis in which there is no danger of collision with the
workpiece or fixtures. 4
l CUTTER MEASUREMENT O=NO / l=YES
Here you can choose measurement of single cutting edges.

NC program blocks for measuring a rotating tool for the first time:

TOOL CALL 12 Z
4
TCH PROBE 32.0 TOOL RADIUS
TCH PROBE 32.1 CHECK: 0
TCH PROBE 32.2 HEIGHT: +I20
TCH PROBE 32.3
CUTTER MEASUREMENT: 0

NC program blocks for inspecting single cutting edges:

TOOL CALL 12 Z
TCH PROBE 32.0 TOOL RADIUS
TCH PROBE 32.1 CHECK: 1
TCH PROBE 32.2 HEIGHT: +I20
TCH PROBE 32.3
CUTTER MEASUREMENT: 1
-’
IO External Data Transfer

10.1 Functions for External Data Transfer ............................................. 10-2

Blockwise transfer ................................................................................................... 1 O-2

10.2 Pin Layout and Connecting Cable for Data Interface ................... 10-3
RS-232-C/V.24 Interface ........................................................................................ 1 O-3

10.3 Preparing the Devices for Data Transfer ....................................... IO-4

HEIDENHAIN devices.. ........................................................................................... 1 O-4
Non-HEIDENHAIN devices ..................................................................................... IO-4
IO External Data Transfer
e

The TNC features an W-232-C data interface for

transferring data to and from other devices. It can
be used in the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING
operating mode and in a program run mode.

RLBERT .H 162
Possible applications: CYCLS .H 1304

135K2 .I 2::
l Blockwise transfer (DNC mode) 108
l Loading program files into the TNC TOOL .T 8224 M
l Transferring program files from the TNC to TOOLP .TCH 36 M
external storage devices
l Printing files xx. x -25,500 T
+21.325 q B
+150.000 MS/g
C +90,000

Fig. 10.1: Screen layout for external data transfer

10.1 Functions for External Data Transfer

Select file management.
IIB

Select functions for external data transfer.

Transfer all programs from the storage medium

into the TNC

Display programs for transfer into the TNC

Transfer selected program into the TNC TRRNSFER

Transfer selected program to an external device

Transfer all programs which are in the memory of

the TNC to an external device

Display a program directory of the files stored in the SHOW EXT 1,

external device :)
DIRECTORY j’
i

Aborting data transfer

To abort a data transfer process, press DEL.

Jf you are transferring data between two TNC controls, the receiving control must be started first. To load programs
in HEIDENHAIN dialog format, the program input setting under MOD must be on HEIDENHAIN (see page 1 I-3).

Blockwise transfer
In the operating modes PROGRAM RUN/FULL SEQUENCE and SINGLE
BLOCK, it is possible to transfer programs which exceed the memory
capacity of the TNC by means of blockwise transfer with simultaneous
execution (see page 3-6).
 10 External Data Transfer

10.2 Pin Layout and Connecting Cable for Data Interface

RS-232-C/l/.24 Interface
HEIDENHAIN devices

Peripheral X21 Data interface RS-232-CN.24

unit

Id.-Nr. 274 545 01 Id.-Nr. 239 758 01 Id.-Nr. 286 998..

GND
TXD TXD Transmit data
RXD RXD Receive data
RTS DSR Data set ready
CTS GND Signal ground
DSR DTR Data terminal ready
.- GND CTS Clear to send
RTS Request to send

.-

‘- DTR

Fig. 10.2: Pin layout of the RS-232~C/V.24 interface for HEIDENHAIN devices
‘V

The connector pin layout on the TNC ia@c unit fX;L)?f is different from that on the adapter black.
.~ F!!J

Non-HEIDENHAIN devices
The connector pin layout on a non-HEIDENHAIN device may differ consid-
erably from that on a HEIDENHAIN device. The pin layout will depend on
the unit and the type of data transfer.

L-

TNC 370 1o-3

‘I 0 External Data Transfer
4

10.3 Preparing the Devices for Data Transfer

HEIDENHAIN devices
HEIDENHAIN devices (FE floppy disk unit and ME magnetic tape unit)
are designed for use with the TNC. They can be used for data transfer
without further adjustments.

Example: FE 401 Floppy Disk Unit

l Connect the power cable to the FE
l Connect the FE and the TNC with data transfer cable
l Switch on the FE
l Insert a diskette into the upper drive
l Format the diskette if necessary
l Set the interface (see page 1 I-5)
l Transfer the data

Non-HEIDENHAIN devices
The TNC and non-HEIDENHAIN devices must be adapted to each other.

Adapting a non-HEIDENHAIN device for a TNC --

l PC: Adapt the software
l Printer: Adjust the DIP switches

Adapting the TNC for a non-HEIDENHAIN device

Set user parameter 5020.
 11 MOD Functions, HELP Functions

11.1 Calling and Exiting the MOD Functions.. ....................................... 11-2

.-

11.2 Machine-Specific User Parameters ................................................ 11-2

11.3 Selecting the Programming Format and Unit of Measure ............ 11-3

11.4 Setting the Axis Traverse Limits .................................................... 11-4

11.5 Setting the External Data Interface ................................................. 11-5

RS-232-C Interface ................................................................................................. 1 1-5
BAUD RATE ............................................................................................................ 1 1-5

11.6 Selecting Position Display Types ................................................... 11-6

11.7 Code Numbers .................................................................................. 11-7

11.8 NC and PLC Software Numbers, Free Memory ............................. 11-7

11.9 HELP Function .................................................................................. 11-8

Selecting and exiting HELP .................................................................................... 1 l-8
11 MOD Functions

d’

The MOD function provides additional display and input possibilities. The
available MOD functions are selected via soft key, or directly with ENT.
-J

Machine-specific user parameters

Set traverse limits

Set the data interface

NC and PLC software numbers, show free

memory

I4/
Enter code number

11 .I Calling and Exiting the MOD Functions

To select the MOD function

Press the MOD key.

If necessary, select the desired MOD function by soft key.

Once you have activated the MOD function you can immediately select
l the position display type
l the unit of measure
l the programming format

To leave the MOD function

r
Press the END block key.
.’
e!!l

11.2 Machine-Specific User Parameters

The machine tool builder can assign functions to up to 16 USER
PARAMETERS. For more detailed information, refer to the operating
manual for the machine tool.

11-2 TNC 370

 11 MOD Functions
L

11.3 Selecting the Programming Format and Unit of Measure

The MOD function PROGRAM INPUT lets you choose between program-
ming in HEIDENHAIN plain language format or IS0 format. The selected
setting defines the programming format for creating a new program:
l To program in HEIDENHAIN format:
Set the PROGRAM INPUT function to HEIDENHAIN
l To program in IS0 format:
Set the PROGRAM INPUT function to IS0

The MOD function MM/INCH determines whether coordinates are

displayed or programmed in millimeters or inches. The selected setting
defines the unit of measure for creating a new program:
l Metric system: e.g. X = 15.789 (mm)
MOD function CHANGE MM/INCH
The value is displayed with 3 places after the decimal point
l Inch system: e.g. X = 0.6216 (inch)
MOD function CHANGE MM/INCH
The value is displayed with 4 places after the decimal point

TNC 370 11-3

11 MOD Functions

11.4 Setting the Axis Traverse Limits Z4

The MOD function AXIS LIMITS allows you to set
limits to axis traverse within the machine’s maxi-
mum working envelope. Z
max
Possible application: ‘min
to protect an indexing fixture from tool collision.
The maximum traverse range is defined by soft-
ware limit switches, This range can be additionally
limited through MOD function AXIS LIMITS. With
this function you can enter the maximum traverse max
positions for the positive and negative axis direc-
tions. These values are referenced to the scale
datum.

Fig. 11 .l: Traverse hmrts on the workpIece

Working without additional traverse limits

To allow certain coordinate axes to use their full range of traverse, enter
the maximum traverse of the TNC 370 (+/- 30 000 mm) as the AXIS
LIMIT.

To find and enter the maximum traverse:

I Select POSITION DISPLAY REF. I

I Move the spindle to the desired positive and negative end positions of the X, Y and Z axes. I

I Write down the values, noting the algebraic sign.

/ SelecttheMODfunctions.

LEnter the values that you wrote down as LIMITS in the corresponding axes. 1

Exit the MOD functions

* The tool radius is not automatically compensated in the axis traverse limits values,
* Traverse range tint&s and software limit sw&hes become a&@ as soon as the reference marks are crossed
over.
* In every axis the TNC checks whethet the negative limit is smallerthan the pasitiw one.
* The reference positions can also be captursd directctly with the func%n “Actual Position Capture”
(see page 4-243,

-~
11-4 TNC 370
 11 MOD Functions
L

11.5 Setting the External Data Interface

Two functions are available for setting the external data interface:
l K-232-C INTERFACE
l BAUD RATE
After pressing the soft key RS-232 SETUP, use the vertical arrow keys to
select the functions.

W-232-C Interface
The proper setting depends on the connected device.
Use the ENT key to select the required setting.

External d&w
HEIDENHAIN FE 401 and FE 401 B
floppy disk units
HEIDENHAIN ME 101 magnetic tape
(no longer in production) ME
L

Non-HEIDENHAIN units such as printers,

tape punchers, and PCs without TNC.EXE EXT
L No data transfer; e.g. digitizing without
transfer of digitized data, or operation
without connecting a device -empty-

BAUD RATE
The baud rate is the speed of data transfer in bits per second. Use the
ENT key to select the required baud rate.
L Available baud rates:
110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19 200, 38400 baud.
The ME 101 has a baud rate of 2400

TNC 370 11-5

11 MOD Functions
4

11.6 Selecting Position Display Types

The positions indicated in Fig. 11.2 are:
l Starting position @
l Target position of the tool @
l Workpiece datum @J
l Scale datum @

Fig. 11.2: Characteristic positions on the workpiece and scale

As standard, the TNC shows only actual positions. With the additional
position display you can also display the following types of position values:

l Nominal position (the value presently

commanded by the TNC) @ ... .. ... ... ... .... .. ... ... .. .... ... ..... .. ... .... ... ... NOML.
. Actual position (the position at which the
tool is presently located) @ .....__.._..........................................,.., ACTL.
l Servo lag (difference between the nominal
and actual positions) @ ... ... .... ... ... .. .... ... ... .. ... .. .... ... .. ... ... .. .... ... ... LAG
l Reference position (actual position as
referenced to the scale datum) @ ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .... .... ... ... ... ... .... .. REF
l Distance remaining to the programmed position
(difference between actual and target positions) @ . ..__DIST.

Select the desired information with the ENT key. It is then displayed
directly in the status field.

11-6 TNC 370

 11 MOD Functions
L

.
11.7 Code Numbers
The TNC asks for a code number before allowing access to certain
functions:

Funtiion Wisp number

Cancel erase/edit protection (status P) 86357
Select user parameters 123
Timers for:
Control ON
Program run
Swindle ON 857282

Code numbers are entered in the dialog field after the corresponding
MOD function is selected.

11.8 NC and PLC Software Numbers, Free Memory

Select this MOD function to see the software numbers of the NC and
PLC, and the amount of free memory (in number of characters).

TNC 370 11-7

11 MOD Functions
4

11.9 HELP Function PROGRRMMING RND EDITING

The supplementary operating mode HELP serves

as an abridged programming directory and provides
an overview of the functions that are available on
the TNC. It also displays the soft key structure of
each operating mode. The individual HELP texts
comprise several pages and can be selected with
the corresponding soft keys. You can use the arrow
soft keys to scroll through the pages on the screen.

Fig. 11.3: Screen layout with active HELP function

HELP text ~sstkey

List of G functions

List of D functions

r-n
I I

List of M functions

List of address letters

List of the globally effective Q parameters

for machining cycles

Selecting and exiting HELP

To select HELP

I m 1 Press the HELP key.

Select the desired HELP text with the corresponding soft key.

To exit HELP

Press the HELP key again.

11-8 TNC 370 -’

 12 Tables, Overviews and Dialogs

12.1 General User Parameters .................................................... . .......... 12-2

Selecting the general user parameters ....................................................................... 12-2

External data transfer .................................................................................................. 12-3
3D Touch probes and digitizing ................................................................................... 12-4
TNC displays, TNC editor ............................................................................................ 12-6
. .

Machining and program run ........................................................................................ 12-8

Override behavior, electronic handwheel .................................................................... 12-9

12.2 Miscellaneous Functions (M Functions) ............... . ..................... 12-10

Miscellaneous functions with predetermined effect .................................................. 12-l 0

Vacant miscellaneous functions ................................................................................ 12-l 1

12.3 Preassigned 0 Parameters . .. .. . . . . . . .. .. .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . 12-12

L
12.4 Features, Specifications and Accessories ................................. 12-14

Accessories ............................................................................................................... 12-l 6

L

12.5 TNC Error Messages ..................................................................... 12-17

TNC error messages during programming ............................................................... 12-l 7

TNC error messages during test run and program run ............................................ 12-18
TNC error messages during digitizing ....................................................................... 12-21
12 Tables, Overviews and Dialogs

12.1 General User Parameters

General user parameters are machine parameters which affect the
behavior of the TNC. These parameters set such things as:
l Dialog language
l Interface behavior
l Traversing speeds
l Machining sequence
l Effect of the overrides

Some machine parameters have more than one function. The input
value of such parameters is the sum of the individual values. For these
machine parameters the individual values are preceded by a plus sign
(4, +I, etc.)

Selecting the general user parameters

General users parameters are selected with code number 123 in the
MOD functions.

The MOD functions &IO include machine-speckk uww parameters.

12-2 TNC 370 -

12 Tables, Overviews and Dialogs

12.1 General User Parameters

30 Touch probes and digitizing

Select signal transmission type d

MP6010 Touch probe with cable transmission: 0

Touch probe with infrared transmission: 1
-‘
Probing feed rate for TS 120/TS 630

MP6120 60 to 3 000 Imm/minl

Maximum traverse to first probe point

MP6130 0 to 99 999.9999 tmml

Safety clearance over probe point during automatic measurement

MP6140 0 to 99 999.9999 [mm]

Rapid traverse for probing with TS 120/TS 630

MP6150 1 to 300 000 linm/minl

12-4 TNC 370

 12 Tables, Overviews and Dialogs
-..-
12.1 General User Parameters

30 Touch probes and digltizlng

Probing direction for measuring the radius with TT 120

MP6505 Positive probing direction in the angle reference axis (O” axis): 0
Positive probing direction in the +90” axis: 7
Negative probing direction in the angle reference axis (O” axis): 2
Negative probing direction in the +90” axis: 3
Probing feed rate for second measurement with TT 120, stylus shape, corrections in TD0L.T

MP6507 Calculate feed rate for second measurement with lT 120, with constant tolerance: +O
Calculate feed rate for second measurement with ll 120, with variable tolerance: +7
Constant feed rate for second measurement with TT 120: +2
TT 120 with cylindrical stylus: +O
TT 120 with cubic stylus: 44
Automatically send measuring results to TO0L.T: +O
Do not correct TO0L.T: +I.?8
Maximum permissible error when measuring rotating tool with TT 120

Required for calculating the probing feed rate in connection with MP6570.

L MP6510 0.007 to 0.999 [mm1 (recommended: 0.005 mm)

Probing feed rate for lT 120 for stationary tool

L MP6520 10 to 3 000 Imm/minl

Radius measurement with TT 120: Distance from lower edge of tool to upper edge of stylus

MP6530 0.001 to 9 999.9999 lmml

Rapid traverse for lT 120 in probe cycle

MP6550 10 to 10 000 fmm/minl

M function for spindle orientation when measuring single cutting edges with TT 120

MP6560 Oto88
Permissible rotational speed at circumference of milling tool when measuring rotating tools

MP6570 40.000 to 120.0000 tm/minl

Stylus center REF coordinates of TT 120

MP6580.0 X axis: -99 999.9999 to 99 999.9999 fmml

MP6580.1 Y axis: -99 999.9999 to 99 999.9999 [mm1
MP6580.2 Z axis: -99 999.9999 to 99 999.9999 [mm1

TNC 370 12-5

12 Tables, Overviews and Dialoas
-4
12.1 General User Parameters

Programming station -I

MP7210 TNC with machine: 0

TNC as programming station with active PLC: 7
TNC as programming station with inactive PLC: 2
Block number increment with IS0 programming

MP7220 0 to 750
Dialog language

MP7230 German: 0
English: 1
Configuration of tool tables

MP7260 Not active: 0

Number of tools per tool table: 7 to 99
Configuration of tool pocket tables

MP7261 Not active: 0

Number of pockets per pocket table: 1 to 99
Number of reserved pockets next to special tools in pocket tables

MP7264 0 to 3
Configuration of tool tables; column number in the tool table for (do not execute: 0)

MP7266.0 Tool name - NAME: 0 to 22

MP7266.1 Tool length - L: 0 to 22
MP7266.2 Tool radius - R: 0 to 22
MP7266.3 not used
MP7266.4 Tool length oversize - DL: 0 to 22
MP7266.5 Tool radius oversize - DR: 0 to 22
MP7266.6 not used
MP7266.7 Tool locked - TL: 0 to 22
MP7266.8 Replacement tool - RT: 0 to 22
MP7266.9 Maximum tool life - TIME1 : 0 to 22
MP7266.10 Maximum tool life for TOOL CALL - TIME2: 0 to 22
MP7266.11 Current tool age - CUR. TIME: 0 to 22
MP7266.12 Tool description - DOC: 0 to 22
MP7266.13 Number of teeth - CUT.: 0 to 22
MP7266.14 Wear tolerance for tool length - LTOL: 0 to 22
MP7255.15 Wear tolerance for tool radius - RTOL: 0 to 22
MP7266.16 Cutting direction - DIRECT.: 0 to 22
MP7266.17 PLC status - PLC: 0 to 22
MP7266.18 Tool end offset in addition to MP6530 from top of stylus - lT:L-OFFS.: 0 to 22
MP7266.19 Tool offset between stylus center and tool center - lT:R-OFFS.: 0 to 22
MP7266.20 Breakage tolerance for tool length - LBREAK: 0 to 22
MP7266.2 1 Breakage tolerance for tool radius - RBREAK: 0 to 22

-
12-6 TNC 370
 12 Tables, Overviews and Dialogs
L
12.1 General User Parameters

TNC &plays, TNC &tw

Configuration of tool pocket table; column number in the tool table for (do not execute: 0)

MP7267.0 Tool number -T: 0 to 5

MP7267.1 Special tool - ST: 0 to 5
MP7267.2 Fixed pocket - F: 0 to 5
MP7267.3 Pocket locked - L: 0 to 5
MP7267.4 PLC status - PLC: 0 to 5
..
Settings for MANUAL OPERATION mode

MP7270 Do not display feed rate: +O

Display feed rate: +I
Spindle speed S and M functions still active after STOP: +O
Spindle speed S and M functions no longer active after STOP: +2
Decimal character

MP7260 Decimal comma: 0

Decimal point: 1
Display step for coordinate axes
L
MP7260 0.001 mm: 0
0.005 mm: 1
Reset status display, 0 parameters and tool data
L

MP7300 Do not reset Q parameters and status display: +O

Reset Q parameters and status display with M02, M30 and END PGM: +I
Do not activate last programmed tool data after power interruption: +O
Activate last programmed tool data after power interruption: +4
Graphics display

MP7370 Projection in 3 planes according to IS0 6433, projection method 1: +O

Projection in 3 planes according to IS0 6433, projection method 2: +7
Do not rotate coordinate system for graphics display: +O
Rotate coordinate system for graphics display by 90”: +2

TNC 370 12-7

12 Tables, Overviews and Dialogs

12.1 General User Parameters

Madrining and program run

Position display in the tool axis J

MP 7285 Display referenced to tool datum: 0

Display referenced to tool face: 7
4
Effect of cycle 11 SCALING

MP74 70 SCALING effective in 3 axes: 0

SCALING effective in the working plane only: 7
Tool compensation data in probe cycle TOUCH PROBE 0

MP7477 Overwrite current tool data with the calibrated data of the 3D touch probe: 0
Retain current tool data: 7
Behavior of cycle 6 ROUGH-OUT

MP7420 Mill channel around contour in clockwise direction for islands and counterclockwise direction for
pockets: +O -
Mill channel around contour in clockwise direction for pockets and counterclockwise direction for
islands: +7
First mill the channel, then rough-out: +O
d
First rough-out, then mill the channel: +2
Merge compensated contours: +O
Merge uncompensated contours: +4
Complete one process for all infeeds before switching to the other process: +O
Mill channel and rough-out for each infeed depth before continuing to the next depth: +8
Overlap factor for cycle 4 POCKET MILLING and cycle 5 CIRCULAR POCKET

MP7430 0.1 to 7.474

Effect of M functions

MP7440 Program stop with M06: +O

No program stop with M06: +7
No cycle call with M89: +O
Modal cycle call with M89: +2
Program stop with M functions: +O
No program stop with M functions: +4
Angle of change in direction still traversed at constant contouring speed (corner with RO, inside corner also
radius-compensated)

Applicable for operation with servo lag and feed precontrol.

MP7460 0.0000 to 779.9999 [“I d

Coordinate display for rotary axis

MP7470 Angle display up to f 359.999”: 0 --

Angle display up to f 30 000”: 7

12-8 TNC 370

 12 Tables, Overviews and Dialogs
12.1 General User Parameters

Override behavior, &ctronie ha-~1

Override

MP7620 Feed rate override not effective when rapid traverse key pressed: +O
Feed rate override effective when rapid traverse key pressed: +l
Feed rate override not effective when rapid traverse key and machine axis direction button pressed: +O
Feed rate override effective when rapid traverse key and machine axis direction button pressed: +4
1% increments for feed rate override: +O
0.01 % increments for feed rate override: +8
Handwheel type

MP7640 Machine without handwheel: 0

HR 330 with additional keys -the handwheel keys for traverse direction and rapid traverse are
evaluated by the NC: 7
HR 130 without additional keys: 2
HR 330 with additional keys -the handwheel keys for traverse direction and rapid traverse are
evaluated by the PLC: 3
HR 332 with twelve additional keys: 4
Multi-axis handwheel with additional keys: 5
HR410: 6

TNC 370 12-9

12 Tables, Overviews and Dialogs

12.2 Miscellaneous Functions (M Functions)

4
Miscellaneous functions with predetermined effect

7% The machine toat builder dettermineswhich miscetlaneausfunctions are avail&e ctn your TNC and what effects
they have.
J

MOO Program run / Spindle STOP / Coolant OFF . 3-4

MO1 Optional interruption of program run . 3-7
MO2 Stop program run / Spindle STOP / Coolant OFF.
Clear the status display (depending on machine parameter) /
Return to block 1 . 3-4
MO3 Spindle ON clockwise .
MO4 Spindle ON counterclockwise .
MO5 Spindle STOP .
MO6 Tool change / Stop program run (depending on machine parameter) /
Spindle STOP . 3-4
MO8 Coolant ON .
MO9 Coolant OFF . 4

Ml3 Spindle ON clockwise / Coolant ON .

Ml4 Spindle ON counterclockwise / Coolant ON .
--

M30 Same function as MO2 . 3-4

M89 Vacant miscellaneous function or .
Cycle call, modally effective (depending on machine parameter) . 8-4 -

M90 Smoothing corners . 5-51

M91 Within positioning block: Coordinates are referenced to the machine datum l 5-54
M92 Within positioning block: Coordinates are referenced to a position defined
by the machine tool builder (such as tool chancre position) . 5-54
M93 Within positioning block: Coordinates are referenced to the current tool
position; effective in blocks with RO, R+, R- . 4-l 2
M94 Limit display of rotary axis to value under 360” . 5-55
M95 Reserved .

M96 Reserved .
M97 Machine small contour steps . 5-52
M98 Completely machine open contours . 5-53
M99 Blockwise cycle call . 8-4
Ml69 Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge on circular arcs
(increase and decrease feed rate) . 5-56
Ml 10 Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge on circular arcs
(feed rate decrease only) . 5-56
Ml11 ResetM109/MllO . 5-56
Ml26 Optimized traverse of rotary axes . 5-55
Ml27 Reset Ml26 . 5-55

12-l 0 TNC 370

 12 Tables, Overviews and Dialogs
L
12.2 Miscellaneous Functions (M Functions)

Vacant miscellaneous functions

, Vacant miscellaneous functions are defined by the machine tool builder.

They are described in the operating manual of your machine tool.

MO7 . M51 .
i Ml0 . M52 .

Ml1 . M53 .
Ml2 . M54 .

Ml5 . M55 .

Ml6 . M56 .
Ml7 . M57 .

Ml8 . M58 .
Ml9 . M59 .

M20 . M60 .
M21 . M61 .
M22 . M62 .

M23 . M63 .
M24 . M64 .

M25 . M65 .

M26 . M66 .
M27 . M67 .

M28 . M68 .

M29 . M69 .

M31 . M70 .

M32 . M71 .

M33 . M72 .

M34 . M73 .
M35 . M74 .

M36 . M75 .

M37 . M76 .
M38 . M77 .

M39 . M78 .
i
M40 . M79 .

M41 . M80 .
L
M42 . M81 .

M43 . M82 .
L M44 . M83 .
M45 . M84 .

M46 . M85 .
i
M47 . M86 .

M48 . M87 .

M49 . M88 .
M50 .
L

TNC 370 12-l 1

12 Tables, Overviews and Dialogs

12.3 Preassigned Q Parameters

The Q parameters 0100 to 0113 are assigned values by the TNC. Such
values include:

l Values from the PLC

l Tool and spindle data
l Data on operating status, etc.

Values from the PLC: QIOO to Q107

The TNC uses the parameters 0100 to Q107 to transfer values from the
PLC to an NC program.

Tool radius: Q108

The radius of the current tool is assigned to 0108.

Tool axis: Q109

The value of parameter 0109 depends on the current tool axis.

No tool axis defined 0109 = -1

Z axis 0109 = 2
Y axis Q109 = 1
X axis 0109 = 0

Spindle status: 01 IO
The value of Ql 10 depends on the M function last programmed for the
spindle.

M function Perameter value

No spindle status defined QIIO = -1
M03: Spindle ON, clockwise 0110 = 0
M04: Spindle ON, counterclockwise QIIO = 1
MO5 after MO3 QIIO = 2
MO5 after MO4 0110 = 3
4

Coolant on/off: Qll 1

4

tVl function Parameter value

M08: Coolant on 0111 = 1
M09: Coolant off 0111 = 0

‘4

12-l 2 TNC 370

 12 Tables, Overviews and Dialogs
L
12.3 Preassigned Q Parameters

Overlap factor: Q112

The overlap factor for pocket milling (MP 7430) is assigned to Q112.

Unit of measurement: Q113

The value of parameter 0113 specifies whether the highest-level NC
program (for nesting with PGM CALL) is programmed in millimeters or
inches. After NC start, 0113 is set as follows:

unit of msasuremsntImainpragram) Param*t value

Millimeters 0113 = 0
Inches Q113 = 1

Current tool length: 0114

The current value of the tool length is assigned to Q114.

Coordinates from probing during program run

Parameters Q115 to Q119 are assigned the coordinates of the spindle
position upon probing during a programmed measurement with the 3D
touch probe. The length and radius of the stylus are not included in
these coordinates.

Paramdet
X axis Q115
Y axis Q116
2 axis Q117
IVth axis Q118

L
Actual-nominal deviation during automatic tool measurement
with the TT 120 touch probe

Actual-nominaldevhtion PararrMer
X axis 0115
Y axis 0116

Current tool radius compensation

The current tool radius compensation is assigned to parameter Q123 as
follows:
.-.
Current tool radius oompansation Param**r value
RO Q123 = 0
\-

RL Q123 = 1
RR Q123 = 2
L
R+ Q123 = 3
R- Q123 = 4

TNC 370 12-13

12 Tables, Overviews and Dialogs

12.4 Features, Specifications and Accessories

Description Contouring control for up to four axes,

with oriented swindle stop
Components Logic unit, TE 370 or TE 371 keyboard,
monochrome flat luminescent screen with
soft kevs
Data interface RS-232-C / V.24
Simultaneous axis control Straight lines: up to 4 axes
for contour elements
Circles: up to 2 axes
Helices: 3 axes
Background programming For editing one part program while the
TNC is running another (not available with
FK free contour programming)
Test run Internally and with test run graphics
Program types HEIDENHAIN conversational format
IS0 programs
Tool table (program TO0L.T)
Pocket table (program TOOLP.TCH)
Program memory Battery-buffered for up to 64 programs
Capacity: approximately 5000 program
blocks (depending on the block lengths)
Tool definitions Up to 254 tools in one program or up to
99 tools in TO0L.T

TNC spe&icationd
Block processing time 10 ms per block (three-dimensional
straight line without radius compensation)
Control loop cycle time 6ms
Data transfer rate Max. 115 200 baud
Ambient temperature Operation: 0” to 45” C (32” to 113” F)
Storage: -30” to 70” C (-22” to 158” F) d

Traverse Max. f 100 m (2540 in.)

Traversing speed Max. 300 m/min (11 811 ipm) 4

Spindle speed Max. 99 999 rpm

Input range As fine as 1 urn (0.0001 in.) or 0.001” 4

12-14 TNC 370

 12 Tables, Overviews and Dialogs
L
12.5 Features, Specifications and Accessories

Contour elements Straight line

Chamfer
Circular arc
Circle center
Circle radius
Tangentially connecting arc
Corner rounding
Free contour programming For all contour elements not dimensioned
for NC
Program jumps Subprograms
Program section repetition
Main program as subprogram
Fixed cycles Drilling cycles for drilling, peck drilling,
reaming, boring, tapping with a floating tap
holder, rigid tapping
Roughing and finishing rectangular and
circular pockets
Cycles for milling straight and circular
slots
.-
Circular and linear patterns
Cycles for multipass-milling flat and
inclined surfaces
-- Milling pockets and islands from a list of
subcontour elements
Coordinate transformations Datum shift
Mirroring
Rotation
Scaling factor
3D touch probe system Touch probe functions for setting datums
and for automatic workpiece measurement
Digitizing 3D surfaces with the optional
TS 120 touch probe (conversational
programming only)
Automatic tool measurement with the
TT 120 touch probe
Mathematical functions Basic operations +, -, x, c
Trigonometric functions sin, cos, tan and
arctan
Square roots (6 ) and
Root sum of squares ( lla2)
Logical comparisons greater than, less
than, equal to, not equal to

TNC 370 12-15

12 Tables, Overviews and Dialogs
12.5 Features, Specifications and Accessories

Accessories

Description Portable bench-top unit

Applications All TNC contouring controls,
TNC 131, TNC 135
Data interfaces 2 RS-232-C/V.24 interface ports
Data transfer rate l TNC: 2400 to 38 400 baud
l PRT: 110 to 9600 baud
Floppy disk drives Two drives, one for copying,
capacity 795 kilobytes (approx.
25 000 blocks), UP to 256 files
Floppy disk type 3.5”, DS DD, 135 TPI

Description Touch probe system with ruby tip

and stylus with rated break point,
standard shank for spindle insertion
Models TS 220: Cable transmission, integrated interface
TS 630: Infrared transmission,
separate transmitting and receiving units
Spindle insertion TS 220: manual
TS 630: automatic
Probing reproducibility Better than 1 urn (0.000 04 in.)
Probing speed Max. 3 m/min (118 ipm)

Description Touch probe system with hardened,

stainless-steel probing element
(steel plate), class of protection: IP 67
Interface Connected to TNC via 5 V supply
Installation Fixed installation within the
machine working space
Probing speed Max. 3m/min (118 ipm)

Ekstrunio handwheels
HR 130 Integrable unit
HR 330 Portable version, transmission via cable.
Includes axis address keys, rapid traverse
key, safety switch, emergency stop button

-
12-16 TNC 370
 12 Tables, Overviews and Dialogs
L

12.5 TNC Error Messages

The TNC automatically generates error messages when it detects

problems such as
l Incorrect data input
l Logical errors in the program
l Contour elements that are impossible to machine
l Incorrect use of the touch probe system
An error message containing a program block number was caused by an
error in that block or in the preceding block. To clear a TNC error
message, first correct the error and then press the CE key.

Some of the more frequent TNC error messages are explained in the
following list.

TNC error messages during programming

ENTRYVALUElrwORREcT
_1
‘- l Enter a correct label number
l Observe the input limits

.-

The external device is not correctly connected.

Erase some old files to make room for new ones.

JUlhSPTOLARRLONOTPIElRMITTED
1
Do not program CALL LBL 0.

Label numbers can only be assigned once

TNC 370 12-17

12 Tables, Overviews and Dialogs
12.5 TNC Error Messages

TNC error messages during test run and program run

l Define the arc and its end points unambiguously.

l If you enter polar coordinates, define the polar coordinate angle
correctly.

You have attempted to calculate with illegal values

l Define values within the range limits.
l Choose probe positions for the 3D touch probe that are farther
separated.
l Calculations must be mathematically possible.

Each axis can only have one value for position coordinates.

l Program the MIN and MAX points according to the instructions.

l Choose a ratio of sides less than 84:l.
l When programming with PGM CALL, copy the BLK FORM into the
main program.

l A chamfer block must be inserted between two straight line blocks.

l A running program cannot be changed.
l Do not edit a program while it is being transferred or executed.

l Enter complete information for tangential arcs

l Enter end points that lie on the circular path.

l Define the cycle with all data in the proper sequence.

l Do not call coordinate transformation cycles.
l Define a cycle before calling it.
l Enter a pecking depth other than 0.

l Conclude subprograms with LBLO.

l Program CALL LBL for subprograms without REP.
l Program CALL LBL for program section repeats to include the
repetitions (REP).
l Subprograms cannot call themselves.
l Subprograms cannot be nested in more than 8 levels.
l Main programs cannot be nested as subprograms in more than 4
levels.

12-l 8 TNC 370

 12 Tables, Overviews and Dialogs
L
12.5 TNC Error Messages

l Enter the feed rate for the positioning block

l Enter FMAX in each block.

GROSS PQSITIQNING ERROR

L The TNC monitors positions and movements. If the actual position

deviates to greatly from the nominal position, this blinking error message
is displayed. Press the END key for a few seconds to acknowledge the
error message (warm start).

KEY NUN-rnNCTIQNAI,

This message always appears when you press a key that is not needed
for the current dialog.

You can only call labels numbers that have been assigned.

Do not cancel tool radius compensation in a block with a circular

path.

l Use the same radius compensation before and after a RND and CHF
block.
l Do not begin tool radius compensation in a block with a circular path.

L
l Enter a smaller tool radius.
l Movements in a rotary axis cannot be graphically simulated.
l Enter a tool axis for simulation that is the same as the axis in the BLK
FORM.

PLANE WRfXWLY DEFINRD

,N., 3
l Do not change the tool axis while a basic rotation is active.
l Define the main axes for circular arcs correctly.
l Define both main axes for CC.

PROBE SYSTEM NOT READY

1
l Orient transmitting/receiving window of TS 630 to face receiving unit.
l Check whether the touch probe is ready for operation.

l Begin the program only with a TOOL DEF block.

l Do not resume an interrupted program at a block with a tangential arc
or pole transfer.

TNC 370 12-1s

 12 Tables, Overviews and Dialoas
4
12.5 TNC Error Messages

J
Enter radius compensation in the first subprogram to Cycle 14:
CONTOUR GEOM.

d
ROUNDING-OFIF
x7llmrnND
1
Enter tangentially connecting arcs and rounding arcs correctly. -

ROUNDING RADMS TOU LARGE

Rounding arcs must fit between contour elements.

Before a test run or program run you must go to the beginning of the
program by entering GOT0 0.

ALREAnY @I CONTACT

Before probing, pre-position the stylus so that it is not touching the

workpiece surface.

Enter a tool radius that

l lies within the given limits, and
l permits the contour elements to be calculated and machined.

TOUCH POINT INACCESSTHLE

Pre-position the 3D touch probe to a point nearer the surface.

l Do not attempt to program locked axes.

l Program a rectangular pocket or slot in the working plane
l Do not mirror rotary axes,
l Chamfer length must be positive.

WRONG RPM

Program a spindle speed within the permissible range.

WRUNG SIGN PROG-

Enter the correct sign for the cycle parameter.

12-20 TNC 370

 12 Tables, Overviews and Dialogs
L
12.5 TNC Error Messages

TNC error messages during digitizing

Program two different axes for the coordinates of the starting point
(CONTOUR LINES cycle).

DA’IWlM SIIiFl’ NUT PERMITTED

Reset all coordinate transformations before digitizing.

EXCHANGE TOWI% PROBE BATTERY

Exchange the battery in the touch probe head. This message is dis-
played when the probe reaches the end of a line.

FAULT-57RANGE DATA
1
l Enter MIN coordinates that are smaller than their MAX coordinates.
l Define the RANGE within the limits set by software limit switches.
l Define the RANGE for the MEANDER and CONTOUR LINES cycles.

MIRRWING NO’S H%tMITTED

Reset all coordinate transformations before digitizing.

I’LANE WRONGLY DEJJKNED

I
Define the starting position coordinates (CONTOUR LINES cycle) in
axes different from the stylus axis.

l Orient transmitting/receiving window of TS 630 to face receiving unit.

l Check that the touch probe is ready for operation.
l The touch probe cannot be retracted (collision with workpiece).

RANGE EXCEEDED
I
Enter a RANGE that includes the entire 3D surface to be scanned.

ROTATION NOT PERMITTED

Reset all coordinate transformations before digitizing.

SCALING FACTOR NOT PERMITTED

L
Reset all coordinate transformations before drgitizing.

START PClSITKhNINCORRECT

Program the starting point coordinates for the CONTOUR LINES cycle
so that they lie within the RANGE.

TNC 370 12-21

12 Tables, Overviews and Dialogs
12.5 TNC Error Messages

Pre-position the touch probe so that the stylus cannot be deflected

before it reaches the RANGE.

Enter a TIME LIMIT that is appropriate to the 3D surface to be scanned

(CONTOUR LINES cycle).

l The stylus must not be deflected before it reaches the RANGE.

l The stylus must be deflected somewhere within the RANGE.

Enter calibrated touch probe axis in the RANGE cycle.

12-22 TNC 370

 Stichwortverzeichnis
4

4
A D G
Actual position capture ................ .4-24 Datum setting ............................... I-21 Graphic simulation ....................... I-30 ~
Additional axes ............................. I-20 General information .. .............. .I-21
Arc radius R ................................. 5-20 with the 3D touch probe .............. 9-9 H
Axis traverse limits ....................... 1 1-4 at a circle center ................... 9-1 2 Handwheel ..................................... 2-3 -/
corner as datum ................. ..9- 10
B Helical interpolation ..................... .5-33
in a specific axis .................... .9-9 Helix .............................................. 5-33
Basic rotation ................................ .9-7 without a 3D touch probe .......... .2-7 HELP function .............................. 1 1-8
Cancelling ................................... 9-8 in the tool axis ....................... .2-7 Hemisphere .................................. 7-20
Displaying ................................... 9-8 in the working plane .............. .2-8 Hexagon
BAUD RATE ................................. 1 l-5 Datum shift ................................... 8-61 Milling ...................................... .5-29
Blank form definition .................. ..4- 1 9 Dialog ............................................. 4-2
Blocks Digitized data I
Erasing ....................................... 4-4 Use .......................................... .9-29
Digitizing ....................................... 9-21 If-then operations ......................... .7-9
Inserting ..................................... 4-3
Marking blocks to be skipped CONTOUR LINES cycle .......... 9-26
..4-2 5
MEANDER cycle ..................... .9-24
L
Selecting .................................... .4-3
to be skipped during RANGE cycle ........................... 9-22 Linear pattern ............................... 8-36
program run ........................... .3-7 Using digitized data .................. 9-29
Blockwise transfer ......................... .3-6 Direction of rotation DR ................ 5-l 4 M
Boring ............................................. 8-9 Display modes .............................. 1-27
M Functions ................................ 12-1 0
3D view ..................................... 1-29
Machine parameters .................... 12-2 -
C Detail magnification .............. I-30
Machine-specific user parameters 1 1-2
Rotating ................................ 1-29
Cartesian coordinate system ....... l-l 9 Machining corners ........................ 4-18
Interactive graphics .................. 1-34
Circle center CC ................ 5-14, 5-l 5 Main program as subprogram \--/
Plan view .................................. 1-27
Programming ............................ 5-16 Calling ......................................... 6-8
Projection in three planes ........ I-28
Circular pattern ............................. 8-35 Operating limits ......................... .6-8
Moving sectional planes ....... 1-28
Circular pocket Principle ...................................... 6-8
Distance-to-go .............................. 1-23
Finishing ................................... 8-23 Mathematical functions .................. 7-6 -
Drilling ............................................. 8-7
Roughing .................................. 8-22 Mirror image ................................. 8-63
Drilling with chip breaking ........... .8-10
Circular slot .................................. 8-30 Miscellaneous function M .............. .2-6
Dwell time .................................... .8-68
Circular stud Completely machining open
Finishing ................................... 8-25 E contours: M98 ...................... 5-53
Code numbers .............................. 1 1-7 Displaying rotary axes: M94 ... .5-55
Contour ........................................... 5-4 Ellipse ........................................... 7-l 8 Entering ........................... 2-6, 4-23 _,
Approaching ...................... 5-4, 5-6 Entering comments ...................... 4-26 Feed rate at circular arcs:
Departing ........................... 5-5, 5-6 Error messages .......................... 12-l 7 Ml09 .................................... 5-56
Contour line digitizing ................... 9-26 External data transfer .................. 1 o-2 Machining contour steps: M97 .5-52
Coordinate transformations ........ .8-60 Setting the coordinates for the
F datum: M91/M9 .................... 5-54
Cycle
PROGRAM CALL ..................... 8-68 Feed rate Smoothing corners: M90 ......... .5-51
Cycles Changing .................................... 2-6 Traversing rotary axes: Ml26 ., 5-55 -
Calling ......................................... 8-4 Duration .................................... 4-21 Miscellaneous Functions
Defining ...................................... 8-3 Free contour programming Overview ................................ 12-l 0
Graphic support ......................... 8-3 Circular arcs ............................. 5-44 MODfunctions 4
Auxiliary points .................... .5-47 Exiting ....................................... 1 l-2
D Closed contours ...................... .5-47 Selecting ................................... 1 1-2
Contour elements ..................... 5-36 Moving the machine axes .............. 2-2 -
Data interface ............................... 1 O-3
Examples for exercise ............. .5-48 With incremental jog positioning 2-4
Pin layout .................................. 1 O-3
FK Functions ............................ 5-39 With the axis direction keys ..... ..2- 2
Setting ...................................... 1 1-5
General information ........ 5-2, 5-36 With the handwheel ................... 2-3
Data transfer ................................ 1 O-4
Interactive graphics .................. 5-38 Multipass milling ........................... 8-55
HEIDENHAIN devices .............. 1 O-4
Several solutions ...................... 5-38
Non-HEIDENHAIN devices ..... .I O-4
Straight lines ............................ 5-40
N
Slope .................................... 5-41 NC ................................................ 1-18 -
Free memory NC software number .................... 1 1-7
Displaying ................................. 11-7 Nesting ........................................... 6-9
Full circle ........................... 5-l 9, 5-31 Nesting depth ................................. 6-9 -
Fundamentals of NC .................... l-l 8

TNC 426
 %chwortverzerchnrs

0 P T
Iptronal tnterruptron of a Princrple ..................................... .6-5 Technical information ................. 12-14
program run .......................... .3-7 Programming notes .................... 6-5 Test run
Orrented sprndle stop ................. 8-69 Programming ............................... l-l 8 Executing ................................... .3-2
Programming formats .................. 1 1-3 Interrupting ............................... 3-2
4>
TNC 370 ......................................... I-2
0
Part program ............................ l-l 8 Accessorres ................ l-l 7, 12-16
‘ath contours Error messages .................... 12-l 7
0 parameters
Cartesran coordrnates ............. 5-9 Graphics ................................. I-27
Checking ..................... ......... 7-1 1
Chamfer .......................... 5-l 2 Operating panel ...................... 1-3
Output ........................ 7-l 2, 7-1 3
Ctrcular path C around Preassrgned ......................... 12-1 2 Screen layout ............................. 1-4
circle center CC ................ 5-17 Soft key structure ....................... 1-7
Circular path CR with defined R FK Programming ................. I-13
radrus .......................... 5-20 HANDWHEEL .................... l-8
Rapid traverse .......................... .4-21 HELP function ...................... l-l 6
Circular path CT wrth tangentral
Readrng from system data .......... .7-14
connection ....... 5-23 MOD function ....................... l-l 6
Reaming ...................................... .8-8 Program Run .......................... 1-9
Corner rounding RND ......... 5-25
Reference marks ......................... 1-25 Programmrng and Editing .... l-l 0
Straight line ..................... 5-9
Reference system ........................ l-l 9 Tool
Free contour programmrng .. ..5-3 6
Rotary axes ............................. I-20
Polar coordrnates ............... 5-27 Compensation values .............. .4-l 5
Rotatron .................................... 8-65
Circular path CP around Data ........................................... .4-5
Rough-out ................................. 8-42
pole CC ........................ 5-30 Calling ................................. .4-l 3
RS-232-C Interface ..................... 1 1-5 Delta values ......................... .4-6
Circular path CTP wrth
Ruled surface ............................. 8-57 Entering
tangential connectron ........... 5-32 ... .............................. 4-7
Length L .................................. .4-5
Stratght line LP ................. 5-27 S
Path functrons ......... ................. 5-2 Number ..................................... 4-5
General rnformatron .............. 5-7 Scaling factor .......... ... .............. 8-66 Pocket table ........................... ..4- 12
Overvrew ...................... 5-8 Screen layout ................................. 1-4 Position ................................ .,.4-l 4
8-6 SL cycles ................................ .8-40 Radius R .................................... ,4-5
r’eckrng ...............................
Pitch crrcle .............................. 8-35 Contour geometry .................. .8-41 Table ................................. 4-9
‘LC software number ............. 1 1-7 Contour milling ....................... 8-51 Tool change ............................ 4-1 4
locket Overlapping contours ............. .8-44 Automatic .............................. 4-l 4
Finrshrng ........................... .8-18 Pilot drrllrng .............................. 8-50 Manual .................................. 4-14
Mrllrng Rough-out ............................... 8-42 Tool changer ............................ 4-1 2
............ ............. 8-17
olar coordrnates Scheme ................................ 8-52 Tools
General rnformatron ............ l-20 Slot Measuring tools automatrcally .9-31
Polar Angle PA ..................... I-20 with recrprocating plunge-cut ... 8-28 Touch probe functions ............ .9-4
Polar Radrus PR .................... I-20 Slot milling ................................... .8-27 Touch probe system
r’ole CC ......................... 1-21, 5-27 Slot mrllrng with reciprocating plunge- Calibration ................................ 9-5
Posrtron drsplay types ............... 1 1-6 cut ..................................... .8-28 Length .................................. 9-5
7osrtion encoders ....................... I-25 Soft key structure .......................... 1-7 Radius .............................. 9-6
‘osrttoning Spindle speed Measuring with the ........... .9-l 4
wrth Manual Data Input ............ 5-57 Changing ........... ..................... 4-22 Trigonometric functions ................ 7-8
Program ................ .................. I-36 Status display ............................. 1-31
AddItIonal ............ .................... I-31 U
Changrng ..................... ........ 4-3
Copying .............................. I-38 STOP function ............................. .4-23 Unit of measure ............................ 1 1-3
Directory .............................. I-36 Stud finishing ............................... .8-20 User parameters ............... 11-2, 12-2
Edrtrng ............. ................... 4-2 Subprograms ............................... .6-2
Erasing ..................... ........... I-39 Callrng .................................... ..6- 3 w
Layout ................................... .4-2 Operating lrmits ...................... 6-2
Principle ............. Words
Management ......................... I-36 .................. 6-2
Editing .................................. 4-4
Protecting ............................. I-37 Switch-on ................ .............. 1-26
Finding .................................... 4-3
Renaming ............................. 1-38
Selectrng ............................. I-37
T Inserting .................................. 4-4
Selecting .................................. .4-3
Size ..... ............................. I-36 Tangenttal connectron of a contour Workpiece .................................... I-23
Status ............ .................. I-36 element ............................. 5-23 Compensating misalignment ... ..9- 7
Program run Tapping ............ ...................... 5-35 Positions ................................... I-23
Aborting ................ ................. 3-4 Rrgrd tapping ........................ .8-l 3 Absolute ............................... I-23
Interrupting ............................. .3-4 with a floating tap holder ......... .8-12 Incremental ......................... I-23
Resumrng after an Interruptron ..3- 5
‘rogram section repeats ............... .6-5
Calling .... .................. ........ 6-5

TNC 426
Miscell aneous Functions (M Functions)
M Functions with predetermined effect

7s The machine
they have.
tool builder determines which miscelfaneous functiczns are available on your TPIC and what effects

M EffWt Effective at block Page

start end
MOO Program run / Spindle STOP / Coolant OFF . 3-4
MO1 Optlonal interruption of program run . 3-7
MO2 Program run / Spindle STOP / Coolant OFF.
Clear the status display (depending on machine parameter) /
Return to block 1 . 3-4
MO3 Spindle ON clockwlse .
MO4 Spindle ON counterclockwlse .
MO5 Spindle STOP .
MO6 Tool change / Stop program run idependlng on machine parameter) /
Spindle STOP . 3-4
MO8 Coolant ON .
MO9 Coolant OFF .
Ml3 Spindle ON clockwise / Coolant ON .
d
Ml4 Spindle ON counterclockwise / Coolant ON .

M30 Same function as MO2 . 3-4

. 4
MB9 Vacant miscellaneous function or
Cycle call, modally effective (depending on machine parameter) . 8-4
M90 Smoothing corners . 5-51
d
M91 Within positioning block: Coordinates are referenced to the machine datum . 5-54
M92 Wlthin positioning block: Coordinates are referenced to a position defined
by the machine tool builder (such as tool change position) . 5-54
M93 Within positioning block: Coordinates are referenced to the current tool
position: effective In blocks with RO, R+, R- * 4-12
d
M94 Limit display of rotary axis to value under 360” . 5-55
M95 Reserved .
. d
M96 Reserved
M97 Machine small contour steps . 5-52
M98 Completely machine open contours . 5-53 4

M99 BlockwIse cycle call . 8-4

Ml09 Constant contourlng speed at tool cutting edge on circular arcs 4
(increase and decrease feed rate) . 5-56
Ml 10 Constant contourlng speed at tool cutting edge on circular arcs
(feed rate decrease only) . 5-56
. w
Ml11 Reset M 109/M 110 5-56
Ml 26 Optimized traverse of rotary axes . 5-55
Ml27 Reset Ml26 . 5-55 V

4
L

Sequence of Program Steps

Milling an outside contour

Program step Refer to

Section

1 Create or select program 4.4

Input: Program number
Unit of measure for programming
Plain language or IS0 format
2 Define workpiece blank for graphics

3 Define tools 4.2

Input: Tool number
Tool length
Tool radrus
4 Call tool data 4.2
Input: Tool number
Spindle axis
L
Spindle speed
5 Tool change e.g. 5.4
Input: Coordrnates of the tool change position nY
L Radius compensation
Feed rate (rapid traverse)
Miscellaneous function (tool change)
6 Move to starting position
Input:
Radius compensation (RO)
nY 5.215.4
donates of the starting position

Feed rate (rapid traverse)

Mrscellaneous function (spindle on, clockwise)
7 Move tool to (first) working depth 5.4
Input: Coordinate of the (first) working depth nY
Feed rate (rapid traverse)
8 Move to first contour point
L Input: a’ dinates of the frrz?c%our
point
Radrus compensation for machining
L Machining feed rate
If desired, with smooth approach: RND after this block
9 Machining to last contour point 5 to 8
L Input: Enter all necessary values for

10 Move to end position 5.215.4

L

Input: Coordrnates of the end position

Radius compensation (RO)
L Miscellaneous function (spindle stop)
if desired, with smooth departure: RND after this block
11 Retract tool in spindle axis 5.215.4
i. Input: Coordinates above the workpiece
Feed rate (rapid traverse)
Miscellaneous function (end of program)
L
12 End of program

L
HEIDENHAIN
DR. JOHANNES HEIDENHAIN GmbH
Dr.-Johannes-Heldenhain-Stral3e 5
D-83301 Traunreut, Deutschland
‘B (08669) 31-O. ITx 56832
Ed1086691 5061
S? Service (08669) 31-1272
%Z’ TNC-Service (08669) 31-1446
lFAxl(O 86 69) 98 99
http://www.heidenhain.de

289 753-22 SW07 1 5198 S Punted in Germany Subpct to change wthout notice